Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

167 downloads 1105 Views 8MB Size Report

This content was uploaded by our users and we assume good faith they have the permission to share this book. If you own the copyright to this book and it is wrongfully on our website, we offer a simple DMCA procedure to remove your content from our site. Start by pressing the button below!

Report copyright / DMCA form

DOWNLOAD PDF

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

Jayanta Mukhopadhyay

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

K11443_FM.indd 3

2/9/11 11:48 AM

MATLAB® is a trademark of The MathWorks, Inc. and is used with permission. The MathWorks does not warrant the accuracy of the text or exercises in this book. This book’s use or discussion of MATLAB® software or related products does not constitute endorsement or sponsorship by The MathWorks of a particular pedagogical approach or particular use of the MATLAB® software.

Chapman & Hall/CRC Taylor & Francis Group 6000 Broken Sound Parkway NW, Suite 300 Boca Raton, FL 33487-2742 © 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC Chapman & Hall/CRC is an imprint of Taylor & Francis Group, an Informa business No claim to original U.S. Government works Printed in the United States of America on acid-free paper 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 International Standard Book Number: 978-1-4398-2935-6 (Hardback) This book contains information obtained from authentic and highly regarded sources. Reasonable efforts have been made to publish reliable data and information, but the author and publisher cannot assume responsibility for the validity of all materials or the consequences of their use. The authors and publishers have attempted to trace the copyright holders of all material reproduced in this publication and apologize to copyright holders if permission to publish in this form has not been obtained. If any copyright material has not been acknowledged please write and let us know so we may rectify in any future reprint. Except as permitted under U.S. Copyright Law, no part of this book may be reprinted, reproduced, transmitted, or utilized in any form by any electronic, mechanical, or other means, now known or hereafter invented, including photocopying, microfilming, and recording, or in any information storage or retrieval system, without written permission from the publishers. For permission to photocopy or use material electronically from this work, please access www.copyright.com (http://www.copyright.com/) or contact the Copyright Clearance Center, Inc. (CCC), 222 Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, 978-750-8400. CCC is a not-for-profit organization that provides licenses and registration for a variety of users. For organizations that have been granted a photocopy license by the CCC, a separate system of payment has been arranged. Trademark Notice: Product or corporate names may be trademarks or registered trademarks, and are used only for identification and explanation without intent to infringe. Visit the Taylor & Francis Web site at http://www.taylorandfrancis.com and the CRC Press Web site at http://www.crcpress.com

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

K11443_FM.indd 4

2/9/11 11:48 AM

Dedicated to my parents.

v

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

Preface With more and more images and videos being available in the compressed format, researchers have started taking interest in the aspect of designing algorithms for different image operations directly in their domains of representation. This would not only avoid the inverse and forward transformation steps and potentially make the computation faster but also would keep the buffer requirement less as the storage required for processing the compressed stream is less than that with its uncompressed representation. This book attempts to comprehensively treat this topic of interest and deals with the fundamentals and properties of various image transforms used in image and video compression. Subsequently, their application in designing image and video processing algorithms in the compressed domain are discussed. To provide better understanding of the domain of research, different image and video compression techniques are briefly covered in the first chapter. In particular, discrete cosine transform (DCT) - based compression algorithms (such as JPEG, MPEG, and H.264) and discrete wavelet transform (DWT) based JPEG2000 are discussed with more details. This is followed by discussion on key properties of various transform spaces with special emphasis on the block DCT space and the DWT. Different types of image and video processing operations performed in the compressed domain are discussed in subsequent chapters. This includes filtering, enhancement and color restoration, image and video resizing, transcoding, etc. In addition, different other applications in the compressed domain such as video and image editing, digital watermarking and steganography, image and video indexing, face detection and identification, etc., are briefly covered in the last chapter. This book is meant for readers who have gone through a first-level course on digital image processing and are familiar with the basic concepts and tools of image and video processing. However, at the introductory level, the details of compression techniques and properties of the transform domain are not always extensively covered. The first two chapters of this book discuss these issues at considerable depth. For the sake of completeness, an effort has also been made to develop concepts related to compressed domain processing from the very basic level so that a first-time reader also does not have any problem in understanding them. The book has seven chapters. In the first chapter, the motivation and background for processing images and videos in the compressed domain are discussed. There is also a brief introduction to different popular image and video compression algorithms, notably JPEG, JPEG2000, MPEG-2, MPEG4, and H.264 standards for lossy image and video compression schemes. Issues related to compressed domain analysis and performance metrics for comparing different algorithms are also elaborated in this chapter. The second chapter elucidates the definitions and properties of different image transforms, in particular, the discrete fourier transform (DFT), DCT, integer cosine transform (ICT), and DWT. The last three transforms are chovii

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

viii sen because of their use in compression technologies. In subsequent chapters, some of the core operations such as filtering, resizing, etc., which find use in various approaches in image and video analysis exploiting these properties, are discussed. The third chapter considers image filtering in the block DCT domain. In this chapter the convolution and multiplication properties of DCTs are elaborated, followed by discussion on different approaches for computing the filtered response directly in the compressed domain. Typical applications of filtering are also briefly presented in this chapter. In chapter four, with a general introduction to color processing in the compressed domain, a few representative problems are considered. The first one is related to image enhancement and restoration through saturation and desaturation of colors. In the second case, the problem of color constancy is introduced, and various approaches for solving this problem in spatial and compressed domain are illustrated. A comparative study of different representative schemes is also presented here. Next, the problem of enhancing colors in the block DCT domain is taken into account, and different algorithms for performing this task are discussed. Chapter five focusses on the image resizing problem in the block DCT space. Different approaches are discussed in this regard. Initially, various techniques for image halving and doubling are discussed. Later, the problem of arbitrary resizing is considered. The chapter also introduces the concept of hybrid resizing and discusses its solution in the block DCT space. The problem of video resizing, in particular video downsampling, is discussed in the next chapter on transcoding. In chapter six, transcoding of images and videos is discussed. As most of the image and video standards use the DCT, ICT, or DWT for their representation, first, techniques for intertransform conversion are discussed. These are followed by a discussion on various types of transcoding operations. The topics of interest include transcoding of a JPEG2000 image into JPEG, an H.264 video into MPEG-2, and vice versa. The discussion is facilitated with the introduction of different measures related to the performance of a transcoder. The chapter also discusses techniques for altering temporal and spatial resolution of videos by skipping frames at regular intervals and reducing their frame sizes, respectively. At the end of the chapter, error-resilient transcoding of the video stream is also discussed. There are various other applications of processing of images and videos in the compressed domain. They include different video editing operations such as key frame extraction, caption localization, object recognition, etc. There are also different methods of indexing videos using features computed from the block DCT and DWT spaces. Image and video steganography and watermarking in the compressed domain are also major topics of research in the area of multimedia security. All these different facets of compressed domain analysis are put together in the concluding seventh chapter. Even after going through several revisions of the text, I always found scopes

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

ix for improvements at every iteration. Finally, I had to settle for this version to meet the deadline and other commitments. I would greatly appreciate if the readers of this book, after encountering errors in the printed text, would bring them to my notice. While working in this area I have been fortunate to have had the guidance and friendship of Professor Sanjit K. Mitra of the University of Southern California, Los Angeles. I take this opportunity to express my deepest gratitude and respect for his constant encouragement and enlightenment. I am also thankful to my colleagues Professor P.K. Biswas and Professor Rajeev Kumar of IIT, Kharagpur, who have worked with me in this area of research. My gratitude also goes to my former students Dr. K. Viswanath, Dr. V. Patil, Mr. Sudhir Porwal, and Ms. T. Kalyani, who contributed in this area at different stages and enriched my understanding of this topic. Professor Shamik Sural of IIT, Kharagpur, went through several versions of this book and greatly helped in improvising the present edition. Without his help and constant encouragement, it would not have been possible for me to complete this book. I also thank Dr. Sreepat Jain of CRC press who invited me to write this book and initiated the project. Later, I received able support from Ms. Aastha Sharma and Ms. Jessica Vakili toward its completion. I am grateful to Jim McGovern who did an extensive proof reading of the manuscript and helped me to correct many typos and grammars in this book. Though I am pretty sure my wife Jhuma and my son Rudrabha will be least interested in reading the book’s content, they would be at least happy to see the end of their nightmare due to my late-night intellectual exercises to meet the submission-deadline. I especially thank them for their support, patience, and understanding. Finally, I dedicate this book to my parents, from whom I learned my first lessons with the greatest joy ever I had in my life.

Jayanta Mukhopadhyay 24th September, 2010 IIT Kharagpur, India

MATLABr is a trademark of The MathWorks, Inc. For product information, please contact: The MathWorks, Inc. 3 Apple Hill Drive Natick, MA 01760-2098 USA Tel: 508 647 7000 Fax: 508-647-7001 E-mail: [email protected] Web: www.mathworks.com

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

List of Figures

1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10 1.11 1.12 1.13 1.14 1.15 1.16 1.17 1.18 1.19 1.20 1.21 1.22 1.23 1.24 1.25 1.26 1.27 1.28

Schematic representations of (a) compression and (b) decompression schemes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic steps in processing with compressed images. . . . . . . Processing in the domain of alternative representation. . . . . Steps in baseline sequential JPEG lossy compression scheme. A typical quantization table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC offset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zigzag sequence of AC coefficients. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Encoding steps of a macroblock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steps of JPEG2000 compression technique. . . . . . . . . . . Discrete Wavelet Transform and its inverse in 1-D. (From [147] with permission from the author.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dyadic decomposition of images: (a) single-level and (b) 3-level. Code structure of JPEG2000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block diagram of a typical video encoder. . . . . . . . . . . . Video stream data hierarchy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Video sequence in an MPEG stream. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure of a macroblock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prediction of pictures in a GOP sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . Coding of predicted pictures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coding of bidirectional predicted pictures. . . . . . . . . . . . Motion estimation for MPEG-2 video encoder. . . . . . . . . An overview of an MPEG-4 video encoder. . . . . . . . . . . Structure of H.264/AVC video encoder. . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic coding structure of H.264/AVC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intra 4 × 4 prediction is computed for samples a − p of a block using samples A − Q. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intra 4 × 4 prediction modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Partitioning of an MB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Image resizing from (a) HDTV (of frame-size 1080 × 1920) to (b) NTSC (of frame-size 480 × 640). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Color image enhancement in the block DCT space: (a) Original and (b) Enhanced image. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 7 8 11 12 13 14 15 16 16 18 20 21 22 23 24 24 26 26 27 29 33 34 35 36 37 41 42 xi

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

xii 2.1 2.2

2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 3.1 3.2

3.3 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9 4.10 4.11 4.12 4.13 5.1

An example of periodic extension: (a) a finite length sequence and (b) its periodic extension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Different types of symmetric and antisymmetric extensions at the end of a sequence: (a) Original, (b) WS, (c) HS, (d) WA, and (e) HA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symmetrically extended even periodic sequences from a finite length sequence of length 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symmetrically extended odd periodic sequences from a finite length sequence of length 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The discrete wavelet transform and its inverse using filter banks.(Reproduced from Figure 1.10 of Chapter 1.) . . . . . . Dual lifting operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inverse lifting operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-D DWT and IDWT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (a) Impulse response, (b) right-half response, (c) input sequence, and (d) zero-padded input sequence. . . . . . . . . . Removal of blocking artifacts of highly compressed JPEG images using Gaussian filtering in the compressed domain:(a) original image, and (b) compressed at quality factor 10 (JPQM = 3.88), and (c) filtered image (JPQM = 10.74). . . . . . . . . Image sharpening using Gaussian filtering with λ = 0.9 and σ = 2.0 (JPQM = 9.87). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CIE chromaticity diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saturation and desaturation operation in xy chromaticity space. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saturation–desaturation in nCbCr space. . . . . . . . . . . . . Maximum saturation in nCbCr: (a) image22 and (b) maximally saturated image. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chromaticity points in nCbCr: (a) image22 and (b) maximally saturated image. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (a) image22: Desaturation from the maximally saturated image and (b) corresponding chromaticity plot in the nCbCr space. image22: (a) Maxsat in DCT and (b) SatDesat in DCT. . . . Example of color correction using COR-DCT: (a) original image, (b) diagonal correction, and (c) chromatic shift. . . . . . Plot of η(x). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plot of τ (x). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Original images: (a) image7 and (b) image20. . . . . . . . . . Color enhancement of the images. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Color enhancement of ‘image20’ obtained with more than one iteration: (a) 2 and (b) 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Four adjacent spatial domain blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

62

69 71 72 93 96 97 103 116

133 134 139 141 143 160 161 162 163 164 164 165 165 166 167 171

xiii 5.2

5.3

5.4 5.5 5.6

5.7

5.8

5.9 5.10 5.11 5.12

5.13

6.1 6.2

6.3

Image halving using linear distributive and unitary properties of DCT: (a) original image, (b) bilinear decimation in spatial domain, and (c) downsampled image in the transform domain (58.24 dB with respect to the image in (b) with JPQM as 8.52). 172 Image halving and doubling using convolution-multiplication property [62]: (a) downsampled image(36 dB with respect to the image in Figure 5.2(b) with JPQM as 9.31) and (b) upsampled image with JPQM as 6.29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Image halving [36]: four 4 × 4 approximated DCT coefficients of adjacent blocks are merged into an 8 × 8 DCT block. . . . 178 Image halving [103]: four 8 × 8 are composed and the composed block is approximated to an 8 × 8 DCT block. . . . . . . . . . 179 Image halving: (a) IHAC (37.43 dB with respect to the image in Figure 5.2(b) with JPQM as 9.14) and (b) IHCA (36 dB with respect to the image in Figure 5.2(b) with JPQM as 9.31). 179 Image doubling [36]: an 8 × 8 DCT block is decomposed into four 4 × 4 DCT blocks, each of which is approximated to an 8 × 8 DCT block with zero-padding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Image doubling [106]: an 8 × 8 DCT block is approximated to a 16 × 16 DCT block with zero-padding, which is subsequently decomposed into four 8 × 8 DCT blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Image doubling through IDDA (JPQM = 5.26). . . . . . . . . 182 Image doubling through IDAD ( JPQM = 6.88). . . . . . . . 183 Image resizing by a factor of 3 × 2: (a) downsampled image (JPQM = 9.19) and (b) upsampled image (JPQM = 5.86). . 188 Conversion of an HDTV frame (1080×1920) to an NTSC frame (480 × 640): (a) HDTV, (b) NTSC by UDRA (JPQM = 10.21), (c) NTSC by DURA (JPQM = 8.35), and (d) NTSC by HRA (JPQM = 9.92). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Hybrid resizing: (a)by 32 × 45 , (b) by 23 × 54 (c) by 23 × 32 , and (d) by 32 × 23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Forward and inverse DWT in 1-D. (From [147] with permission from the author.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 JPEG2000 to JPEG transcoding for Lena image using the WBDT technique: (a) rate distortion for transcoded image with respect to the JPEG2000 decoded image (for 0.55 bpp encoded Lena image), (b)equivalent rate of the transcoder versus JPEG2000 compression rate, and (c)equivalent PSNR versus equivalent rate. (From [147] with permission from the author.) 212 Maximum PSNR values versus compression ratio:(a) Lena, (b) Peppers, (c) Girl, and (d) Baboon. (With permission from [147].) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

xiv 6.4

6.5 6.6 6.7 6.8 6.9 6.10 6.11 6.12 6.13 6.14 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4

Results for the JPEG2000 encoded Lena image:(a) JPEG2000 encoded image at bpp = 0.7062, PSNR = 38.47 dB, (b) JPEG encoded by WBDT-all maximum PSNR = 35.21 dB (at bpp = 0.9 or higher), (c) JPEG encoded image by WBDT-LL maximum PSNR = 33.94 dB (at bpp = 0.666 or higher), and (d) JPEG encoded image by DAT maximum PSNR = 29.95 dB (at bpp = 0.784 or higher). (With permission from [147].) . . . . Single blockwise inverse motion compensation (SBIMC). . . . Macroblockwise inverse motion compensation (MBIMC). . . . An integrated scheme for downscaling and inverse motion compensation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DCT domain based video downscaling system. . . . . . . . . Motion Vector propagation from skipped frame. . . . . . . . . Cascading pixel domain transcoder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transcoding aided by relevant information from the compressed stream. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hybrid transcoder from H.264 to MPEG-2 (adapted from [102]). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transcoder for Intra H.264 to Intra MPEG-2 (adapted from [161]). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Error-resilient transcoding in video transmission (adapted from [145]). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block diagram for computation of caption localization from an I-Frame. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block diagram for recognition of faces and palmprints. . . . . Block diagram for face detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block diagram for selection of key frames. . . . . . . . . . . .

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

214 216 218 219 223 226 228 228 229 232 233 238 241 242 249

List of Tables

1.1 1.2 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 3.1

3.2 3.3

3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 3.10 3.11 3.12 3.13

Daubechies 9/7 analysis and synthesis filter banks for lossy compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5/3 analysis and synthesis filter banks for lossless compression Fourier transforms of a few useful functions . . . . . . . . . . Properties of discrete Fourier transforms of sequences of length N

Different types of DFTs of a sequence f (n) . . . . . . . . . . Summary of observations of symmetric periodic extension of a sequence of length N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Different types of discrete cosine transforms (DCT) . . . . . . Different types of discrete sine transforms (DST) . . . . . . . Daubechies 9/7 analysis and synthesis filter banks for lossy compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5/3 analysis and synthesis filter banks for lossless compression Complexity comparison of various algorithms for 8 × 8 DCT . Convolution–multiplication properties for symmetrically extended sequences involving type-II even DCT and type-II even DST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Number of zeroes required to be added at both ends for every type of symmetric extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Computational steps and associated complexities of filtering an input DCT block of size N with symmetric or nonsymmetric responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Per sample computational cost of filtering in 1-D . . . . . . . Per-pixel computational cost of filtering in 2-D . . . . . . . . Per-pixel computational cost of filtering in 2-D using the ASC Per-pixel computational cost of filtering in 2-D using the SNC Per-pixel computational cost of filtering through convolution in the spatial domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A noncausal symmetric FIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A noncausal antisymmetric FIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A noncausal FIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A causal FIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PSNR (in DB) and JPQM values of filtered output using proposed techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17 17 56 64 65 70 73 73 95 95 102

113 116

125 126 127 128 128 129 130 130 131 131 131 xv

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

xvi 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6

4.7 4.8 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 6.1 6.2 6.3

Performance of different algorithms on the image Bridge . . . Per-pixel computational cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List of algorithms for estimating the color components of an illuminant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List of illuminants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Performance of different techniques of estimating illuminants Complexities of different algorithms given nl number of illuminants, nc as the size of the 2-D chromaticity space, and n number of image pixels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Average performance measures obtained by different color enhancement techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Performance measures after iterative application of the CES algorithm on the image ‘image20’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (PSNR in DB, JPQM) values after halving and doubling a greylevel image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Per-pixel (of the original image) computational cost of LMDS Per-pixel computational cost (of the upsampled image) of LMUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JPQM values of resized images of Watch . . . . . . . . . . . . Per-pixel computational cost of arbitrary resizing algorithms Daubechies 9/7 analysis and synthesis filter banks for lossy compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Per-pixel computational cost of different transcoding approaches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distinguishing features of main profiles of MPEG-2 and H.264/AVC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

145 146 149 150 150

152 158 158 183 186 187 192 193 201 210 227

Contents

1 Image and Video Compression: An Overview 1.1 Compression: Generic Approaches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1.1 Alternative Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1.2 Quantization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1.3 Entropy Coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1.4 Rate-Distortion Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 Motivation for Processing in the Compressed Domain . . . . 1.3 Overview of Different Image and Video Compression Techniques and Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4 Image Compression Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.1 Baseline Sequential JPEG Lossy Encoding Scheme . . 1.4.1.1 Level Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.1.2 Transformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.1.3 Quantization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.1.4 Encoding DC Coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.1.5 Encoding AC Coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.1.6 Entropy Encoding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.1.7 Encoding Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.2 JPEG2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.2.1 Discrete Wavelet Transform (DWT) . . . . . 1.4.2.2 Quantization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.2.3 Bit-Stream Layering, Packetization, and Entropy Coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.2.4 Color Encoding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5 Video Compression Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.1 MPEG-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.1.1 Encoding Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.1.2 Frame Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.1.3 Method of Encoding Pictures . . . . . . . . . 1.5.1.4 Motion Estimation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.1.5 Handling Interlaced Video . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.2 MPEG-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.2.1 Video Object Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.2.2 Background Encoding . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.2.3 Wavelet Encoding of Still Images . . . . . . . 1.5.3 H.264/AVC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 2 3 5 5 6 6 8 9 10 10 10 11 12 13 13 14 15 16 18 19 19 20 22 22 23 25 27 28 29 29 31 31 31 xvii

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

xviii

1.6 1.7

1.8

1.5.3.1 Slices and Slice Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.3.2 Additional Picture Types . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.3.3 Adaptive Frame/Field-Coding Operation . . 1.5.3.4 Intra-frame Prediction . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.3.5 Inter-frame Prediction in P Slices . . . . . . 1.5.3.6 Inter-frame Prediction in B Slices . . . . . . 1.5.3.7 Integer Transform and Scaling . . . . . . . . 1.5.3.8 Quantization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.3.9 Second Transformation of DC Coefficients . . 1.5.3.10 Entropy Coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.3.11 In-Loop Deblocking Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.3.12 Network Abstraction Layer . . . . . . . . . . Examples of a Few Operations in the Compressed Domain . Issues and Performance Measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.1 Complexity of Algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.2 Quality of Processed Images or Videos . . . . . . . . . 1.7.2.1 Similarity with respect to a Benchmark or Reference Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.2.2 Visibility of Artifacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.2.3 Measure of Colorfulness . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.3 Level of Compression of the Input and Output Data . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 Image Transforms 2.1 Orthogonal Expansion of a Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.1 Trivial Expansion with Dirac Delta Functions . . . . . 2.1.2 Fourier Series Expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.3 Fourier Transform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.3.1 Properties of Fourier Transform . . . . . . . 2.1.4 Shannon’s Orthonormal Bases for Band-limited Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.5 Wavelet Bases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.5.1 Multiresolution Approximations . . . . . . . 2.1.5.2 Wavelet Bases for Multiresolution Approximations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2 Transforms of Discrete Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.1 Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT) . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.1.1 The Transform Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.1.2 Discrete Fourier Transform as Fourier Series of a Periodic Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.1.3 Circular Convolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.1.4 Energy Preservation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.1.5 Other Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.2 Generalized Discrete Fourier Transform (GDFT) . . . 2.2.2.1 Transform Matrices . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

32 32 32 35 37 38 38 39 40 40 40 40 41 43 43 44 45 46 47 48 48 49 50 53 53 53 54 57 57 58 60 60 61 62 62 63 64 64 65 66

xix Convolution–Multiplication Properties . . . . Trigonometric Transforms . . . . . . . . . . . Symmetric Extensions of Finite Sequences . Symmetric Periodic Extension . . . . . . . . Different Types of Discrete Trigonometric Transforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.3.4 Convolution Multiplication Properties . . . . 2.2.4 Type-II Even DCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.4.1 Matrix Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.4.2 Downsampling and Upsampling Properties of the DCTs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.4.3 Subband Relationship of the type-II DCT . 2.2.4.4 Approximate DCT Computation . . . . . . . 2.2.4.5 Composition and Decomposition of the DCT Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.4.6 Properties of Block Composition Matrices . . 2.2.4.7 Matrix Factorization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.4.8 8-Point Type-II DCT Matrix (C8 ) . . . . . . 2.2.4.9 Integer Cosine Transforms . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.5 Hadamard Transform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.6 Discrete Wavelet Transform (DWT) . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.6.1 Orthonormal Basis with a Single Mother Wavelet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.6.2 Orthonormal Basis with Two Mother Wavelets 2.2.6.3 Haar Wavelets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.6.4 Other Wavelets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.6.5 DWT through Filter Banks . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.6.6 Lifting-based DWT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transforms in 2-D Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.1 2-D Discrete Cosine Transform . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.1.1 Matrix Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.1.2 Subband Approximation of the Type-II DCT 2.3.1.3 Composition and Decomposition of the DCT Blocks in 2-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.1.4 Symmetric Convolution and Convolution– Multiplication Properties for 2-D DCT . . . 2.3.1.5 Fast DCT Algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.2 2-D Discrete Wavelet Transform . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.2.1 Computational Complexity . . . . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.3

2.3

2.4

2.2.2.2 Discrete 2.2.3.1 2.2.3.2 2.2.3.3

3 Image Filtering 3.1 Linear Shift Invariant (LSI) Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2 Discrete LSI Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3 Filtering a Finite Length Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

66 67 68 68 74 77 79 79 79 80 81 81 82 86 86 87 89 89 89 90 90 91 92 95 97 99 99 99 100 100 100 102 103 104 105 106 107 108

xx 3.3.1

3.4

3.5

3.6

3.7

Extension by Zero Padding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.1.1 Linear Convolution Matrix . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.2 Periodic Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.2.1 Circular Convolution Matrix . . . . . . . . . 3.3.2.2 Linear Convolution Performed through Circular Convolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.3 Antiperiodic Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.3.1 Skew Circular Convolution Matrix . . . . . . 3.3.3.2 Circular Convolution as a Series of Skew Circular Convolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.4 Symmetric Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.4.1 Symmetric Convolution Matrices . . . . . . . 3.3.4.2 Linear Convolution through Symmetric Convolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.1 Overlapping and Save Methods in the Transform Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.2 Overlapping and Add Methods in the Transform Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.2.1 Filtering with Symmetric FIR . . . . . . . . 3.4.2.2 Filtering with Antisymmetric FIR . . . . . . 3.4.2.3 Filtering with an Arbitrary FIR . . . . . . . 3.4.2.4 Efficient Computation . . . . . . . . . . . . . Filtering 2-D Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5.1 Separable Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5.1.1 Sparse Computation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5.1.2 Computation through Spatial Domain . . . . 3.5.1.3 Quality of Filtered Images with Sparse Computation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5.2 Nonseparable Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Application of Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6.1 Removal of Blocking Artifacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6.2 Image Sharpening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 Color Processing 4.1 Color Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2 Color Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.1 RGB Color Space . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.2 CIE XYZ Color Space . . . . . . . . . 4.2.3 CIE Chromaticity Coordinates . . . . 4.2.4 YCbCr Color Space . . . . . . . . . . 4.3 Processing Colors in the Compressed Domain 4.4 Color Saturation and Desaturation . . . . . . 4.4.1 Normalized YCbCr Color Space . . .

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

108 109 110 110 111 111 112 112 112 113 115 117 118 119 120 123 124 124 126 126 127 128 129 130 132 132 132 134 135 136 137 137 137 138 139 140 140 142

xxi 4.4.2 4.4.3 4.4.4 4.4.5

4.5

4.6

4.7

Maximum Saturation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Desaturation of Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Computation in the Block DCT Space . . . . . . . . . Computational Cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.5.1 MaxSat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.5.2 SatDesat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.5.3 DCT-domain Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . Color Constancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.1 Estimating Spectral Components of a Single Illuminant 4.5.1.1 Computation in the Block DCT Space . . . . 4.5.1.2 Cost of Computation and Storage . . . . . . 4.5.2 Color Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.2.1 Color Correction in the YCbCr Color Space 4.5.2.2 Color Correction by Chromatic Shift . . . . . Color Enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.1 Alpha Rooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.2 Multicontrast Enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.3 Multicontrast Enhancement with Dynamic Range Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.4 Color Enhancement by Scaling DCT Coefficients . . . 4.6.4.1 Preservation of Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.4.2 Preservation of Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.4.3 The Algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.5 Examples of Color Enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.5.1 Iterative Enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 Image Resizing 5.1 Image Halving and Image Doubling in the Compressed Domain 5.1.1 Using Linear, Distributive and Unitary Transform Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1.2 Using Convolution-Multiplication Properties . . . . . 5.1.2.1 Two-fold Downsampling of 8-point DCT Blocks in 1-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1.2.2 Twofold Upsampling of 8-point DCT Blocks in 1-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1.2.3 Example in 2-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1.3 Using Subband DCT Approximation with Block Composition and Decomposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1.3.1 Image Halving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1.3.2 Image Doubling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1.4 Performance Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 Resizing with Integral Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.1 L × M Downsampling Algorithm (LMDS) . . . . . . . 5.2.2 L × M upsampling Algorithm (LMUS) . . . . . . . . .

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

142 144 144 145 145 145 146 146 147 148 150 151 152 153 153 154 154 155 155 155 156 157 158 158 159 169 170 170 172 173 175 175 176 177 179 182 184 184 186

xxii 5.3 5.4 5.5

Resizing with Arbitrary Factors . . Hybrid Resizing . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.1 Computational Cost . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

6 Transcoding 6.1 Intertransforms Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1.1 DWT to DCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1.1.1 Inserting Zeroes in DWT Coeffcients . . . . . 6.1.1.2 DCT Domain Upsampling in 2D . . . . . . . 6.1.1.3 Upsampling the DCT for Multilevel DWT . 6.1.1.4 Wavelet Synthesis in the Compressed Domain 6.1.1.5 Transcoding in 2-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1.2 DCT to DWT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1.2.1 Even and Odd Downsampling of DCT Blocks 6.1.2.2 Even and Odd Downsampling in 2-D . . . . 6.1.2.3 Wavelet Analysis in the DCT Domain . . . . 6.1.3 DCT to ICT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1.4 ICT to DCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2 Image Transcoding: JPEG2000 to JPEG . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2.1 Transcoding with WBDT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2.2 Transcoding with Wavelet Doubling . . . . . . . . . . 6.2.3 Transcoding with DCT Domain Doubling . . . . . . . 6.2.4 Performance Metrics for Transcoding Schemes . . . . 6.3 Video Downscaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3.1 Inverse Motion Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3.1.1 Single Blockwise Inverse Motion Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3.1.2 Macroblockwise Inverse Motion Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3.1.3 Video Downscaling and IMC: Integrated Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3.2 Motion Vector Refinement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3.2.1 Adaptive Motion Vector Resampling (AMVR) 6.3.2.2 Median Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3.2.3 Nonlinear Motion Vector Resampling (NLMR) Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3.3 Macroblock Type Declaration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3.4 Downsizing MPEG2 Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3.5 Arbitrary Video Downsizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4 Frame Skipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5 Video Transcoding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.1 H.264 to MPEG-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.1.1 Motion Estimation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.1.2 Skip Macroblock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

187 191 192 193 195 196 197 197 199 200 200 203 204 204 206 206 207 208 208 209 209 209 210 211 215 215 217 218 220 220 221 221 222 222 224 225 227 228 230 230

xxiii

6.6 6.7

6.5.1.3 Intramacroblock 6.5.1.4 Advantage of the 6.5.2 MPEG-2 to H.264 . . . . Error Resilient Transcoding . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . Hybrid Approach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7 Image and Video Analysis 7.1 Image and Video Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1.1 Document Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1.2 Caption Localization in a Video . . . . . . 7.1.3 Shot Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2 Object Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3 Image Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4 Digital Watermarking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5 Steganography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.6 Image and Video Indexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.6.1 Image Indexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.6.2 Video Indexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.6.2.1 Key Frame Selection . . . . . . . . 7.6.2.2 Key Video Object Plane Selection 7.7 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

230 231 231 231 234

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

235 235 236 238 239 241 243 245 246 247 247 248 248 249 250

Bibliography

251

Index

265

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

Symbol Description Notations are defined here in 1-D. The same notations are also used in their extended definitions in 2-D.

f sh(n)

Sets and spaces

Transforms

R Z N ZN . C 2 L (R) L2 (Z) [a, b]

The set of all real numbers. The set of all integers. The set of all non-negative integers. {0, 1, 2, . . . , N − 1} The set of all complex numbers. The space of all square integrable functions. The space of all square integrable functions over the integer grid. {x|x ∈ R and a ≤ x ≤ b}

Functions, sequences, operators and symbols < h, g > → − → h .− g a + jb x∗ |x| ∠x < x >N |x| sign(x) round(x) ⌊x⌋ ⌈x⌉ f (x) δ(x) f (n) f + (n) f p (n) xde (m) xdo (m) xue (m) xuo (m) w(n) ||x|| f ⋆h(n) f ⊛ h(n)

The inner product of two functions h(x) and g(x). → − The dot product of two vectors h − and → g. √ A complex number with j as −1. The complex conjugate of x ∈ C. The magnitude of x ∈ C. The phase of x ∈ C. x mod N for x ∈ Z. The absolute value of x ∈ R. −1, 0, and 1 depending on the sign of x ∈ R. The nearest integer approximation of x ∈ R. The nearest integer, which is less than or equal to x ∈ R. The nearest integer, which is greater than or equal to x ∈ R. A continuous function (x ∈ R) in L2 (R). The Dirac delta function. A discrete function (n ∈ Z) in L2 (Z). Positive half of f (n) for n ≥ 0. Strict positive half of f (n) for n > 0. Even down-sampled sequence of x(n). Odd down-sampled sequence of x(n). Even up-sampled sequence of x(n). Odd up-sampled sequence of x(n). The conjugate reflection of w(n) ∈ C. The Euclidean norm of the vector x. Linear convolution of f (n) and h(n)( or f (n)⋆h(n)). Circular convolution of f (n) and h(n)( or f (n) ⊛ h(n)).

f zh(n) nm na

Skew circular convolution of f (n) and h(n)( or f (n)sh(n)). Symmetric convolution of f (n) and h(n)( or f (n)zh(n)). Number of multiplications. Number of additions.

F(f (x)) fˆ(jω)

Fourier transform of f (x). Fourier transform of f (x) or F(f (x)). |fˆ(jω)| Magnitude spectrum of f (x). θ(ω) Phase spectrum of f (x). F(f (n)) The DFT of f (n). fˆ(k) The DFT of f (n) or F(f (n)). Fα,β (f (n)) The GDFT of f (n) for α, β ∈ {0, 21 }. ˆ fα,β (k) The GDFT of f (n) for α, β ∈ {0, 12 }, or Fα,β (f (n)). → − − x ˆ The DFT of → x. fˆ 1 (k) The Odd Time Discrete Fourier 0,

2

fˆ1 ,0 (k)

Transform (OT DF T ) of f (x). The Odd Frequency Discrete

fˆ1 , 1 (k)

Fourier Transform (OF DF T ) of f (x). The Odd Frequency Odd Time Dis-

2

2 2

H(z) Cie (x(n)) Xie (k) Cio (x(n)) Xio (k) Sie (x(n)) Xise (k) Sio (x(n)) Xiso (k) DCT (x) DST (x)

crete Fourier Transform (O2 DF T ) of f (x). The z-transform of h(n). Type-i even DCT of x(n) for i ∈ {1, 2, 3, 4}. Type-i even DCT of x(n) for i ∈ {I, II, III, IV } (an alternative notation of Cie (x(n))). Type-i odd DCT of x(n) for i ∈ {1, 2, 3, 4}. Type-i odd DCT of x(n) for i ∈ {I, II, III, IV } (an alternative notation of Cio (x(n))). Type-i even DST of x(n) for i ∈ {1, 2, 3, 4}. Type-i even DST of x(n) for i ∈ {I, II, III, IV } (an alternative notation of Sie (x(n))). Type-i odd DST of x(n) for i ∈ {1, 2, 3, 4}. Type-i odd DST of x(n) for i ∈ {I, II, III, IV } (an alternative notation of Sio (x(n))). Type II even DCT of x. Type II even DST of x.

Matrices and operators XT XH X −1 N A B

[f (k, l)]

The transpose of matrix X. The Hermitian transpose of matrix X. The inverse of matrix X. Element wise multiplication of A and B. The matrix formed in such a way that its (k, l)th element is f (k, l).

xxv

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

xxvi x

{x}qp D(x) Dm (x)

ΦN ΨN F Fα,β α CN

The column vector formed from x(n) such that ith element of the vector is x(i). The column vector formed from x from its pth element to qth one. The diagonal matrix whose (i, i)th diagonal element is x(i). The diagonal matrix whose mth off diagonal elements are formed from x in the order of appearances while scanning from left to right and top to bottom. The N × N flipping matrix.

α SN

CN SN C8 T8 T4 Hdm HN

PN 0N 0M ×N IN m N −1 JN The diagonal matrix D({(−1) }m=0 ). AM,N The DFT matrix. The GDFT matrix for α, β ∈ {0, 21 }. BM,N N -point Type α even DCT matrix, where α ∈ {I, II, III, IV }.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

N -point Type α even DST matrix, where α ∈ {I, II, III, IV }. N -point Type II even DCT matrix. N -point Type II even DST matrix. 8-point Type II even DCT matrix. 8-point ICT matrix. 4-point ICT matrix. Hadamard matrix of size 2m × 2m . Discrete Haar Transform matrix of size N × N . N × N permutation matrix. N × N zero or null matrix. M × N zero or null matrix. N × N identity matrix. N × N reverse identity matrix. DCT block composition matrix for merging M adjacent N -point DCT blocks. DST block composition matrix for merging M adjacent N -point DCT blocks into a DST block.

Chapter 1 Image and Video Compression: An Overview

1.1

1.2 1.3 1.4

1.5

Compression: Generic Approaches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1.1 Alternative Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1.2 Quantization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1.3 Entropy Coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1.4 Rate-Distortion Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motivation for Processing in the Compressed Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of Different Image and Video Compression Techniques and Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Image Compression Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.1 Baseline Sequential JPEG Lossy Encoding Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.1.1 Level Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.1.2 Transformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.1.3 Quantization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.1.4 Encoding DC Coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.1.5 Encoding AC Coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.1.6 Entropy Encoding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.1.7 Encoding Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.2 JPEG2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.2.1 Discrete Wavelet Transform (DWT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.2.2 Quantization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.2.3 Bit-Stream Layering, Packetization, and Entropy Coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.2.4 Color Encoding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Video Compression Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.1 MPEG-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.1.1 Encoding Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.1.2 Frame Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.1.3 Method of Encoding Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.1.4 Motion Estimation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.1.5 Handling Interlaced Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.2 MPEG-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.2.1 Video Object Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.2.2 Background Encoding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.2.3 Wavelet Encoding of Still Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.3 H.264/AVC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.3.1 Slices and Slice Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.3.2 Additional Picture Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.3.3 Adaptive Frame/Field-Coding Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.3.4 Intra-frame Prediction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.3.5 Inter-frame Prediction in P Slices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.3.6 Inter-frame Prediction in B Slices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.3.7 Integer Transform and Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 3 5 5 6 6 8 9 10 10 10 11 12 13 13 14 15 16 18 19 19 20 22 22 23 25 27 28 29 29 31 31 31 32 32 32 35 37 38 38

1

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

2

1.6 1.7

1.8

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain 1.5.3.8 Quantization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.3.9 Second Transformation of DC Coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.3.10 Entropy Coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.3.11 In-Loop Deblocking Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.3.12 Network Abstraction Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Examples of a Few Operations in the Compressed Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . Issues and Performance Measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.1 Complexity of Algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.2 Quality of Processed Images or Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.2.1 Similarity with respect to a Benchmark or Reference Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.2.2 Visibility of Artifacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.2.3 Measure of Colorfulness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.3 Level of Compression of the Input and Output Data . . . . . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

39 40 40 40 40 41 43 43 44 45 46 47 48 48

Presently we are witnessing an explosion of information. Information is generated in various forms such as text, audio, image, video, etc., which are commonly referred to as multimedia content. Within a very short period, availability of inexpensive yet powerful digital cameras and video recorders in the consumer world has further accelerated the pace of research and development in processing these media. One of the very initial tasks of processing these data is to compress them prior to their storage and/or transmission. By compressing data, we want to reduce the size required for their representation. For image and video, this is usually achieved by an alternative representation in a different domain other than their original domains of representation, which are spatial and spatiotemporal for images and videos, respectively. Two such popular representations of images and videos are formed by their discrete cosine transforms (DCT) [3] and discrete wavelet transforms (DWT) [92]. We refer to these domains as compressed domains or domains of compression. Since images and videos are increasingly available in these forms, there is a need for their direct analysis in those spaces. This potentially makes the processing faster by avoiding the overhead of decompression and recompression of the data. Further, a smaller data size in the compressed domain provides an additional advantage of keeping the memory requirement low. However, we should make a careful cost-benefit analysis in terms of actual computation cost and memory requirement before suggesting any equivalent processing in these domains. Even though direct processing in compressed domain avoids the decompression and recompression tasks, equivalent computations with transform coefficients may become too costly compared to their spatial domain operations.

1.1

Compression: Generic Approaches

Images are represented by a function over a 2-D integral coordinate space such as I : Z2 → R, where Z and R are a set of integers and real numbers,

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

Image and Video Compression: An Overview

3

respectively. Each sample in the 2-D integral coordinate space is referred to as a pixel. Usually, functional values at pixels are quantized to a nonnegative integer (let the set be denoted by N), implying proportional brightness distribution over the 2-D space. For a color image, every pixel is mapped to a three-dimensional color vector in the RGB color space (f : Z2 → N3 ). A video, on the other hand, is represented by a temporal sequence of images that are observed at evenly spaced discrete time points, and its function can be represented as V : Z2 × N → N, and for a colored video Vc , the mapping is expressed as Vc : Z2 × N → N3 .

1.1.1

Alternative Representation

While compressing images or videos, we look for an alternative representation that requires less storage space compared to their representations in the original space. Here we may draw an analogy with the representation of a circle. A circle may be represented by a set of points in the 2-D coordinate space. However, only three points are sufficient to uniquely define (or represent) the circle. So, given m (m ≥ 3) points on a circle, (m − 3) points are redundant, and we may reduce the storage requirement by removing those redundancies from the representation. Alternatively, we may represent a circle by its center and radius, which also require less storage than its representation as a set of points in the 2-D space. Moreover, the representation may not always be exact. Consider the representation of closed curves or contours by approximate circles or ellipses. In such cases, there is a significant amount of savings in the storage requirement. In some applications, this type of approximation may be acceptable. In fact, for images and videos, many a time we work with approximate representations of original images captured by cameras. Compression schemes dealing with approximate representations of objects are known as lossy compression schemes, while the schemes with exact representation are known as lossless schemes. For any compression scheme, its alternative representation of images (or data) should have the following features. 1. Reconstructibility: Alternative representation is a form of encoding of data. We should be able to decode or reconstruct the data from its encoded form. This reverse process is known as reconstruction. However, the reconstruction may be partial or approximate for a lossy compression. 2. Low redundancy: The representation should have low redundancy in its information content. This redundancy may occur in various forms. For images there are redundancies due to spatial correlation among pixels. Their color components are also correlated, in particular, in the RGB color space. For videos, in addition, there are temporal correlations among their consecutive frames. Besides spatial and temporal correlations, other kinds of redundancies are also observed. Sometimes these

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

4

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

are context dependent, such as symmetry of objects, biased distribution of brightness and colors, etc. 3. Factorization into substructures: Decomposition of the object into its different components or substructures is another desirable feature of a representation scheme. This becomes particularly useful for approximate or lossy representation of objects. In this case, components contributing insignificantly to the reconstruction of an object in its original form, are pruned or removed. This reduces the storage requirement of the representation. In various ways, these alternative representations are possible. We may use image transforms to represent images by a set of coefficients corresponding to a given set of basis functions. These coefficients may be real numbers (e.g., DCT, DWT, etc.) or complex numbers (discrete Fourier transform (DFT) [100]). Another form of image representation is the fractal representation with iterated function systems (IFS), in particular partitioned iterated function systems (PIFS) [65] . In this technique, images are represented by a set of contractive affine transformations, which, being applied iteratively to an initial configuration, converge to the desired image. Color components may also be transformed into other color spaces from the usual RGB color space so that they become less correlated, requiring less number of bits for representation. In some cases, one color component may be expressed as functions of others, requiring less storage in representing those functions. Though each frame of a video may be represented independently using any of the image representation techniques, to exploit the temporal coherence existing among consecutive frames, we may consider representing temporal offsets between them. In this technique, considering one of the frames as a reference frame among a group of pictures (GOP), other frames are described by temporal offsets (or motions) of their different parts. Usually, the first frame of the GOP is taken as a reference frame and called Intra Frame or I-Frame. As other frames are predicted from it, they are called P-Frames. Some of them may also be predicted from two neighboring frames using bidirectional prediction in the temporal domain. They are referred to as B-Frames. In some representations, this temporal cohesion is not explicitly represented (in the form of motion vectors and prediction errors). In this case, some of the frames are represented as side information, and others are encoded by a set of parity bits in such a way that, given side information, we would be able to approximately decode the frames from them. This kind of representation is specially used for a low-complexity encoder and in a distributed environment, where each frame is encoded independently. This type of encoding is referred to as distributed video coding [51].

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

5

Image and Video Compression: An Overview

1.1.2

Quantization

Alternative representation of images and videos implies that they are represented by a different set of symbols, messages, or information units. For example, image transforms are used to represent images by a set of coefficients. In a video, temporal sequences may be represented by differences of pixel values at the same location of consecutive frames. This derivation of representation is the first stage of compression. Sometimes symbols used in describing this representation, are termed intermediate symbols. In lossy compression techniques, often values of intermediate symbols are scaled down by quantization parameters so that, the dynamic ranges of those symbols get reduced and thus they require less number of bits for their representations. These quantization parameters may vary among the components of the alternative representation. For images, videos, and audio, the values of these parameters are recommended by observing the effect of individual components on average human perception.

1.1.3

Entropy Coding

At the final stage of compression, we should target the efficient encoding of intermediate symbols considering their statistical distributions in the domain of application. As the techniques developed for these tasks are guided by information theory [52], they are commonly referred to as entropy encoding. In Figure 1.1, two important steps of compression and decompression are shown.

Input Object

Derivation of Alternative Representation

Intermediate Symbols

Entropy Encoding

Compressed Object

(a)

Compressed Object

Entropy Encoding

Intermediate Symbols

Reconstruction from Alternative Representation

Reconstructed Object

(b)

Figure 1.1: Schematic representations of (a) compression and (b) decompression schemes. Image transforms such as DCT and DWT, are widely used for representing images with transform coefficients. They have the desirable properties of re-

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

6

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

constructibility, low redundancy, and factorization in representation of images. Due to the last property, they are quite useful in approximating images with less number of coefficients, which inherently reduces the storage requirement. Further, by employing entropy coding techniques such as Huffman encoding [52], arithmetic encoding [52], etc., intermediate symbols are represented with less number of bits.

1.1.4

Rate-Distortion Control

In lossy compression, the higher the values of quantization parameters, the less is the required number of bits of representation. However, high quantization introduces more error in the representation of intermediate symbols, leading to more distortion in the reconstructed image or video. We should judge the performance of a compressor by these two figures of merit, that is, rate or normalized size of the data, and distortion or the average error of reconstruction. The higher the rates, the lower the distortion is. However, the rate should not be greater than that of lossless representation of the object (nor should it go below zero!). By varying different parameters such as quantization thresholds for different factors, we could achieve varying rate distortion performance. The objective of rate-distortion control is to achieve minimum distortion at a given rate. Alternatively, the problem can also be formulated as minimization of rate given a distortion.

1.2

Motivation for Processing in the Compressed Domain

For processing compressed images and videos, we first need to decompress them and apply suitable processing algorithms, which are usually developed considering their representations in spatial or spatiotemporal domains. Often, it is also necessary to recompress the processed output, to make them interoperable with other applications. For example, a JPEG compressed image, after processing, may still require to be represented by the JPEG compression standard [149] for its display by a browser, storage in an archive, or transmission through a network. Under this scenario, every spatial domain processing of images is encapsulated by additional overheads of decompression and compression as depicted in Figure 1.2. To reduce the overhead involved in the decompression and recompression steps (Figure 1.2), we may consider performing processing with the intermediate symbols of alternative representation of images in the compressed form instead of working with their original representations in the spatial domain. For example, in a DCT-based image representation, we may compute

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

7

Image and Video Compression: An Overview

Output Compressed Image

Input Compressed Image

Decompression

Processing in Spatial Domain

Compression

Figure 1.2: Basic steps in processing with compressed images.

with the DCT coefficients of the image and produce the DCT coefficients of the processed images. In this case, though there are overheads of entropy decoding and encoding of intermediate symbols (e.g., DCT coefficients, see Figure 1.3), the total overhead is significantly less than that of decompression and recompression. This processing in the domain of alternative representation is referred here as processing in the compressed domain. However, we should also be concerned about the efficiency of the processing algorithm in the compressed domain. If this algorithm takes longer time than its equivalent operation in the spatial domain, the saving in computation of reconstruction and derivation of alternative representation (or inverse transform and forward transform operations of transform coding) are not cost effective.

There is also another advantage of working with the representation in the compressed domain. Usually, the size of data in this case is smaller than that of its spatial representation (or spatiotemporal representation of videos). This inherently makes the processing less memory intensive.

Third, the property of factorization of an image in its alternative representation sometimes becomes useful in developing algorithms. We may consider emphasizing or deemphasizing some factors after analyzing their role in the reconstruction of the image.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

8

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

Compressed Image

Entropy Decoding

Alternative Representation

Processing in the domain of Alternative Representation

Output Image in the Compressed Form

Entropy Encoding

Processed Output in Alternative Representation

Figure 1.3: Processing in the domain of alternative representation.

1.3

Overview of Different Image and Video Compression Techniques and Standards

Various image and video compression techniques have been advanced by researchers starting from the early eighties. Different international bodies such as the International Standard Organization (ISO) and the International Telecommunication Union (ITU) have been coordinating the standardization task under their various committees. One such committee, Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG), was created by the ISO in 1986, and it recommended a still image compression standard based on DCT in 1992, later approved in 1994 as ISO 10918-1. The standards adopted for lossy and lossless image compression are commonly referred to as the JPEG [149] and JPEG-LS compression standards, respectively. Later in the year 2000, the same committee recommended another image compression standard based on DWT for both lossy and lossless image compression. This latter compression standard is named JPEG2000 [27].

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

Image and Video Compression: An Overview

9

A similar initiative has also been taken for standardizing video compression methods. Initially, both the ISO and the ITU took on this task independently. The ISO formed a committee named the Motion Picture Experts Group (MPEG) to set audio and video standards around 1988. Since then the committee has been recommending different video compression standards for different ranges of data rates and video quality such as MPEG1, MPEG2, and MPEG4. The MPEG-1 [47] standard is targeted at supporting data rates of a compact disk (CD), whereas MPEG-2 [135] is targeted at applications with higher bit rates. The MPEG-4 [135] standard added more features in the process of compression for achieving a higher compression rate and making the standard suitable for both high and low bit rate applications. The ITU (then the CCITT) initiated the standardization of video compression prior to the ISO. They have recommended different H.26x video coding standards, out of which the first one, H.261, was published in 1990, and it greatly influenced the subsequent video coding standards. Later, this standard evolved as H.263 and H.264 in 1998 and 2003, respectively. The committee looking after the development of these compression standards is known as the Video Coding Expert Group (VCEG) (formerly called the ITU-T). In 2003 they formed a Joint Video Team (JVT) with MPEG, and the JVT is presently carrying out the extension of H.264 incorporating various other features. As images and videos are mostly available in one of the above-mentioned compression standards, we will review a few of them here. In particular, we will pay attention to lossy JPEG and both lossy and lossless JPEG2000 compression standards for still images. For videos, we will discuss MPEG-2, MPEG-4, and H.264 standards [155].

1.4

Image Compression Techniques

In the JPEG image compression standard, there are different modes of operations, 1. Lossy sequential encoding scheme 2. Lossy progressive encoding scheme 3. Lossy hierarchical encoding scheme 4. Lossless (sequential) encoding scheme. Out of this, first three are based on DCT-based representation of images. The last one, the lossless JPEG compression scheme (referred to as JPEGLS in the literature) is in the form of differential encoding after prediction from neighboring pixels. Usually, JPEG compression of images refers to lossy

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

10

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

sequential encoding (sometimes called the “baseline JPEG compression algorithm”). The progressive encoding scheme considers encoding of the details of an image in multiple scan so that images are progressively reconstructed during a long transmission session. Hierarchical encoding enables ready access to lower resolution representation of images without going for reconstruction with their full (or higher) resolutions. We restrict our discussion to the baseline sequential encoding algorithm, as this is the basis of image representation for other modes of operations of lossy JPEG compression.

1.4.1

Baseline Sequential JPEG Lossy Encoding Scheme

In this scheme, an image is partitioned into 8 × 8 blocks, and each block is almost independently coded. In Figure 1.4 the different stages of compression are shown. In this compression scheme, an image is scanned from left to right and top to bottom. In this order, each 8 × 8 nonoverlapping block is subjected to a set of operations. These are briefly discussed in following subsections. 1.4.1.1

Level Shifting

In the JPEG compression standard, each pixel of a monochrome image has an 8-bit grey-level value (for color images each pixel is of 24 bits, that is, 8 bits for each red (R), green (G), and blue (B) component). To keep the dynamic range between −128 to 127, 128 is subtracted from each pixel. 1.4.1.2

Transformation

The level-shifted values in each block are transformed by applying an 8 × 8 DCT. Let the pixels in a block be denoted by x(m, n), 0 ≤ m, n ≤ 7. The DCT of these pixels X(k, l), 0 ≤ k, l ≤ 7 are computed as follows. X(k, l) =

1 4 .α(k).α(l).

7 X 7 X

(x(m, n)cos(

m=0 n=0

(2n + 1)πl (2m + 1)πk )cos( )), 16 16 0 ≤ k, l ≤ 7, (1.1)

where α(k) is given by α(k)

= =

q 1,

1 2,

for k = 0 otherwise.

(1.2)

From X(k, l), 0 ≤ k, l ≤ 7, x(m, n) is completely recovered by applying the inverse transform as follows. x(m, n)

=

1 4.

7 X 7 X

(α(k).α(l).X(k, l)cos(

k=0 l=0

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

(2k + 1)πm (2l + 1)πn )cos( )), 16 16 0 ≤ m, n ≤ 7. (1.3)

11

Image and Video Compression: An Overview

8x8 block Level Shifting

DCT

Quantization

DC Coefficient Offset Huffman Encoding

RLE through Zigzag Scanning

Zero-runs appended with nonzero AC Coefficient

Figure 1.4: Steps in baseline sequential JPEG lossy compression scheme. 1.4.1.3

Quantization

In the next step, DCT coefficients of the block are quantized using different quantization thresholds for different frequency components. Let X(k, l) be the (k, l)th DCT coefficient (for the spatial frequencies at (k, l)), and let Q(k, l) be the corresponding quantization threshold. Then, the quantized transform coefficient is computed as X(k, l) Xq (k, l) = round , (1.4) Q(k, l) where round(x) is the nearest integer approximation of x. During decoding, approximate DCT coefficients are obtained by multiplying the corresponding quantization threshold with the quantized coefficient as follows: ˆ X(k, l) = Xq (k, l).Q(k, l). (1.5)

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

12

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

The process of quantization–dequantization introduces loss in the reconstructed image and is inherently responsible for the “lossy” nature of the compression scheme. However, quantization reduces the dynamic range of values of a transform coefficient, thus requiring less number of bits for its representation. Moreover, many insignificant values are masked by quantization thresholds and are set to zero. This happens more often for high-frequency coefficients. These runs of zeroes are efficiently coded in the later stage of compression. Conducting various psychovisual experiments on different sets of images, a few quantization tables have been recommended by JPEG. However, we can also define a new quantization table and use it by providing the necessary information in the header of the compressed stream or file. A typical quantization table is shown in Figure 1.5.

16 11 10 16 24 40 51 61 12 12 14 19 26 58 60 55 14 13 16 24 40 57 69 56 14 17 22 29 51 87 80 62 18 22 37 56 68 109 103 77 24 35 55 64 81 104 113 92 49 64 78 87 103 121 120 101 72 92 95 98 112 100 103 99

Figure 1.5: A typical quantization table. Using a single quantization table, we may proportionally vary all the quantization thresholds to control the degree of quantization. In this case, quantization thresholds are scaled by a constant factor. 1.4.1.4

Encoding DC Coefficients

The (0, 0)th frequency component of the block (i.e., X(0, 0) in Eq.(1.1)) is called the DC coefficient, as it is equivalent to the average intensity value of the block. The rest of the coefficients for all other frequency components are known as AC coefficients. Usually, DC coefficients of neighboring blocks are highly correlated. That is why these coefficients are separately encoded by computing offsets between adjacent blocks (see Figure 1.6). Given the initial value in a sequence of offsets, the true values of all subsequent coefficients are derived.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

Image and Video Compression: An Overview

13

DC Offset

-

+

Σ

dc

dc

Figure 1.6: DC offset. 1.4.1.5

Encoding AC Coefficients

AC coefficients are encoded independently within a block. It has been observed that, after quantization, many of these coefficients turn out to be almost zero values. In particular, high-frequency components are more prone to assuming zero values. In 2-D, ordering of spatial frequencies does not follow exactly the row-wise or column-wise raster scan. One has to follow a zigzag scanning starting from the leftmost and topmost location and moving diagonally after each horizontal or vertical shift (as shown in Figure 1.7). This converts a 2-D sequence into an 1-D sequence, where trailing members are always of higherorder spatial frequency. This sequence is further converted into runs of zeroes terminated by a nonzero element. Finally, all the trailing zeroes are terminated by an end of block symbol. AC coefficients are represented in this way. At a later stage, these runs (number of zeroes followed by a nonzero coefficient) are efficiently encoded by following the Huffman encoding or arithmetic encoding scheme. 1.4.1.6

Entropy Encoding

There are recommended Huffman encoding tables for encoding both DC and AC coefficients. However, we can also define a new encoding table or adopt arithmetic encoding in producing the final compressed stream. Huffman codes are self-terminating codes, and the encoding technique tries to minimize the

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

14

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

Figure 1.7: Zigzag sequence of AC coefficients. number of bits required for representing a set of symbols whose information content is measured by its entropy. The encoding scheme adopts a strategy of assigning variable length codes to these symbols such that less probable symbols are represented by longer encoded binary streams. By looking at the statistical distribution of intermediate symbols, these codes are generated. Huffman tables for DC coefficients and runs of AC coefficients are different. However, for encoding AC coefficients, JPEG uses both the tables. 1.4.1.7

Encoding Colors

As color components in the RGB color space are significantly correlated, in JPEG compression standard, color images are represented in the YCbCr color space [52]. The YCbCr color space is related to the RGB color space as follows Y Cb Cr

= = =

0.502G + 0.098B + 0.256R, −0.290G + 0.438B − 0.148R + 128, −0.366G − 0.071B + 0.438R + 128.

(1.6)

In the above transformation, it is assumed that pixels of R, G, and B components are represented by 8 bits. In this space, Y is referred to as the luminance component, while Cb and Cr are referred to as chrominance components. The Cb-Cr components have less bandwidth than their luminance counterpart. That is why they can be further downsampled leading to a significant reduction in the data size. In the JPEG standard, these three color components are encoded in various proportions. With 1 : 1 : 1, Cb and Cr components are compressed with full resolution, signifying that every luminance block has its corresponding chrominance block. On the other hand, 4 : 1 : 1 imply that, for every 4 luminance (Y ) blocks there is only one Cb and one Cr block. This means that Cb and Cr are halfsampled along both the spatial directions. In fact, the latter scheme is more popular while compressing color images. A group of such blocks (corresponding luminance and chrominance blocks) is

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

15

Image and Video Compression: An Overview

referred to as a macroblock, which forms a unit for the coding structure of the compressed stream (see Figure 1.8). It may also be noted that the quantization tables for chrominance components are different from that of the luminance component.

}

DCT

Quant .

Zigzag

Macroblock 110010001

Huffman Coding

RLE

Figure 1.8: Encoding steps of a macroblock.

1.4.2

JPEG2000

It has been mentioned earlier that JPEG adopted another image compression standard, JPEG2000 [27, 119], which is based on DWT [4]. Usually, JPEG2000 is expected to have a higher compression ratio given the same level of distortion compared to the DCT-based JPEG compression standard. There are also other advantages to JPEG2000 in terms of scalability, encoding regions of interests with varying level of compression, progressive reconstruction of images from the same compressed stream, same computational framework for lossy and lossless schemes, etc. For incorporating these features, the JPEG2000 code-structure is more complex than that of the earlier JPEG scheme, thus introducing more complexity in its encoder and decoder design. JPEG2000 is also capable of handling images of larger dynamic ranges, while in JPEG it is assumed that a component should have pixel values between 0 and 255 (8-bit representation of images). In JPEG2000, images are partitioned into tiles of larger size, and each individual tile is encoded independently. Even the whole image could form a single tile. Different stages in the process of compressing an image are shown in Figure 1.9. The same schema holds for both lossless and lossy compression. In the following text, these operations are reviewed briefly.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

16

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

A single tile

Subbands Code-blocks

DWT

Quantization

Entropy Coding

Compressed Stream

Figure 1.9: Steps of JPEG2000 compression technique. 1.4.2.1

Discrete Wavelet Transform (DWT)

The DWT is applied to every nonoverlapping tile of an image, resulting in its decomposition into several subbands. Before this, the tile goes through a level-shifting operation depending upon the number of bits (say, n) used for representing a pixel. The level-shifting operation brings pixel values between 0 and 2n − 1 to −2n−1 and 2n−1 − 1. The DWT is applied row-wise and column-wise separately for decomposing the image into four subbands. Each subband is obtained by applying a combination of low-pass and/or high-pass filters in successive direction. These filters are known as analysis filters. As the bandwidth of the filtered images are reduced compared to the original image, they are downsampled or subsampled by a factor of two so that the sum total of the number of samples in all the subbands remains the same. During decoding, these subsampled subbands are upsampled (or interpolated to full resolution), and then they are subjected to another set of combination of low-pass and/or high-pass filters. These filters are known as synthesis filters. Finally, the sum of all these filtered responses produces the reconstructed image. In Figure 1.10, a schematic diagram is presented showing the computation of the DWT as well as its inverse in 1-D. h (n )

2

a1 ( n )

2

h '(n)

2

g '(n)

x 0 (n ) g (n )

2

d 1( n )

~x ( n ) 0

Figure 1.10: Discrete Wavelet Transform and its inverse in 1-D. (From [147] with permission from the author.) In Figure 1.10, the signal x0 (n) is transformed into wavelet coefficients in

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

Image and Video Compression: An Overview

17

Table 1.1: Daubechies 9/7 analysis and synthesis filter banks for lossy compression n 0 ±1 ±2 ±3 ±4

Analysis Filter Bank h(n) g(n − 1) 0.603 1.115 0.267 −0.591 −0.078 −0.058 −0.017 0.091 0.027

Synthesis Filter Bank h′ (n) g ′ (n + 1) 1.115 0.603 0.591 −0.267 −0.058 −0.078 −0.091 0.017 0.027

Table 1.2: 5/3 analysis and synthesis filter banks for lossless compression n 0 ±1 ±2

Analysis Filter Bank h(n) g(n − 1) 6 1 8 2 − 21 8 − 18

Synthesis Filter Bank h′ (n) g ′ (n + 1) 6 1 8 2 1 − 2 8 − 18

the form of a1 (n) and d1 (n), known as approximation and detail coefficients, respectively. Corresponding low-pass and high-pass FIR (Finite Impulse Response) filters [100] are h(n) and g(n). They form the analysis filter bank. In the decoding stage, respective synthesis filters are h′ (n) and g ′ (n). Following quadrature mirror filtering (QMF) [100], we may design these four filter banks (including both analysis and synthesis filters) such that perfect reconstruction is possible (i.e., according to Figure 1.10, x ˜0 (n) = x0 (n)). In JPEG2000, two different sets of filter banks are used for lossy and lossless compression. They are shown in Tables 1.1 [4] and 1.2 [48]. For lossless compression, we need to represent wavelet coefficients with integers only so as to avoid errors due to impreciseness of floating-point representation. Hence, corresponding filters are implemented using only integer arithmetic, where the set of valid operations include addition, multiplication, and shift (for performing division or multiplication) with integers as operands. For this reason, this class of discrete wavelet transform is also termed as integer wavelet transform (IWT) [34]. During filtration, boundaries are symmetrically and periodically extended at both ends to avoid discontinuity at those sample points of a signal. However, the number of additional samples that are required for this periodic and symmetric extension depends on the length of the FIR filter. For an 1-D sequence, the coefficients are usually arranged in such a fashion that d1 (n) follows a1 (n). This kind of decomposition of signal is referred to as dyadic decomposition [92]. The low-pass filtered subband may be subjected to another level of dyadic decomposition in the same way, and this may con-

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

18

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

tinue recursively as long as the resolution of the low-pass subband at that level permits. In JPEG2000, images are decomposed into four subbands by filtering with low–low, low–high, high–low and high–high filters. These subbands are referred as LL, LH, HL, and HH, respectively. A single-level dyadic decomposition is shown in Figure 1.11(a). The LL band may further be decomposed in the same way. An example of 3-level decomposition is shown in Figure 1.11(b). In this case the corresponding subbands are shown as LL3 , LH3 , HL3 , HH3 , LH2 , HL2 , HH2 ,LH1 , HL1 , and HH1 . These subbands are separately subjected to a scalar quantization, as discussed below. LL 3

LH 3

HL 3

HH 3

LH 2 LL

LH

LH 1 HL 2

HL

HH 2

HL 1

HH

HH 1

(b)

(a)

Figure 1.11: Dyadic decomposition of images: (a) single-level and (b) 3-level.

1.4.2.2

Quantization

In JPEG2000, each subband is independently quantized. However, unlike JPEG, all the coefficients of a subband use the same quantization threshold. The quantization step (∆) is expressed with respect to its dynamic range as follows: ∆ = 2n−ǫ (1 +

µ ). 211

(1.7)

In the above equation, n is considered as the nominal dynamic range of the subband. It is the maximum number of bits required to represent the subband, which is the sum of the number of pixel bits in the original tile and additional bits required for representing the values after the analysis. For example, the value of n for the HH1 subband of an image represented by 8 bits per pixel is 10. Parameters ǫ and µ are the number of bits allotted to the exponent and mantissa respectively, of its coefficients. Given X(u, v) as the coefficients of a

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

Image and Video Compression: An Overview

19

subband, the quantized values are obtained as follows: Xq (u, v) = sign(X(u, v))⌊

|X(u, v)| ⌋. ∆

(1.8)

For lossless compression, ∆ is 1, implying that values of ǫ and µ are n and 0, respectively. There is no recommended set of µ and ǫ for determining the quantization step for a subband, and this may be explicitly assigned for each of them. In that case, these parameters are to be included in the encoding stream. However, in an implicit quantization, given those parameters for the lowest level of resolution (e.g. the corresponding to LL band at level k) as µ0 and ǫ0 , values for the ith subbands are determined by the following expressions: µi ǫi 1.4.2.3

= µ0 , = ǫ0 + i − k.

(1.9)

Bit-Stream Layering, Packetization, and Entropy Coding

In the final stage of an encoder, a compressed bit stream is produced so that the decoder is capable of progressively decoding a region of interest with a desired resolution. In its code structure, every subband is partitioned into a set of nonoverlapping code blocks. Each code block is independently encoded by a scheme known as embedded block coding on truncation (EBCOT) [142]. In this scheme, each bit-plane of wavelet coefficients is processed by three passes, namely, significant propagation, magnitude refinement, and clean-up. The resulting bit-streams are encoded using arithmetic coding. A layer is formed with the output of similar passes from a group of code blocks. In a layer, packets are formed by grouping corresponding code blocks of subbands at the same level of decomposition. They are also known as precincts (see Figure 1.12). 1.4.2.4

Color Encoding

As with JPEG, in JPEG2000 also color components are transformed into a different space from the original RGB space to reduce redundancy among the components. However, unlike JPEG, in this case there is no requirement of downsampling of chrominance components on account of the multiresolution representation used in JPEG2000. For lossy compression, the irreversible component transform is used as follows (see Eq.(1.10)): Y Cb Cr

= 0.587G + 0.114B + 0.299R, = −0.33126G + 0.5B − 0.16875R, = −0.41869G − 0.08131B + 0.5R.

(1.10)

The inverse transform of the above is given by R G B

= = =

Y + 1.402Cr, Y − 0.34413Cb + 0.71414Cr, Y + 1.772Cb.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

(1.11)

20

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

Precincts

Figure 1.12: Code structure of JPEG2000. For lossless compression, reversible color transform is applied as follows: Y U V

= = =

⌊ R+2G+b ⌋, 4 R − G, B − G.

(1.12)

The corresponding inverse of the reversible color transformation is given by G R B

= Y − ⌊ U+V 4 ⌋, = U + G, = V + G.

(1.13)

After obtaining color components by applying one of the above transforms, individual components are independently compressed following the same steps earlier described.

1.5

Video Compression Techniques

There exists greater amount of statistical redundancies in video data compared to still images. In addition to spatial redundancy, it also has temporal redundancy in consecutive frames, and compression algorithms aim at discarding these redundancies, leading to reduction in the size of the video. Usually,

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

21

Image and Video Compression: An Overview

video compression is lossy in nature as it deals with enormous amount of data. The block diagram of a typical video encoder is shown in Figure 1.13. Input Frame Sequence

ME

DCT

IDCT

Q

EC

Compressed Video Stream

Q -1

Figure 1.13: Block diagram of a typical video encoder. In a video compression algorithm, each input video frame is compressed individually. First, they are mapped from the RGB color-space to the YCbCr color-space. Like the baseline lossy JPEG compression algorithm, usually the luminance component, Y , of the frame is sampled at the original picture resolution, while the chrominance components, Cb and Cr, are downsampled by two in both the horizontal and vertical directions to yield a 4:2:0 subsampled picture format. Input frames are further subdivided into macroblocks (MBs) of typical size of 16×16 pixels. Hence, each YCbCr macroblock consists of four luminance blocks of dimensions 8×8 pixels, followed by one 8×8 Cb block and one 8 × 8 Cr block. As shown in Figure 1.13, an input video frame first undergoes motion estimation (ME) with respect to one or more reference frames. Some frames (or some macroblocks of a frame) are independently encoded, and the ME block is skipped for them. The motion estimated frame is then transformed from spatial to frequency domain using an 8 × 8 block employing DCT. The transformed coefficients are then quantized (Q) and entropy coded (EC) using variable length codes (VLC) to generate the output bitstream. Again, on the encoder side, the quantized coefficients are dequantized (Q−1 ) and inverse transformed (IDCT) to obtain the reconstructed frame. The reconstructed frame is then subsequently used to estimate the motion in the next input frame. Different video compression algorithms have been developed for different types of applications in keeping with various targets set by them. For example, H.26x standards are targeted at video teleconferencing, while the Motion JPEG (MJPEG) is convenient for video editors as it has easy access to individual frames. However, the latter technique works with a low compression ratio. There are different standards suggested by the MPEG, starting from MPEG-1, which is designed for low bitrate (e.g., 1.5 Mbps) audio and video playback applications, and then MPEG-2 for higher bitrates for high-quality playback applications with full-sized images (e.g., CCIR 601 with studio quality at 4–10 Mbps). Later, MPEG-4 video standard was advanced for both low

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

22

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain Seq .

Seq . SC

Seq .

Video Params

GOP SC

Pict . SC

Slice SC

Addr . Incr.

Time Code

Seq .

Bitstream Params

Buffer Params

Vert. Pos .

Q-Scale

Type

QTs

GOP Params

Type

MV

Seq .

...........

Misc

Picture

Encode Params

MB

Q-Scale

GOP

..............

Slice

MB

CBP

..........

............

...........

BL-1

........

GOP

Picture

Slice

MB

BL-6

Figure 1.14: Video stream data hierarchy. data rate and high data rate applications. Under the context of compressed domain processing, let us review three such video compression standards, namely MPEG-2, MPEG-4, and H.264 for their extensive use in different applications.

1.5.1

MPEG-2

The MPEG-2 [135] is one of the most popular video compression techniques. The structure of the encoded video stream and its encoding methodology are briefly described below. 1.5.1.1

Encoding Structure

Considering a video as a sequence of frames (or pictures), in MPEG-2 video stream, the video data is organized in a hierarchical fashion as shown in Figure 1.14. The video stream consists of five layers : GOP, pictures, slices, macroblock, and block, as discussed in the following text (see Figure 1.15).

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

Image and Video Compression: An Overview

23

Video Sequence GOP -----

-----

Slice

Block

Picture Macroblock Figure 1.15: Video sequence in an MPEG stream. 1. Video Sequence: It begins with a sequence header, includes one or more groups of pictures, and ends with an end-of-sequence code. 2. Group of Pictures (GOP): This consists of a header and a series of one or more pictures intended to allow random access into the sequence. 3. Picture: A picture is an individual image or frame, the primary coding unit of a video sequence. A frame of a colored video has three components: a luminance (Y ) and two chrominance (Cb and Cr ) components. The Cb and Cr components are one half the size of the Y in horizontal and vertical directions. 4. Slice: One or more contiguous macroblocks define a slice. In a slice, macroblocks are ordered from left to right and top to bottom. Slices are used for handling of errors. If an error is reported for a slice, a decoder may skip the erroneous part and goes to the start of the next slice. 5. Macroblock: Like still image coding, the basic coding unit in the MPEG algorithm is also a macroblock. It is a 16 × 16 pixel segment in a frame. If each chrominance component has one-half the vertical and horizontal resolution of the luminance component, a macroblock consists of four Y, one Cr, and one Cb block (as shown in Figure 1.16). 6. Block: A block is the smallest coding unit in the MPEG-2 algorithm. It is of 8 × 8 pixels, and it can be one of three types: luminance (Y ), complementary red chrominance (Cr ), or complementary blue chrominance (Cb). 1.5.1.2

Frame Types

There are three types of pictures or frames in the MPEG standard, depending upon their role in the encoding process.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

24

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

}

Y

1

2

5

Cb

3

4

6

Cr

Figure 1.16: Structure of a macroblock.

I

B

B

P

B

B

P

Figure 1.17: Prediction of pictures in a GOP sequence. 1. Intra-frames (I-Frames) 2. Predicted frames (P-Frames) 3. Bidirectional frames (B-Frames) A sequence of these three types of pictures forms a group of pictures whose starting frame must be of an ‘I-frame.’ A typical GOP structure is shown in Figure 1.17. 1. Intra-frames: Intra-frames, or I-frames, are coded independently using only information present in the picture itself. It enables one to synchronize a video with potential random access points within its compressed stream. Encoding of I-frames is the same as still-image encoding. In MPEG-2, the same JPEG baseline lossy compression algorithm is used for coding these frames.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

Image and Video Compression: An Overview

25

2. Predicted frames: A predicted frame, or P-frame, is predicted from its nearest previous I- or P-frame. The prediction in this case is guided by motion compensation, leading to higher compression of these frames. 3. Bidirectional frames: Bidirectional frames, or B-frames, are frames that use both a past and a future frame as references. Hence, in this case, the frame is encoded with bidirectional prediction. Expectedly, Bframes have higher compression than P-frames. However, it takes more computation during prediction. 1.5.1.3

Method of Encoding Pictures

1. Intra-frame: As mentioned earlier, I-frames are encoded following the same baseline JPEG lossy compression algorithm as discussed earlier. In this case also, a color component of an I-frame is partitioned into a set of 8 × 8 nonoverlapping blocks, and each partition is subjected to operations such as level shifting, forward DCT, quantization, and entropy encoding of DC and AC coefficients, which are organized in a zigzag order to produce long runs of zero, encoded subsequently with a variable length Huffman code (see Figure 1.8). 2. P-frame: A P-frame is coded with reference to a previous image (reference image) that is either an I- or a P-frame as shown in Figure 1.18. In this case, the frame is partitioned into a set of 16 × 16 blocks (called macroblocks under this context), and each of them is predicted from a macroblock of reference frame (of the same size). The respective reference macroblock is obtained by searching in the reference image around the neighborhood of its same position. The offset position of the reference macroblock, which provides minimum error (usually computed in the form of the sum of absolute differences (SAD)), is stored in the compressed stream, and it is known as the motion vector of the corresponding macroblock of the P-frame. Finally, the difference between the values of the encoded macroblock and reference macroblock (i.e., the prediction error) is computed, and they are encoded by subsequent application of forward DCT, quantization, run-length encoding of zigzag sequence of AC coefficients, and Huffman encoding of respective runs and DC off-sets. 3. B-frame: A B-frame is bidirectionally predicted from a past and a future reference frame. In this case, motion vectors can be from either the previous reference frame, or from the next picture, or from both. This process of encoding is shown in Figure 1.19. Consider a B-frame B, predicted from two reference frames R1 and R2 . Let R1 be the past I- or P-frame, and R2 be the future I- or P- frame. For each macroblock mB of B, the closest match m1 in R1 and m2 in R2 are computed. In that case, the prediction of mb , mˆb , is obtained as follows.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

26

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

Past Frame

Current Frame

-

Σ

+

Prediction Errors

Figure 1.18: Coding of predicted pictures.

Past Frame

Current Frame

Future Frame

+ -

Σ

-

Prediction Errors

Figure 1.19: Coding of bidirectional predicted pictures.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

27

Image and Video Compression: An Overview

mˆb = round(α1 m1 + α2 m2 ), where α1 and α2 are defined below. (a) α1 = 0.5, and α2 = 0.5 if both matches are satisfactory. (b) α1 = 1, and α2 = 0 if only first match is satisfactory. (c) α1 = 0, and α2 = 1 if only second match is satisfactory. (d) α1 = 0, and α2 = 0 if neither match is satisfactory. Finally, the error block eb is computed by taking the difference of mb and mˆb . These error blocks are coded in the same way as the blocks of an I-frame.

Search Area Reference Frame

M

oti

on

Ve cto

r

Current Frame Macroblock

Figure 1.20: Motion estimation for MPEG-2 video encoder.

1.5.1.4

Motion Estimation

In video compression, for motion-compensated prediction, pixels within the current frame are modeled as translations of those within a reference frame. In forward prediction, each macroblock (MB) is predicted from the previous frame assuming that all the pixels within that MB undergo same amount of translational motion. This motion information is represented by a twodimensional displacement vector or motion vector. Due to its block-based representation, block-matching techniques are employed for motion estimation (see Figure 1.20). As shown in the figure, both the current frame and

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

28

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

the reference frame have been divided into blocks. Subsequently, each block in the current frame is matched at all locations within the search window of the previous frame. In this block-based matching technique, a cost function measuring the mismatch between a current MB and the reference MB is minimized to provide the motion vector. There are different cost measures used for this purpose, such as, mean of absolute differences (MAD), sum-ofabsolute-differences (SAD), mean-square-error (MSE), etc. The most widely used metric is the SAD, defined by SADi,j (u, v) =

N −1 N −1 X X p=0 q=0

|ci,j (p, q) − ri−u,j−v (p, q)|.

(1.14)

where SADi,j (u, v) represents the SAD between the (i, j)th block and the block at the (u, v)th location in the search window Wi,j of the (i, j)th block. Here, ci,j (p, q) represents the (p, q)th pixel of an N × N (i, j)th MB Ci,j , from the current picture. ri−u,j−v (p, q) represents the (p, q)th pixel of an N × N MB from the reference picture displaced by the vector (u, v) within the search range of Ci,j . To find the MB producing the minimum mismatch error, the SAD is to be computed at several locations within the search window. The simplest but the most computationally intensive search method, known as the full search or exhaustive search method, evaluates SAD at every possible pixel location in the search area. Using full search, the motion vector is computed as follows: M Vi,j = {(u′ , v ′ )|SADi,j (u′ , v ′ ) ≤ SADi,j (u, v), ∀(u, v) ∈ Wi,j },

(1.15)

where M Vi,j expresses the motion vector of the current block Ci,j with minimum SAD among all search positions. In MPEG-2, motion vectors are computed either with full pixel or half pixel precision. In the former case, MBs are defined from the locations of the reference frame in its original resolution, but for half pixel motion vectors, the reference image is first bilinearly extrapolated to double its resolution in both the directions. Then motion vectors are computed from the locations of the interpolated reference image. For a downsampled chrominance component, the same motion vector is used for prediction. In this case, the resulting motion vector of the chrominance MB is scaled down by a factor of two. 1.5.1.5

Handling Interlaced Video

The MPEG-2 compression standard also handles interlaced video, which is common for television standards. In this case, a frame is partitioned into two fields (odd and even fields). Each field is separately encoded, and motion estimation of an MB of a field is optionally performed from the same type of field of the reference frame or another field of the current frame if it is encoded prior to the present one.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

29

Image and Video Compression: An Overview

1.5.2

MPEG-4

The MPEG-4 [135] video compression technique is distinguished by the fact that it takes care of object-based encoding of a video. The project was initiated by MPEG in July 1993 in view of its application in representing multimedia content and delivery. The standard was finally adopted in February 1999. In fact, the standard encompasses representation of not only video but also other medias such as synthetic scenes, audio, text, and graphics. All these entities are encapsulated in an audiovisual object (AVO). A set of AVOs represents a multimedia content, and they are composed together to form the final compound AVOs or scenes. In our discussion, we restrict ourselves to the video compression part of the MPEG-4 standard. An overview of the video compression technique is shown in Figure 1.21. Shape Coding

O1

VOL1

En Motion Coding

co

de

d VO

Texture coding

Shape Coding

VOL2

O1

Encoded VOL2 Multiplexer

Motion Coding

O2

O2

O3

Texture coding

VO Shape Coding

VOL3 O3

co

Motion Coding

Encoded bit-stream

L1

Input Video

L3

d de

En

Texture coding

Figure 1.21: An overview of an MPEG-4 video encoder.

1.5.2.1

Video Object Layer

As shown in Figure 1.21, an input video is modeled as a set of sequence of video objects. We have to apply segmentation algorithms for extracting objects from individual frames known as video object planes (VOPs), and the sequence of these objects in the overall video defines a video object (VO) or a video object layer (VOL). For example, in Figure 1.21, there are three such VOLs. We may also consider the background as another layer. However, in MPEG-4, the background of a video may be efficiently coded as sprites, which is discussed later. Individual VOs are independently coded consisting of information related to shape, motion, and texture. Each of these codings is briefly discussed here. 1. Shape encoding: Every VOP in a frame could be of arbitrary shape. However, the bounding rectangle of this shape in the frame is specified.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

30

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

This rectangle is adjusted in such a way that its dimension in both horizontal and vertical directions becomes an integral multiple of 16 so that it can be encoded as a set of nonoverlapping MBs of size 16 × 16. The pixels within the rectangle not belonging to the object are usually denoted by the value zero (0); otherwise they contain 1 (in binary representation of the shape) or a gray value (usually denoted by α), used for blending with other VOPs during reconstruction of the video. There are three types of MBs within this rectangle. An MB may have (i) all nonzero pixels (contained within the object), or (ii) all zero pixels, or (iii) both types of pixels. The third type of MB is called the boundary MB of a VOP. The binary shape information of a VOP is encoded by a content-adaptive arithmetic coding (CAE) [131], while for gray-shape representation the usual motion compensated (MC) DCT representation is followed. 2. Motion encoding: Like MPEG-2, each VOP of a layer is one of three types, namely, I-VOP, P-VOP, and B-VOP. In this case also, motion vectors are computed in the same manner as done for MPEG-2. However, there are other options (or modes) for computing motion vectors and subsequently obtaining the motion-compensated prediction errors for an MB. These modes include the following: (a) Four motion vectors for each 8 × 8 block of an MB are computed separately, and the prediction errors are obtained using them. (b) Three overlapping blocks of the reference frame are used to compute the prediction errors for each 8 × 8 block of the current MB. These reference blocks are obtained from the closest matches of its neighboring blocks, either to its left (right) or to its top (bottom). The third one is the closest match of the concerned block itself in the reference frame. For every pixel in the current block, a weighted mean of corresponding pixels of those three blocks provides its prediction. These weights are also predefined in the standard. 3. Texture encoding: In texture coding, MBs of a VOP are encoded in the same way as it is done in MPEG-2. For I-VOP, 8 × 8 blocks are transformed by the DCT, and subsequently transformed coefficients are quantized and entropy coded. For P-VOP and B-VOP, after motion compensation of an MB, residual errors (for each 8×8 block) are encoded in the same way. However, there are a few additional features in MPEG-4 in encoding textures. They are briefly discussed here. (a) Intra DC and AC prediction: In MPEG-4 there is a provision for prediction of quantized DC and AC coefficients from one of its neighboring blocks (either to its left or to its bottom) in intra VOPs. The neighboring block, which has lower gradient in the coefficient space (with respect to the leftmost and topmost diagonal

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

Image and Video Compression: An Overview

31

neighboring block), is chosen for this purpose. The same feature is also extended for the MBs in the intra mode of inter VOPs. (b) DCT of boundary blocks: As boundary blocks have pixels not belonging to a VOP, they need to be either padded with suitable values to avoid abrupt transitions in the block (as they may demand greater number of bits for encoding), or they may be ignored in the computation of the transform itself. In the first strategy, all the non-VOP pixels within the block are padded with the mean pixel value of that block, and then they are subjected to a low-pass average filtering to reduce the abrupt transitions near the junctions of non-VOP and VOP pixels. Alternatively, for dropping these nonVOP pixels from the compressed stream, we need to apply shape adaptive DCT (SA-DCT) [131] to the corresponding block. In this case, N -point DCTs are applied successively to the columns and rows of the block containing N (N ≤ 8) VOP pixels. 1.5.2.2

Background Encoding

The background of a video may be treated as a separate VOL and encoded in the same way as others. However, MPEG-4 also makes provision for encoding in the form of a sprite. A sprite is a still image formed from a set of consecutive video frames, that do not show any motion within its pixel. At any instance of time, a particular rectangular zone of the sprite is covered by a frame. Hence, once a sprite is defined for the set of frames, it is sufficient to pass the coordinate information of that zone for rendering the concerned frame. This is similar to the panning of the camera, and the respective parameters are encoded in the video stream. A sprite acts as a background for that set of frames. If it is defined for the complete video, the sprite is static, and it is computed offline during the encoding process. However, in real time, we have to compute dynamic sprites for a group of pictures. 1.5.2.3

Wavelet Encoding of Still Images

The MPEG-4 allows use of wavelets for encoding of still images. Like JPEG2000, it also follows dyadic decomposition [92] of images into a multiresolution representation. However, the coefficients of the LL band (see Section 1.4.2.1 and Figure 1.11) is encoded in a different way from other subbands. In this case, they are simply quantized and entropy coded by arithmetic coding. Other subbands are encoded with the help of a zero tree as proposed in [128]. The symbols of the zero tree are encoded using an arithmetic coder.

1.5.3

H.264/AVC

The video compression standard H.264/AVC [155] (or H.264 as will be referred to subsequently) is the outcome of the joint effort of the ITU-T VCEG

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

32

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

and the ISO/IEC MPEG. The major objectives of this standardization effort are (i) to develop a simple and straightforward video coding design with enhanced compression performance, and (ii) to provide a network-friendly video representation addressing both conversational (such as video telephony) and non-conversational (such as storage, broadcast, or streaming) applications. In fact, the H.264 has greatly outperformed other existing video standards such as MPEG-2. The H.264 specifies the video in the form of a video-coding layer (VCL) and a network abstraction layer (NAL) (see Figure 1.22). The VCL represents the video content, and the NAL formats the VCL with requisite header information appropriate for its transmission by transport layers or for its storage in a media. The H.264 video compression algorithm is also a hybrid of interpicture prediction and transform coding of the prediction residual error (see Figure 1.23). Like MPEG-2 and MPEG-4, the H.264 design [155] also supports the coding of video in 4:2:0 chroma format. It handles both progressive and interlaced videos. In Figure 1.23, processing of a single MB of a video frame is shown with the help of a block diagram. The basic coding structure of H.264 is a hierarchical one [151]. A video sequence consists of several pictures or frames. A single picture is partitioned into a set of slices, which is again a collection of MBs. Some of the features of H.264 and its coding structure are discussed next. 1.5.3.1

Slices and Slice Groups

A video frame may be split into one or several slices. The H.264 has the provision of defining a slice with a flexible macroblock ordering (FMO) by utilizing the concept of a slice group, as a set of MBs and specified by a mapping between an MB to a slice. Again, each slice group consists of one or more slices such that MBs in the slice are processed in the order of a raster scan. 1.5.3.2

Additional Picture Types

There are two more additional types for encoding slices other than usual picture types such as I, P and B. These two new coding types are switching I (SI) and switching P (SP) pictures, which are used for switching the bitstream from one rate to another [75]. 1.5.3.3

Adaptive Frame/Field-Coding Operation

For higher coding efficiency, the H.264/AVC encoders may adaptively encode fields (in the interlaced mode) separately or combine them into a single frame.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

33

Image and Video Compression: An Overview

Input Video

Video Coding Layer (VCL)

Control Data

Coded Macro-blocks

Data Partitioning

Coded Slice

Network Abstraction Layer H.320

MPEG -2

H.323 /IP

MP4FF

Figure 1.22: Structure of H.264/AVC video encoder.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

etc.

34

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

Coder Control

Input Video

+

Transform, Scaling & Quantization

Control Data

Quantized Coefficients

Dequantization ,

Entropy Coding

+ Intra-frame Prediction Deblocking Filter Motion Compensation Output Video

Motion Data Motion Estimation

Figure 1.23: Basic coding structure of H.264/AVC.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

Compressed Output

Scaling & Inverse Transform

Image and Video Compression: An Overview Q

A

B

C

D

I

a

b

c

d

J

e

f

g

h

K

i

j

k

l

L

m

n

o

p

E

F

G

35

H

Figure 1.24: Intra 4 × 4 prediction is computed for samples a − p of a block using samples A − Q. 1.5.3.4

Intra-frame Prediction

There are different modes of intra-frame predictions supported in H.264, namely, Intra 4 × 4 or Intra 16 × 16, and I P CM prediction modes. These are discussed below. 1. I PCM: This coding type allows the encoder to simply bypass the prediction. 2. Intra 4 × 4 mode: In this mode, each 4 block is predicted from spatially neighboring samples as illustrated in Figure 1.24. The 16 samples of the 4 × 4 block as labeled from a to p are predicted from decoded samples of adjacent blocks (labeled by big alphabets from A to Q). For each 4 × 4 block, there may be one of nine prediction modes (see Figure 1.25). In mode 0 (vertical prediction), samples above the 4 × 4 block are simply copied into the block (as indicated by the arrows). Similarly in mode 1 (horizontal prediction), the samples to the left of the 4 × 4 block are copied. In mode 2 (DC prediction), averages of adjacent samples are used for prediction. The remaining six modes are diagonal prediction modes, namely, diagonal-down-left, diagonal-down-right, vertical-right, horizontal-down, vertical-left, and horizontal-up prediction. Pixels along those specified directions are used for prediction. 3. Intra 16 × 16 mode: In this mode the complete luminance component of an MB is predicted from neighboring MBs. It has four prediction modes, namely, mode 0 (vertical prediction), mode 1 (horizontal prediction), mode 2 (DC prediction) and mode 3 (plane prediction). The first three modes are the same as the Intra 4 × 4 mode, except for the fact that, instead of four neighbors on each side to predict a 4 × 4 block, 16 neighbors on each side are used to predict the 16 × 16 block. In mode 3 (plane prediction), predictions are made from both vertical and horizontal neighbors lying on the same straight line parallel to the off-diagonal. The chrominance samples of an MB usually have less variation over a

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

36

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

Q

A

B

C

D

Q

A

B

C

D

I

I J

J

MODE 0 Horizontal

K

K

L

L

Q

A

B

C

Q

D

MODE 1 Vertical

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

I J

J

MODE 2 DC

K

K

L

L

Q

A

B

C

D

MODE 3 Diagonal Left

Q

I

A

B

C

D

I

J

J

MODE 4 Diagonal Down Right

K

MODE 5 Vertical Right

K

L

L

Q

A

B

C

D

Q

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

I

I J

J

MODE 6 Horizontal Down

K

K

L

L

Q

A

B

C

D

I J K

MODE 8 Horizontal Up

L

Figure 1.25: Intra 4 × 4 prediction modes. © 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

MODE 7 Vertical Left

H

Image and Video Compression: An Overview

37

8 x 16 16 x 16

16 x 8 16 x 8 8 x 16

8x8 8x8 8x8 8x8

Figure 1.26: Partitioning of an MB. relatively larger area. Hence they are predicted using a similar technique as used for the luminance component in Intra 16 × 16 mode. 1.5.3.5

Inter-frame Prediction in P Slices

There are different types of partitioning in a P-MB for motion compensation. For example, a 16 × 16 luminance block may be partitioned as blocks of one 16 × 16, two 16 × 8 or 8 × 16, and four 8 × 8 blocks. Again, if an 8 × 8 partition is chosen, it may be further decomposed into partitions of 8 × 4, 4 × 8, or 4 × 4 blocks. In Figure 1.26, different partitioning schemes are illustrated. As can be seen from different partitioning schemes, a maximum of 16 motion vectors may be transmitted for a single P MB. The accuracy of motion compensation may be in units of one, half, or one quarter of the distance between luminance samples. For full pixel motion vectors, integer-coordinate locations within the frame itself are specified. However, for half or one-quarter pixel vectors, the frame is interpolated to generate noninteger positions. Samples at half-sample positions are predicted by applying a one-dimensional 6tap FIR filter horizontally and vertically, whereas at quarter-sample positions these are generated by averaging samples at integer- and half-sample positions [155]. The samples for the chrominance components are always predicted by bilinear interpolation. This is due to the fact that the sampling grid of a chrominance component has a lower resolution than that of the luminance component. The H.264 also has other interesting features in computing motion vectors.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

38

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

These vectors may be drawn from points outside the image area. In this case, the reference frame is required to be extrapolated beyond its boundaries. Motion vectors may also be estimated from multiple reference images coded previously. In addition to the motion-compensated MB modes described earlier, a P macroblock may also be coded in the skip mode ( P Skip type). In this mode the MB is simply copied from its previously coded frame. 1.5.3.6

Inter-frame Prediction in B Slices

In H.264 the concept of B slices is further generalized in comparison with the usual compression algorithm. In this case, B slices use two distinct lists of reference pictures. They are referred to as the first list0 and the second list1 reference picture lists, respectively. In B slices, there are four additional types of inter-picture prediction, namely, list0 , list1 , bi-predictive, and direct prediction, besides the usual prediction modes of P-Inter Frame Slices. In this case also an MB may be skipped if the prediction error remains the same as the corresponding MB of the previous encoded frame. 1.5.3.7

Integer Transform and Scaling

The H.264 compression technique is distinguished by the use of integer cosine transforms (ICT) [18] and, that too, for 4 × 4 blocks (instead of the usual 8 × 8 DCTs). The ICT has the following advantages compared to the DCT: 1. It is an integer transform. All operations can be carried out with 16-bit integer arithmetic without loss of accuracy. 2. The inverse transform is fully specified in the H.264 standard and, if this specification is followed correctly, mismatch between encoders and decoders should not occur. 3. The core part of the transform is free of multiplications, that is, it only requires additions and shifts. 4. A scaling multiplication (part of the complete transform) is integrated into the process of quantization (reducing the total number of multiplications). Moreover, the ICT can easily be related to the DCT. The 4 × 4 DCT of an input array X is given in Eq. (1.16). 

  a a a a  b  c −c −b   [X]  Y = AXAT =   a −a −a  a  c −b b −c q q where a = 12 , b = 12 cos( π8 ), c = 12 cos( 3π 8 ).

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

a a a a

b a c −a −c −a −b a

 c −b  , b  −c

(1.16)

Image and Video Compression: An Overview

39

We may modify the matrix A in such a way that it consists of integer values only, though its orthogonal property remains intact. This is what is done with the matrix T4 in Eq. (1.17). In this case, the 2nd and 4th rows of matrix T4 , and the 2nd and 4th columns of matrix T4T are scaled by a factor of 2, and the postscaling matrix E is scaled N down for compensation. E is a matrix of scaling factors, and the symbol ‘ ’ indicates elementwise multiplication. The final forward transform is given in Eq. ( 1.17). N T Y =  (T E 4 XT4 )    1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1  2   1 −1 −2  1 −1 −2    [X]  1  =   1 −1 −1    1 1 −1 −1 2  1 −2 2 −1 1 −2 1 −1 (1.17)  2 ab  a2 ab a 22 22 b ab b  N  ab 4 2 4 ,  2 ab ab 2 2  a  a ab 2

where a = 12 , b =

q

2 5.

2 b2 4

ab 2

2 b2 4

Elements of E are known as postscaling factors, which 2

can be any of the values given by a2 , b4 ,or ab 2 . This transform is an approximation to the 4 × 4 DCT and is not identical to it. The inverse transform is given by Eq. (1.18).

X=



  1 1 1 1 2 1  1  N −1 −1  2   [Y ]  1  1 −   −1 1 2 1 −1 1 − 12



1  1   1

1 2

1.5.3.8

1 1 2

1

− 12 −1 −1 −1 1

 1 −1  . 1  − 21

a2 ab a2 ab

 ab a2 ab  b2 ab b2   ab a2 ab  b2 ab b2

(1.18)

Quantization

The H.264 uses scalar quantization as given by E(i, j) Z(i, j) = round W (i, j) , Qstep

(1.19)

where W (i, j) is the (i, j)th coefficient of the 4 × 4 ICT of X and it is computed as W = T4 XT4T . E(i, j) is the corresponding element of the post-scaling matrix. Qstep is the quantization step size, and Z(i, j) is the corresponding quantized coefficient. The standard supports a total of 52 values for the parameter Qstep.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

40 1.5.3.9

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

Second Transformation of DC Coefficients

As Intra 16 × 16 prediction modes and chrominance intra modes are intended for coding smooth areas, the DC coefficients of each 4 × 4 residual error blocks (as obtained by the first stage of transformation through prediction from neighboring blocks) undergo a second transform. In a 16 × 16 MB, the DC coefficient of each 4 × 4 block is transformed using a 4 × 4 Hadamard transform, and the DC coefficients of each 4 × 4 block of chrominance coefficients are grouped in a 2 × 2 block and are further transformed in the same way prior to their quantization. The transformations of corresponding DC luminance values and chrominance values are shown below in Eqs. (1.20) and (1.21), respectively.     1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1   1  1 −1 −1  1 −1 −1   1  [WD ]  1  . YD =  (1.20)      1 −1 −1 1 1 −1 −1 1  2 1 −1 1 −1 1 −1 1 −1 YD =

1 2

1 1

1 −1

[WD ]

1 1

1 −1

.

(1.21)

In the above equations, WD is the block of DC coefficients, and YD is the block after transformation, which is subjected to quantization subsequently. 1.5.3.10

Entropy Coding

In H.264, syntax elements and quantized transform coefficients are separately entropy coded following two different variable length code (VLC) tables. The syntaxes used a single adaptive code table that is customized according to the data statistics. It is essentially an exp-Golomb code [155] with very simple and regular decoding properties. There is also provision to make these tables dynamic depending on the change in data statistics. For quantized transform coefficients, a more efficient method called context-adaptive variable length coding (CAVLC) [155] is employed. 1.5.3.11

In-Loop Deblocking Filter

In-loop deblocking filter is used to reduce the blocking artifacts that may appear due to the block-based encoding of data. Usually, block edges are poorly reconstructed with this type of encoding. That is why H.264 defines an adaptive in-loop deblocking filter where the strength of filtering is controlled by the values of several syntax elements. 1.5.3.12

Network Abstraction Layer

H.264 also defines how data should be formatted for its interface with different transport layers in its specification for NAL. The NAL units define the partitioning and packaging of this data stream. Each of this unit contains an

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

41

Image and Video Compression: An Overview

(a)

(b)

Figure 1.27: Image resizing from (a) HDTV (of frame-size 1080 × 1920) to (b) NTSC (of frame-size 480 × 640). integer number of bytes and is employed in specifying a generic format for use in both packet-oriented and bitstream systems.

1.6

Examples of a Few Operations in the Compressed Domain

A number of direct implementation of various image and video processing operations in the compressed domain have been advanced. As this book mainly deals with the fundamentals and issues related to the development of those techniques, we provide an overview of such operations. 1. Image Resizing: In different applications, before the display, storage, or transmission of images, resizing images may be needed to fit them according to the resolutions of display devices or a format of storage or the limited duration of transmission. For example, we may need to convert an image in NTSC format into an HDTV one and vice versa. In Internet applications it is quite common to transmit an image with varying resolutions and sizes in keeping with different specifications of the display and communication network at client ends. There are quite a few techniques reported in the literature for performing this resizing operation directly in the compressed domain, in particular for images represented in the block DCT domain (as wavelet representation has the advantage of multiresolution representation of images, and resizing operations become trivial with that representation). A typical example of conversion of an image in HDTV format into an NTSC one in the block DCT space [103] is shown in Figure 1.27. 2. Transcoding: Transcoding is an important task that is often required for providing multimedia interoperability and bringing heterogeneous

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

42

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

(a)

(b)

Figure 1.28: Color image enhancement in the block DCT space: (a) Original and (b) Enhanced image.

devices together. In fact, resizing is also a type of transcoding operation, in which images in one spatial resolution are converted into another as demonstrated in Figure 1.27. On the other hand, transcoding of an image or video from one compression standard into another is often required. For example, we may consider transcoding JPEG2000 images into JPEG format or vice versa. Similarly, to provide higher interoperability in a video player, we may consider transcoding of H.264 video into MPEG-2. The brute force transcoding would have used the decoder and encoder in succession for converting image (or video) from one standard into the other. However, as discussed previously, compressed domain operations have several advantages, and various techniques [144] have been put forward by researchers to perform transcoding in the compressed domain itself. 3. Image Enhancement: Image enhancement is a task often aimed at rendering images with better visual perceptibility. Due to various reasons, raw image data require processing before display. For example, it may have a small dynamic range of intensity values on account of the presence of strong background illumination or due to insufficient lighting. A large dynamic range may also create problems caused by the limitation of the displayable range of colors or brightness values of a display device. In fact, it is more challenging in the event of imaging under a widely varying scene illumination. Image enhancement attempts to take care of these situations mainly by adjusting contrast, brightness and color of images. Though there are various methods reported in the spatial domain, it has been observed that compressed domain operations are also capable of performing these tasks usually with less computation but with comparable performance. A typical example of color image enhancement in the block DCT domain [105] 1 is shown in Figure 1.28 (see color insert). 1 The original image was obtained http://dragon.larc.nasa.govt/retinex/pao/news.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

from

the

web-site

Image and Video Compression: An Overview

43

4. Information Hiding: Due to the revolution in information and communication technology, there is an explosion of information generation and exchange. In particular, production and management of multimedia documents have become an integral part of today’s social interaction. Under its aegis, covert communication of messages through these different digital media such as audio, text, images, videos, etc., has also become an issue not only from a social consideration but also from a technological point of view. This has led to the development and analysis of various techniques of information hiding. There are two different types of tasks involved in this domain. The first is digital watermarking [30], mainly used for copyright protection and authentication of digital media, and the other is steganography [30, 70], the art of covert communication with usual means (of unsuspected documents). For images and videos, as mainly these documents are available in the compressed domain, there is a considerable thrust toward developing algorithms of those two major operations and their analysis in the compressed domain itself. 5. Image and Video Analysis: Besides the foregoing three examples, various efforts are being made to develop different image and video analysis operations directly in the compressed domain. Some of them include video and image editing operations, image registration, object matching, video indexing, etc.

1.7

Issues and Performance Measures

While developing algorithms in the compressed domain, we should always consider the cost-benefit analysis of the technique compared to techniques realizing similar objectives in the spatial domain. There are three major issues in this regard as discussed in the following text.

1.7.1

Complexity of Algorithms

While expressing the complexities of algorithms, we have to consider both savings in computation and storage cost compared to equivalent computations in the spatial domain. In many cases, while expressing computational complexity, instead of determining the order of the complexity functions of input data size, the absolute number of operations per unit of input or output data (pixel for images) is used for measuring computational complexity. This is due to the fact that, in many cases, the order of complexity remains the same, though in absolute terms there are gains in computation. For example, while multiplying two matrices, we may reduce the number of multiplications if some of the

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

44

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

elements of these matrices are zero and some of them are repeated. Exploiting this sparseness in a matrix, we may design an efficient computation for certain operations. Using such properties of matrices we may design a specific computational technique for performing operations. As matrix multiplication is quite a common operation in compressed domain processing, we present here a general computational complexity model [103] for finding the number of multiplications and additions, assuming that some of the elements are zeroes and repeated in a row. Let A be a sparse matrix of size L × N , and it is to be multiplied with another arbitrary matrix B of size N ×M . If zi is the number of zero elements, and di is the number of distinct elements (of distinct magnitudes only) in the ith row of A, the total number of multiplications (nm (.)) and the total number of additions (na (.)) are given by following equations: nm (A; L, N, M ) = M ΣL i=1 di .

(1.22)

nm (A; L, N, M ) = M ΣL i=1 (N − zi − 1).

(1.23)

Let us refer to this model as the general computational complexity model of matrix multiplication (GCCMMM) for computing the number of multiplications and additions in multiplying two sparse matrices. In this model, however, elements of B are ignored, as B is considered here as the variable (say, an input block), while A is a fixed matrix operator. By exploiting other properties and constraints, further reductions in these numbers are possible. For example, if the value of an element is 1, we can ignore multiplication with that number. This is also true for an element expressed in integral powers of 2 (for both positive and negative numbers in the exponent). In that case, the multiplication (or division) operation is carried out by left (or right) shift of the binary representation of the number. However, the GCCMMM provides the upper estimate of the computational requirement for matrix multiplication.

1.7.2

Quality of Processed Images or Videos

The performance of different algorithms should also be judged by considering the quality of the processed images or videos. There are two distinct approaches while judging the quality of processed images. The first one attempts to find out the similarity between a reference image (the benchmark or ideal one) and the processed one. In the second approach, quality is judged by considering the visibility of different artifacts such as blurring, blocking, and ringing artifacts, which may occur due to processing. Though in the first case one requires a reference image for computing the metrics, in the second approach the measure may be defined solely on the intrinsic characteristics of images or videos. The latter type of measures or metrics is known as noreference metrics, whereas metrics based on reference data are known as full

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

45

Image and Video Compression: An Overview

reference metrics. We review next some of the measures used for judging the quality of images. 1.7.2.1

Similarity with respect to a Benchmark or Reference Image

Several measures have been proposed for expressing the similarity between two images. Some of them are discussed below. 1. Peak Signal-to-Noise Ratio (PSNR): Given a benchmark image, we may consider the faithful reconstruction of the image as a measure of quality. In this regard, for images (and video frames), PSNR is often used as a simple fidelity metric. It is defined below for a color image. Let Is (x, y), s = 1, 2, 3 be the color components of the benchmark images ′ of size M × N , and Is (x, y), s = 1, 2, 3 be the respective reconstructed color components. Then the PSNR is defined as 

P SN R = 20log  q

255 Σ∀s Σ∀x Σ∀y (Is (x,y)−Is′ (x,y))2 3MN

 

(1.24)

In the above equation, it is assumed that the peak signal value (or the maximum brightness value in the image) is 255. Accordingly, the PSNR for gray-level or monochrome images is also defined. 2. Universal Quality Index (UQI): We may easily observe that the PSNR is not necessarily a good measure of the similarity of images. For example, given a shift in the image pixels, the resulting image will be having a very poor PSNR value with respect to its original one, even though both of them appear to be very similar. We denote this type of similarity as perceptual similarity. There are different metrics proposed in the literature for measuring perceptual similarity or the quality of a processed image. One such measure is the universal quality index [170] defined next. Let x and y be two distributions. The UQI between these two distributions is defined as:

U QI(x, y) =

2 4σxy x ¯y¯ , (σx2 + σy2 )(¯ x2 + y¯2 )

(1.25)

2 where σxy is the covariance between x and y, σx and σy are the standard deviations of x and y, respectively. x ¯ and y¯ are their respective means. It may be noted that this measure takes into account the correlation between the two distributions and also their proximity in terms of brightness and contrast. The UQI values should lie in the interval [−1, 1]. Processed images with UQI values closer to 1 are more similar

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

46

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

in quality according to our visual perception. Usually, the UQI is computed locally for two images, and then the average over the set of local observations is considered the overall UQI between two images. 3. Structural Similarity(SSIM): The UQI has been further generalized in the following form [152] and named Structural Similarity measure. SSIM (x, y) =

2 (2.σxy + C2 )(2.¯ xy¯ + C1 ) , (σx2 + σy2 + C2 )(¯ x2 + y¯2 + C1 )

(1.26)

where all the previous notations of Eq. (1.25) are defined in the same way. C1 and C2 are new parameters, which are functions of the dynamic range of the image (say L) and expressed as (K1 L)2 and (K2 L)2 , and (K1 , K2 ≪ 1), respectively. In [152], K1 and K2 are taken as 0.01 and 0.03, respectively. It can be observed that, for C1 = C2 = 0, the SSIM becomes the same as the UQI. One advantage of the SSIM is that it provides more stability in numerical computation by introducing small positive biases in the factors of the numerator. Like UQI, the SSIM is also preferred for computing local similarities and then averaged over the set of observations. 1.7.2.2

Visibility of Artifacts

Quality is also judged by the appearance or suppression of different types of artifacts in the processed image while comparing it with the input or reference image. Even without any comparison, an image itself can be attributed by the existence and strength of such artifacts. There are different types of artifacts that are usually observed in images, namely, blurring, blocking, and ringing artifacts. Blurring of edges in an image occurs due to the suppression of its high spatial frequency components, while ringing around an edge takes place due to the quantization of high-frequency coefficients in transform coding. In a blurred edge, it gets smeared and loses sharpness, whereas ringing is visible as ripples around sharp edges [96]. Blocking artifacts are visible in a block-based compression scheme like JPEG. It occurs due to discontinuity in the block boundaries introduced by independent processing of blocks such as quantization of transform coefficients. There are different models proposed for measuring these artifacts. Two such typical techniques are discussed here. 1. Blur and Ringing Metrics: In [96], the blur of a vertical edge is measured by its width, which is computed as the distance between the local maximum and the local minimum in the neighborhood of the edge point. The average width of vertical edge points provides the measure of the blur of an image. The measure could have been defined including edges in other directions (e.g., horizontal edges, etc.). However, it is observed that there is only a small difference in expressing the relative perceptual

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

Image and Video Compression: An Overview

47

quality of images in both cases. For the convenience of computation, vertical edges are considered. The blur metric could be both a noreference or a full-reference metric. In the latter case, edge points are determined from the reference image, whereas for the noreference metric they are determined from the image (or processed image) itself. In [96] ringing is measured by using vertical edges only. In this case, first an interval supporting the ringing phenomena is defined around an edge point. The support to the left (right) of the edge point is defined by the set of points in the horizontal line within a fixed width (or distance) excluding the blurring points (points within blurring width as defined in expressing its blur previously). Then the left (right) ringing is defined as the length of the left (right) support multiplied by the dynamic range of the difference signal between the processed and original one within the support. The ringing at an edge point is defined as the sum of left and right ringing, and for the whole image it is the average of ringing of vertical edge points. Ringing metric (RM) is a full-reference metric. It may be noted that both blurring and ringing measures are typically used for judging the quality of JPEG2000 compressed images. 2. JPEG Quality Metric (JPQM): Wang et al. [153] proposed an interesting no-reference metric for judging the image quality reconstructed from the block DCT space to take into account visible blocking and blurring artifacts. This metric computes (i) average horizontal and vertical discontinuities at corresponding 8 × 8 block boundaries, (ii) activity in images expressed by deviations of average horizontal and vertical gradients from their respective average block discontinuities, and (iii) the average number of zero-crossings in these gradient spaces. Subsequently, these factors are combined in a nonlinear expression to produce the resulting value of the metric. It may be noted, that for an image with good visual quality, the JPQM value is close to 10. 1.7.2.3

Measure of Colorfulness

Colorfulness is also another attribute for judging the quality of a colored image. In [139], Susstrunk and Winkler proposed a no-reference metric called colorfulness metric (CM) for measuring the diversity and contrast of colors in an image. The definition for this metric in the RGB color space is as given below. Let the red, green, and blue components of an Image I be denoted as R, G, and B, respectively. Let α = R−G, and β = ( R+G 2 )−B. Then the colorfulness of the image is defined as q q CM (I) = σα2 + σβ2 + 0.3 µ2α + µ2β , (1.27)

where σα and σβ are standard deviations of α and β, respectively. Similarly, µα and µβ are their means.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

48

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

In [105], this metric has been converted to a full-reference one by comparing the color with respect to the original image, and it is expressed as the ratio of CMs between the processed image and its original. The new measure is named the color enhancement factor (CEF).

1.7.3

Level of Compression of the Input and Output Data

While judging the quality of the processed images due to compressed domain processing, we observe degrees of compression for both the input and output of a processing. The performance of a scheme may vary with the level of compression of images and videos. The level of compression is usually measured by the compression ratio, which is expressed as the ratio between the size of raw input data and the size of compressed data. The compression ratio may also be expressed in percentage (%). Further, assuming 8 bits per pixel for a gray-level image and 24 bits per pixel for color images, compression levels are expressed by the average bits per pixel (bpp) required for representing the compressed data. For video, the preferred unit in this case is the bits per second (bps), by taking care of the frame rate of a video.

1.8

Summary

In the compressed domain, images and videos are represented in alternative forms that are quite different from their representations in the spatial or spatiotemporal domain. In today’s world, due to the digital revolution in our daily life, in particular due to the stupendous advancement in the multimedia and communication technology, these images and videos are increasingly available in the compressed format. Compression standards such as JPEG, JPEG2000, MPEG-2, MPEG-4, H.264, etc., are not known only to specialists but they have gained popularity among modern consumers and users as well. Hence, in applications involving image and video processing, computations directly in the domain of alternative representation are often felt necessary as it reduces the time and storage required for the processing. In this chapter, with an introduction to different popular compression technology, motivation and performance issues related to the compressed domain processing have been discussed.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

Chapter 2 Image Transforms

2.1

2.2

Orthogonal Expansion of a Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.1 Trivial Expansion with Dirac Delta Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.2 Fourier Series Expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.3 Fourier Transform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.3.1 Properties of Fourier Transform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.4 Shannon’s Orthonormal Bases for Band-limited Functions . . . . . 2.1.5 Wavelet Bases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.5.1 Multiresolution Approximations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.5.2 Wavelet Bases for Multiresolution Approximations . . . Transforms of Discrete Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.1 Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.1.1 The Transform Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.1.2 Discrete Fourier Transform as Fourier Series of a Periodic Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.1.3 Circular Convolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.1.4 Energy Preservation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.1.5 Other Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.2 Generalized Discrete Fourier Transform (GDFT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.2.1 Transform Matrices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.2.2 Convolution–Multiplication Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.3 Discrete Trigonometric Transforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.3.1 Symmetric Extensions of Finite Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.3.2 Symmetric Periodic Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.3.3 Different Types of Discrete Trigonometric Transforms 2.2.3.4 Convolution Multiplication Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.4 Type-II Even DCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.4.1 Matrix Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.4.2 Downsampling and Upsampling Properties of the DCTs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.4.3 Subband Relationship of the type-II DCT . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.4.4 Approximate DCT Computation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.4.5 Composition and Decomposition of the DCT Blocks . 2.2.4.6 Properties of Block Composition Matrices . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.4.7 Matrix Factorization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.4.8 8-Point Type-II DCT Matrix (C8 ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.4.9 Integer Cosine Transforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.5 Hadamard Transform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.6 Discrete Wavelet Transform (DWT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.6.1 Orthonormal Basis with a Single Mother Wavelet . . . . 2.2.6.2 Orthonormal Basis with Two Mother Wavelets . . . . . . . 2.2.6.3 Haar Wavelets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.6.4 Other Wavelets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.6.5 DWT through Filter Banks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

50 53 53 53 54 57 57 58 60 60 61 62 62 63 64 64 65 66 66 67 68 68 74 77 79 79 79 80 81 81 82 86 86 87 89 89 89 90 90 91 92

49

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

50 2.3

2.4

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain 2.2.6.6 Lifting-based DWT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transforms in 2-D Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.1 2-D Discrete Cosine Transform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.1.1 Matrix Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.1.2 Subband Approximation of the Type-II DCT . . . . . . . . 2.3.1.3 Composition and Decomposition of the DCT Blocks in 2-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.1.4 Symmetric Convolution and Convolution–Multiplication Properties for 2-D DCT . 2.3.1.5 Fast DCT Algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.2 2-D Discrete Wavelet Transform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.2.1 Computational Complexity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

95 97 99 99 99 100 100 100 102 103 104

Image transforms [52] are used for decomposing images in different structures or components so that a linear combination of these components provide the image itself. We may consider an image as a 2-D real function f (x, y) ∈ L2 (R2 ), (x, y) ∈ R2 , where R is the set of real numbers and L2 (R2 ) is the space of all square integrable functions. In a transform, the function is represented as a linear combination of a family (or a set) of functions, known as basis functions. The number of basis functions in the set may be finite or infinite. Let B = {bi (x, y)| − ∞ < i < ∞} be a set of basis functions, where bi (x, y) may be in real (R) or complex space (C). In that case, a transform of the function f (x, y) with respect to the basis set B is defined by the following expression: f (x, y) =

∞ X

ai bi (x, y),

(2.1)

i=−∞

where ai ’s are in R or C depending upon the space of the basis functions. They are known as transform coefficients. This set of coefficients provides an alternative description of the function f (x, y). In this chapter we discuss a number of different image transforms and their properties. As all our transforms are extended from their counterparts in 1-D, for the sake of simplicity, we initially restrict our discussion to 1-D. Their extensions in 2-D are discussed subsequently.

2.1

Orthogonal Expansion of a Function

Let f (x) ∈ L2 (R) be a function over the support [a, b] ⊆ R, and B = {bi (x)| − ∞ < i < ∞, x ∈ [a, b]} be a set of basis functions (either in R or C). In our discussion we consider every function to be integrable in [a, b]. An expansion

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

51

Image Transforms

of f (x) with respect to B is defined as follows: f (x) =

∞ X

λi bi (x),

(2.2)

i=−∞

where λi ’s are in R or C depending upon the space of the basis functions. Definition 2.1 Inner Product: The inner product of two functions h(x) and g(x) in [a, b] ⊆ R is defined as < h, g >=

Z

b

h(x)g ∗ (x)dx,

(2.3)

a

where g ∗ (x) is the complex conjugate of g(x).

Definition 2.2 Orthogonal Expansion: An expansion of a function f (x) in the form of Eq. (2.2) is orthogonal when the inner products of pairs of basis functions in B have the following properties: < bi , bj > = =

0, for i 6= j, ci , Otherwise (for i = j), where ci > 0.

(2.4)

Theorem 2.1 Given an orthogonal expansion of f (x) with a base B, transform coefficients are computed as follows: λi =

1 < f, bi > . ci

(2.5)

Proof: < f, bi >

Rb

f(x)b∗i (x)dx  ∞ X Rb  = a λj bj (x) b∗i (x)dx

=

a

Rb

j=−∞

(from Def. 2.1) (from Eq. (2.2))

(2.6)

= λi a bi (x)b∗i (x)dx + 0 = λi ci

Corollary 2.1 For an orthogonal base, if ci = 1 for all the i-th basis function, we can simply obtain the transform coefficients as λi =< f, bi > .

(2.7)

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

52

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

Such a family of basis functions is known as orthonormal, and corresponding basis functions are called orthonormal basis functions. Any subset of orthogonal base B also satisfies the property of orthogonality as expressed in Eq. (2.4). However, it may not be sufficient or complete for full reconstruction of the function f (x). The set of orthogonal (orthonormal) functions that is complete for every f (x) is known as complete orthogonal (orthonormal) base. The set of transform coefficients Λ = {λi | − ∞ < i < ∞} provides the alternative description of f (x) and is known as its transform, while the space of these coefficients is termed as the transform space. Eq. (2.5) or (2.7) denotes the forward transform, while the expansion with transform coefficients (Eq. (2.2)) is termed as the inverse transform. In continuous space for i, Eq. (2.2) is expressed as Z ∞ f (x) = λi bi (x)di. (2.8) i=−∞

One of the important facts about the orthonormal expansion of the function is that it preserves the energy of the function as expressed in the following theorem. Theorem 2.2 For an orthonormal expansion of the function as given in Eq. (2.2), the sum of squares of the transform coefficients remains the same as the sum of squares of functional values within its support (or energy of the function) as expressed in the following relation ∞ X

λ2i =

i=−∞

Z

b

f 2 (x)dx.

(2.9)

a

Proof: Rb a

f 2 (x)dx

= = = = =

Rb

f (x)f ∗ (x)dx, ! ∞ X Rb ∗ ∗ f (x) λi bi (x) dx, a a

∞ X

i=−∞ ∞ X i=−∞ ∞ X

Zi=−∞ b λ∗i f (x)b∗i (x)dx, a

(2.10)

λ∗i λi , λ2i .

i=−∞

In the following text we examine a few examples of orthogonal transforms.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

53

Image Transforms

2.1.1

Trivial Expansion with Dirac Delta Functions

Definition 2.3 The dirac delta function δ(x) has a unit infinite impulse at x = 0 and zero elsewhere. It holds the following properties: R∞ δ(x)dx = 1, R−∞ (2.11) ∞ −∞ f (x)δ(x − x0 )dx = f (x0 ).

Hence the function f (x) in the support of R can be written as f (x) =

∞ X

i=−∞

2.1.2

f (i)δ(x − i).

(2.12)

Fourier Series Expansion

A periodic function f (x) with a period of length τ can be expanded using Fourier series expansion [93]. In this case, it is sufficient to define f (x) over a period, say, in [− τ2 , τ2 ]. The orthogonal base in this support consists of the √ m base {ej2π τ x |m ∈ Z}, where j is the complex number −1 and Z is the set of integers. We may check the orthogonality of this base by the following: Z

τ 2

− τ2

e

j2π m τ x

m

ej2π τ x dx = j2π m τ

τ2

− τ2

=

τ, for m = 0, 0, Otherwise.

(2.13)

Hence, the Fourier series of f (x) is given by λm =

1 τ

Z

τ 2

m

f (x)e−j2π τ x dx.

(2.14)

− τ2 m

In this case, λm ’s are complex numbers. In fact as ej2π τ x = cos(2π m τ x) + jsin(2π m x), Fourier series can also be expanded by sine and cosine harmonτ ics, forming another form of the orthogonal base in this case. If f (x) is an even function, only cosine harmonics ({cos(2π m τ x)|m ∈ N}) are sufficient to form the base of its expansion (N being the set of nonnegative integers). On the other hand, for an odd function f (x), it is the set of sine harmonics ({sin(2π m τ x)|m ∈ N, m 6= 0}) that can construct it.

2.1.3

Fourier Transform

As τ tends to ∞ in Eq. (2.14), the transform is applicable for any function with its support being the complete real axis or [−∞, ∞]. Let us rename 2π m τ

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

54

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

as ω, a radian frequency variable. As τ → ∞, τ1 (= δω 2π ) → 0. In that case, the Fourier series is obtained as Z δω ∞ f (x)e−jωx dx. (2.15) λ(ω) = 2π −∞ We may express the corresponding factor in the expansion for a continδω δω ˆ uously varying ω in the interval of [ω0 − δω 2 , ω0 + 2 ] as λ(ω0 ) = f (jω0 ) 2π . This leads to the definition of the Fourier transform of f (x) as given below: Z ∞ F(f (x)) = fˆ(jω) = f (x)e−jωx dx. (2.16) −∞

The inverse Fourier transform of fˆ(jω) (provided it is integrable) is given by Z ∞ 1 f (x) = fˆ(jω)ejωx dω. (2.17) 2π −∞ In our notation, we consistently follow the convention of denoting the Fourier transform of a function g(x) as either F(g(x)) or gˆ(jω). The orthogonality of the base {ejωx |ω ∈ R} over R is expressed in the following form: Z ∞ 2πδ(ω), for ω = 0, jωx e dx = (2.18) 0, otherwise. −∞ 2.1.3.1

Properties of Fourier Transform

The Fourier transform provides the amount of oscillation a function has at the complex frequency jω. The contribution of the complex sinusoid ejωx is ˆ expressed by fˆ(jω) δω 2π . Hence, f (jω) is a density function. As it is a complex number, it may also be represented by its magnitude (|fˆ(jω)|) and phase (θ(ω)) such that fˆ(jω) = |fˆ(jω)|ejθ(ω) , where both |fˆ(jω)| and θ(ω) are real functions over ω in R . As f (x) is a real function, fˆ(−jω) = fˆ∗ (jω). This converts the complex frequency components at ω in the following real form: fˆ(jω)ejωx + fˆ∗ (jω)e−jωx = |fˆ(jω)| ej(ωx+θ(ω)) + e−j(ωx+θ(ω)) , = 2.|fˆ(jω)| (cos(ωx + θ(ω))) . (2.19) ˆ The above property makes the magnitude spectrum (|f (jω)|) an even function of ω, while the phase spectrum (θ(ω)) is an odd function of ω. The domain of ω is known as the frequency domain, which is also referred to in this case as the transform domain, and the domain of x is the original domain of the function, which usually refers to time for time-varying signals, or space for a space-varying function. In our discussion, we correlate the interpretation in the time domain with that in 1-D space. Some of the important properties of the Fourier transform [52, 93, 100] are listed below.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

Image Transforms

55

1. Linearity: The Fourier transform of a linear combination of functions is the same as the same linear combination of their transforms, that is, ˆ F(ag(x) + bh(x)) = aˆ g(jω) + bh(jω).

(2.20)

2. Duality: If the Fourier transform of f (x) is g(jω), the Fourier transform of g ∗ (jx) (i.e., complex conjugate of g(jx)) is 2πf (ω). 3. Reversal in space: Reversal in space (or time) also causes reversal in the frequency domain. This implies that F(g(−x)) = gˆ(−jω). 4. Translation: Proportional shifts in phase occur across frequencies due to the translation in space (or time). F(g(x − X0 )) = e−jωX0 gˆ(jω).

(2.21)

5. Scaling: Contraction in space (or time) by a factor s causes scaling of frequencies by the same factor. x F(g( )) = |s|ˆ g (jsω). s

(2.22)

6. Modulation: The transform gets translated in the frequency space if the function is modulated (or multiplied) by a complex sinusoid. F(ejω0 x g(x)) = gˆ(j(ω − ω0 )).

(2.23)

As cos(ω0 x) = 12 (ejω0 x + e−jω0 x ), the above relation can be expressed with the modulation of cosine function in the following way: F(g(x)cos(ω0 x)) =

1 (ˆ g(j(ω + ω0 )) + gˆ(j(ω − ω0 ))) . 2

(2.24)

7. Convolution–multiplication theorem: The convolution operation models the response of a linear shift-invariant (LSI) system. Given two functions g(x) (an input) and h(x) (the unit impulse response), the convolution between them is defined as Z ∞ g⋆h(x) = g(τ )h(x − τ )dτ. (2.25) −∞

The equivalence of a convolution operation in the frequency domain is simple multiplication of their transform, as shown below: ˆ F(g⋆h(x)) = gˆ(jω)h(jω).

(2.26)

8. Multiplication-convolution Theorem: Similar to the convolution– multiplication theorem, adhering to the duality principle, we may show that equivalent operation for multiplication of two functions in space

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

56

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

Table 2.1: Fourier transforms of a few useful functions Function

Description

δ(x − X0 )

Translated impulse function A single complex sinusoid

ejω0 x ∞ X

n=−∞

δ(x − nX0 )

Periodic impulses

1 sinc( x2 ) 2π

e−x

2

for |x| < 12 Otherwise

2πδ(ω − ω0 ) ∞ X e−jnX0 ω = n=−∞ ∞ X 2π δ(ω X0 k=−∞

(Dirac Comb)

2πk ) X0 (Poisson Formula)

A rectangular box

sinc( ω2 ) =

function Sinc function as defined above

rect(ω)

with a period of x0  1 rect(x) = 0

Fourier transform e−jωX0

Gaussian function

√

πe−

−

sin( ω ) 2 ω 2

ω2 4

(or time) is the convolution in the frequency domain. This relationship is expressed as follows: F(g(x)h(x)) =

1 ˆ gˆ⋆h(jω). 2π

9. Differentiation in space or time domain: n d g(x) F = (jω)n gˆ(jω). dxn 10. Differentiation in frequency domain: dn gˆ(jω) F−1 j n = xn g(x). dω n 11. Parseval’s Theorem: Z ∞ Z ∞ 1 2 |g(x)| dx = |ˆ g(jω)|2 dω. 2π −∞ −∞

(2.27)

(2.28)

(2.29)

(2.30)

Fourier transforms of a few useful functions are listed in Table 2.1. It is interesting to note that the Fourier transform of a Gaussian function remains Gaussian in nature, and transform of a train of periodic impulses (Dirac deltas) of period X0 in the spatial (temporal) domain corresponds to a similar form of periodic impulses in frequency domain with a period of X10 . The latter property is useful in proving the following theorem for the Fourier transform of a sampled function with a sampling period of X0 .

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

Image Transforms

57

Theorem 2.3 Let f (x) be sampled at a uniform sampling period of X0 such that the resulting sampled function fs (x) is given as fs (x) =

∞ X

n=−∞

f (nX0 )δ(x − nX0 ).

Then the Fourier transform of fs (x) is as given below. ∞ X 2πk 1 ˆ F(fs (x)) = X0 , f (jω)δ ω − X0 k=−∞ ∞ X 1 ˆ j(ω − 2πk ) . = f X0 X0

(2.31)

(2.32)

k=−∞

The above theorem shows that, for a lossless recovery of a function from its uniformly sampled sequence (using an ideal low-pass filter), we need to sample it at a sampling frequency of at least twice the highest frequency component present in the function. For a band-limited signal, this should be at least twice its bandwidth. This is the Nyquist rate for sampling a signal or function without any error (known as aliasing error).

2.1.4

Shannon’s Orthonormal Bases for Band-limited Functions

From the foregoing theorem, we find that the complete recovery of a signal f (x) from the sequence of its sampled values at a uniform sampling interval of X0 , say, fs (x) = {f (nX0 )|−∞ < n < ∞}, is possible if the sequence is filtered ˆ X (ω) is rect( X0 ω ) (for by an ideal low-pass filter whose Fourier transform h 0 2π ˆ X (ω) is definition of the function see Table 2.1). As the inverse transform of h 0 ∞ πx X sin( X ) 0 , f (x) = fs (x)⋆hX0 (x) = f (nX0 )hX0 (x − nX0 ). We hX0 (x) = πx X0

n=−∞

should note that the family of functions {hX0 (x − nX0 )| − ∞ < n < ∞} forms the orthonormal base (known as Shannon’s orthonormal base) for the space of band-limited functions whose Fourier transforms are within the support of π [ −π X0 , X0 ].

2.1.5

Wavelet Bases

Wavelets [93] are considered to be functions that should have ideally finite support in both its original domain and also in the transform domain (i.e., the frequency domain). However, in reality, no such function exists that has both these properties. For example, a Dirac delta δ(x) with an infinitesimally small support in space has the frequency response over the entire frequency range (in [−∞, ∞]). On the other hand, a complex sinusoid such as ejω0 x

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

58

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

with an infinite support over R has the Fourier response of δ(ω − ω0 ), which is again having the infinitesimally small support in the frequency domain. That there exists no such function is expressed by Heisenberg’s uncertainty principle restated in the following form. Theorem 2.4 For a function f (x) ∈ L(R2 ), let the average location µx and average momentum µω be defined as follows: R∞ µx = ||f1||2 −∞ x|f (x)|2 dx, R∞ (2.33) 1 2 ˆ µω = 2π||f ||2 −∞ ω|f (ω)| dω.

Similarly, we measure the “uncertainty” in its “average deviations” in space (or time) and frequency by respective standard deviations σx and σω as defined below: R∞ σx2 = ||f1||2 −∞ (x − µx )2 |f (x)|2 dx, R∞ (2.34) 1 2 ˆ 2 σω2 = 2π||f ||2 −∞ (ω − µω ) |f (ω)| dω. By drawing analogy from Heisenberg’s uncertainty principle, we can prove the following [93]: 1 σx2 σω2 ≥ . (2.35) 4

For ensuring good localization characteristics in both the original domain and transform domain, “wavelets” are aimed at keeping both the σx and σω low in the respective domains of functional representation. This provides a powerful tool for factorizing functions and analyzing them thereafter. From a function ψ(x) that has these characteristics, we may generate a basis by considering the family of functions by translating and dilating ψ(x) over the integral space Z. This basis set may be represented as {ψj,n (x) = √12j ψ(2−j x − n)|j, n ∈ Z}. We call ψ(x) the mother wavelet for such a base. There exist mother wavelets that can generate orthonormal bases for representing a function not only in its original form but also with its approximations at various lower resolutions. The set of basis functions that are responsible for expanding the jth level of resolution is formed by translating the dilated wavelets ψj (x)(= √12j ψ(2−j x)) at discrete points of Z. In this set, j

the mother wavelet itself is also scaled by the factor 2 2 in its dilated form. In fact, the factors contributed by these basis functions at the jth resolution provide the variations in the function from its next higher-level resolution, that is, of (j − 1)th level of approximation of the function. For a better understanding of this decomposition of functions, we discuss the multiresolution approximations [92] of functions. 2.1.5.1

Multiresolution Approximations

In wavelet analysis of a function, the function is represented by its approximation and variation at a certain level of resolution. Here the term resolution

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

Image Transforms

59

refers to the scale of observation of functional values over a finite support. The higher the resolution, the lower is the scale. In the family of wavelet functions, at the jth level the scale of the function is considered as 2j , and hence the resolution may be treated as 2−j . The original representation of the function may be considered at level 0. To obtain an approximation of a function (say, f (x)) at level j, we may subject it to a low-pass filter that computes an average at any point around its neighborhood of size proportional to 2j . Let this approximation be denoted as fj (x). The variations are captured by the difference between two such approximations at successive levels, say, dj (x) = fj−1 (x) − fj (x). An orthonormal wavelet expansion holds the following property. dj (x) =

∞ X

< f, ψj,n > ψj,n (x).

(2.36)

n=−∞

Like variations or details, approximations may also be represented by an orthonormal expansion of wavelet basis from a mother wavelet, say, φ(x), by dilating and translating it in the same way. Sometimes φ(x) is also referred to as the scaling function, and the approximation at the jth level may be obtained as follows: fj (x) =

∞ X

< f, φj,n > φj,n (x).

(2.37)

n=−∞

A few examples of such scaling functions are provided in the following text. 1. Haar’s wavelets: This considers the wavelets as the piecewise constant functions over [2j n, 2j (n + 1)]. In this case, the scaling function has a finite support; however its frequency response has infinite support, though it decays fast with increasing frequencies. 1, 0 ≤ x ≤ 1, φ(x) = (2.38) 0, otherwise. 2. Shannon’s base: Shannon’s base has a support similar to Haar’s in the frequency domain, which is a piecewise constant in the frequency range of [2(j+1) πn, 2(j+1) π(n + 1)]. φ(x) =

sin(πx) πx

(2.39)

Corresponding to the Haar’s scaling function, the mother wavelet for computing the details is   1, 0 ≤ x < 12 , ψ(x) = −1, 21 ≤ x ≤ 1, (2.40)  0, otherwise.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

60

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

2.1.5.2

Wavelet Bases for Multiresolution Approximations

These two families of basis functions, {φj (x−n)|n ∈ Z} and {ψj (x−n)|n ∈ Z} form the complete orthonormal base for the function at the (j − 1)th level of resolution. This signifies that the orthonormal base for a function f (x) at its original resolution (j = 0) is formed by the basis set { √12 φ( x2 − n), √12 ψ( x2 − n)|n ∈ Z} given the two parent wavelets as φ(x) and ψ(x). It should be noted that there exists a unique ψ(x) given a φ(x) and vice versa. Their relationships are elaborated further during our discussion on discrete wavelet transform (DWT) (see Section 2.2.6).

2.2

Transforms of Discrete Functions

A discrete function is a sequence of functional values at discrete points regularly spaced in its domain. For example, the discrete representation of a function f (x) ∈ L2 (R) could be in the form of f (n) = {f (nX0 )|n ∈ Z}, where X0 is the sampling interval and f (n) ∈ L2 (Z). In any discrete representation, there is an implicit assumption of a uniform sampling interval or a sampling frequency. The sampling theorem provides the relationship between the discrete function and its continuous representation in the frequency domain. A discrete function f (n) can also be considered as a vector in an infinite dimensional vector space. Discretization of a function may also be carried out over a finite interval with a finite number of samples in a sequence. For example, {f (n), n = 0, 1, 2, ... , (N − 1)}, represents a finite length sequence of N samples. In this case, the sequence becomes a vector in an N -dimensional space. → − Let us represent this vector as f ∈ RN . In our notation, sometimes we may also represent it as a column vector f = [f (0)f (1) ... f (N − 1)]T . fT denotes the transpose of the matrix f. Any vector in the N -dimensional space could be represented by a lin→ − ear combination of a set of N independent vectors [45], say B = { bi |i = 0, 1, ... , N − 1}. Moreover, B becomes an orthogonal set if the following property (as similar to the case of basis functions) holds true. → − → − b∗i . bj = 0, for i 6= j, (2.41) = ci Otherwise (for i = j), where ci > 0. In the above equation, the operator ‘. ’ denotes the dot product of two vectors. →− − → An orthogonal basis set B is a complete orthonormal set if ||bi || = b∗i . bi = 1 for every bi . → − In the expanded form, f is represented as N −1 X − → → − f = λi bi , i=0

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

(2.42)

Image Transforms

61

→ − where λi ’s are the magnitudes of the components along the direction bi and computed as → →− − λi = f . b∗i . (2.43) Accordingly, the transform of f is defined by the vector l = [λ0 λ1 ... λN−1 ]T and can be expressed in the matrix form in the following way: l = Bf , where,



    B=   

(2.44) 

T

b0 ∗ T b1 ∗ . . . bN−1 ∗

T

    .   

(2.45)

In the above equation, B is the transform matrix, and bi is the column → − vector corresponding to bi . If B is invertible, f could be recovered from l as f = B−1 l.

(2.46)

For an orthonormal transform matrix, B, B−1 = BH = (B∗ )T , where BH denotes the Hermitian transpose of B.

2.2.1

Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT)

In discrete Fourier transform (DFT) [45, 100] of an N -dimensional vector, basis vectors are given by 1 k bk (n) = √ ej2π N n , for 0 ≤ n ≤ N − 1, and 0 ≤ k ≤ N − 1. N

(2.47)

DFT of f (n), 0 ≤ n ≤ N − 1 is defined by the following expression: F(f (n)) = fˆ(k) =

N −1 X n=0

k

f (n)e−j2π N n for 0 ≤ k ≤ N − 1.

(2.48)

Following our earlier convention (see Section 2.1.3), we denote the √ DFT of f (n) as either F(f (n)) or fˆ(k). The basis vectors in Eq. (2.48) are N times those of orthonormal basis vectors (in Eq. (2.47)). Hence the inverse DFT (IDFT) is obtained from fˆ(k)’s by the following computation. f (n) =

N −1 1 X ˆ k f (k)ej2π N n for 0 ≤ n ≤ N − 1. N k=0

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

(2.49)

62

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

(a)

(b)

Figure 2.1: An example of periodic extension: (a) a finite length sequence and (b) its periodic extension.

2.2.1.1

The Transform Matrix

Let the sequence x(n), 0 ≤ n ≤ N − 1 be represented by the column vector x. The DFT of x can be expressed also by the following matrix operation: X = Fx,

(2.50)

where the N × N transform matrix F is given by h i k F = e−j2π N n

0≤(k,n)≤N −1

.

(2.51)

From the expression of the inverse DFT, we may easily prove that F−1 =

1 H F , N

(2.52)

where FH is the Hermitian transpose of F. 2.2.1.2

Discrete Fourier Transform as Fourier Series of a Periodic Function

We may consider the DFT of f (n), 0 ≤ n ≤ N − 1 as the Fourier series of the periodic discrete function with a period of N X0 where the sampling interval is X0 . A typical example of a sequence of length 4 is shown in Figure 2.1(b). The definition of one period fp (x) is given as fp (x) =

f (x), x = 0, X0 , 2X0 , ..., (N − 1)X0 , 0, otherwise.

(2.53)

With the foregoing definition, f (n) becomes a periodic sequence of period N such that f (n + N ) = f (n). In that case, the fundamental radian frequency becomes ω0 = 2π N 1X0 , and the Fourier series consists of components of its

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

63

Image Transforms

harmonics, say λ( NkX0 )

=

k N X0

1 N X0

for k = 0, 1, 2, .. . They are computed as follows:

N −1 X

f (nX0 )e

−j2π N kX nX0 0

∆x,

n=0 N −1 X k 1 f (nX0 )e−j2π N n N n=0

=

(2.54) (Here, ∆x = X0 ).

The transform coefficient fˆ(k), DFT of f (n) is N times the frequency compok nent corresponding to the frequency NkX0 . Hence, N denotes the normalized frequency (considering X0 = 1), so that the normalized radian frequency at k = N is 2π. With this observation, the following two useful properties of Fourier series can be extended to DFT. 1. fˆ(N + k) = fˆ(k). (according to Eq. (2.32)). 2. For real f (n), fˆ(k) = fˆ∗ ( N2 + k) ( in this case, fˆ(−k) = fˆ∗ (k) and fˆ(−k) = fˆ(N − k).) The above two properties could also be proved from the definition of DFT by exploiting the properties of complex exponentials. 2.2.1.3

Circular Convolution

Definition 2.4 The linear convolution between two discrete sequences f (n) and h(n) is defined as the discretized version of Eq. (2.25) in the following way: ∞ X f ⋆h(n) = f (m)h(n − m). (2.55) m=−∞

Definition 2.5 For two periodic sequences of same period N , circular convolution is defined by considering N functional values within a period only and extending the periodic definition of the function to the samples outside the base interval. f ⊛ h(n)

= =

N −1 X

m=0 n X

m=0

f (m)h(n − m), f (m)h(n − m) +

N −1 X

m=n+1

(2.56) f (m)h(n − m + N ).

It can be proved that the convolution–multiplication property of the Fourier transform holds for the circular convolution operation for DFT, as stated in the following theorem.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

64

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

Table 2.2: Properties of discrete Fourier transforms of sequences of length N Name Linearity Circular time shifting Circular frequency shifting Duality Convolution–multiplication property Multiplication–convolution property

Given input conditions ax(n) + by(n), a and b are arbitrary scalar constants x(< n − n0 >N ) k0

Resulting DFT aˆ x(k) + bˆ y (k) k

e−j2π N n0 x ˆ(k)

ej2π N n x(n) x ˆ(n) x ⊛ h(n)

x ˆ(< k − k0 >N ) N x(< −k >N ) ˆ x ˆ(k)h(k)

x(n)y(n)

1 N

ˆ x ˆ ⊛ h(k)

Theorem 2.5 Given two finite length sequences f (n) and h(n) and their DFTs as fˆ(k) and gˆ(k), respectively, the DFT of their circular convolution is the same as the product of their DFTs, that is, ˆ F(f ⊛ h(n)) = fˆ(k)h(k).

(2.57)

2.2.1.4

Energy Preservation

√ Considering the orthonormal basis vectors that are N times the basis vectors (see Eq. (2.47)) in the expression of DFT, we can prove the following two properties of the conservation of energy of the function due to Perseval and Plancherel [45]. →− → 1− → − → x .− y = xˆ . yˆ , (2.58) N →− → 1 1− xˆ . x ˆ = ||ˆ x||2 . (2.59) N N Please note that following similar convention of denoting the DFT of a se→ − → quence in this text, the DFT of a vector − x is expressed in the above as x ˆ. → → ||x||2 = − x .− x =

2.2.1.5

Other Properties

Other properties remain the same as those of the Fourier transform by considering the translation in the functional domain or frequency domain as the circular shift of the sequences. A circular shift of M samples in the sequence f (n) makes it a sequence as f ((n − M ) mod N ). Let the operation x mod N be denoted as < x >N . In Table 2.2, the different properties of DFT of sequences of length N [100] are listed.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

65

Image Transforms

Table α β 0 0 0 12 1 2 1 2

2.2.2

2.3: Different types of DFTs of a sequence f (n) Transform name Notation Discrete Fourier Transform (DF T ) fˆ(k) Odd Time Discrete fˆ0, 12 (k) Fourier Transform (OT DF T ) 0 Odd Frequency Discrete fˆ12 ,0 (k) Fourier Transform (OF DF T ) 1 Odd Frequency Odd Time fˆ12 , 12 (k) 2 Discrete Fourier Transform (O2 DF T )

Generalized Discrete Fourier Transform (GDFT)

The basis vectors used for discrete Fourier transform may be considered as a special case of a generalized form where the sampled points of exponential harmonics may have a constant shift of β in its domain, as well as the harmonic frequencies also being shifted by a constant α. Such a general form of the orthonormal set of basis vectors is given below: (α,β)

bk

k+α 1 (n) = √ ej2π N (n+β) , for 0 ≤ n ≤ N −1, and 0 ≤ k ≤ N −1. (2.60) N

As before, the GDFT [95] is defined as follows: Fα,β (f (n)) = fˆα,β (k) =

N −1 X

f (n)e−j2π

n=0

k+α N (n+β)

, for 0 ≤ k ≤ N − 1. (2.61)

Similar to DFT in our notation we denote the GDFT of f (n) as either ˆ F √α,β (f (n)) or fα,β (k). In the above expression also, the basis vectors are N times those of orthonormal basis vectors (in Eq. (2.60)). Accordingly, the inverse GDFT (IGDFT) is obtained from fˆα,β (k)’s by the following computation. f (n) =

N −1 k+α 1 X ˆ fα,β (k)ej2π N (n+β) , for 0 ≤ n ≤ N − 1. N

(2.62)

k=0

DFT is a special case of GDFT where α = β = 0. Other relevant examples (including DFT) are listed in Table 2.3 [95]. Two useful properties [95] are stated below in the form of theorems reflecting relationships among DFT, OFDFT, and OTDFT. For definitions of OFDFT and OTDFT, see Table 2.3. Theorem 2.6 Let x ˆ 12 ,0 (k), 0 ≤ k ≤ N − 1 be the OFDFT of a sequence x(n) of length N . If x(n) is padded with N zeroes to make it a sequence x′ (n) of length 2N , an odd coefficient x ˆ′0,0 (2k + 1) of its 2N length DFT is the same as the k-th coefficient x ˆ 21 ,0 (k) of the N -length ODFT of x(n) , that is, x ˆ′0,0 (2k + 1) = x ˆ 12 ,0 (k), for 0 ≤ k ≤ N − 1.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

(2.63)

66

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

Theorem 2.7 Let x ˆ0, 12 (k), 0 ≤ k ≤ N − 1 be the OTDFT of a sequence x(n) of length N . If xˆ0, 12 (k) is padded with N zeroes to make it a sequence x ˆ′0, 1 (k), 0 ≤ k ≤ 2N −1 of length 2N in the transform space, every odd sample 2 corresponding to its 2N length inverse (IOTDFT) x′ (2n + 1) is half the n-th sample x(n) of the given sequence , that is, x′ (2n + 1) =

x(n) , for 0 ≤ n ≤ N − 1. 2

(2.64)

2.2.2.1

Transform Matrices

The transform matrix Fα,β for the GDFT is given in the following form: h i k+α Fα,β = e−j2π N (n+β) . (2.65) 0≤(k,n)≤N −1

The following relationships hold among their inverses: F−1 0,0 F−1 1 ,0

= =

2

F−1 0, 1

=

2

F−1 1 1 ,

=

2 2

2.2.2.2

1 H N F0,0 1 H N F 12 ,0 1 H N F0, 12 1 H N F 12 , 12

= = = =

1 ∗ N F0,0 , 1 ∗ N F0, 12 , 1 ∗ N F 12 ,0 , and 1 ∗ N F 12 , 21 .

(2.66)

Convolution–Multiplication Properties

Let us consider how convolution–multiplication properties [95] are further generalized in the case of GDFTs. Previously, we have discussed that multiplication in the DFT domain is equivalent to circular convolution in the original domain of the function. Though the same property remains valid for some of the GDFTs (e.g., DFT itself is a special type of GDFT), this is not true for other GDFTs. For those GDFTs, this convolution operation may need to be defined differently, and with this modified definition, the multiplication operation in the transform domain becomes equivalent to it. This type of convolution is known as skew circular convolution, which is defined through the antiperiodic extension of functions. Definition 2.6 A function f (x) is said to be antiperiodic with a period N if f (x + N ) = −f (x). We consider a general periodic function with a period N to be either periodic or antiperiodic. Hence, the strict period of a general periodic function depends on whether it is periodic or antiperiodic. For the former type, it remains the same as its period; however, for the latter, it is twice of its period.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

67

Image Transforms

Definition 2.7 The skew circular convolution for two sequences of the same length N is defined as linear convolution of their antiperiodic extensions of a period N , and the resulting sequence is formed by N functional values within its period only. f sh(n) = =

N −1 X m=0 n X

m=0

f (m)h(n − m), f (m)h(n − m) −

N −1 X

m=n+1

(2.67) f (m)h(n − m + N ).

With the definitions of circular and skewcircular convolutions, the convolution multiplication properties of different GDFTs are stated by the following theorem [95]. Theorem 2.8 Given two finite length sequences f (n) and h(n) and their GDFTs as fˆα,β (k) and gˆα,β (k), respectively, the following convolution– multiplication properties are observed, F0,0 (f ⊛ h(n)) F0, 12 (f ⊛ h(n)) F0,0 (f ⊛ h(n − 1)) F 21 ,0 (f sh(n)) F 21 , 12 (f sh(n)) F 21 ,0 (f sh(n − 1))

= = = = = =

ˆ 0,0 (k), fˆ0,0 (k)h ˆ 0,0 (k), fˆ0, 12 (k)h ˆ ˆ 1 (k), f0, 12 (k)h 0, 2 ˆ 1 (k), fˆ21 ,0 (k)h 2 ,0 ˆ 1 (k), and, fˆ21 , 21 (k)h 2 ,0 ˆ 1 1 (k). fˆ1 1 (k)h 2,2

(2.68)

2,2

2.2.3

Discrete Trigonometric Transforms

In Section 2.1.2, it was pointed out that for an even periodic function, orthogonal expansion is possible with only cosine harmonics, and for an odd periodic function, its Fourier series expansion requires only sine harmonics as basis functions. These properties are suitably exploited for a finite discrete sequence to have orthogonal transforms with only discrete cosine or discrete sine basis vectors. These transforms are defined under the same framework of GDFT, by symmetrically (or antisymmetrically) extending the sequence at both its ends so that the extended sequence becomes either even or odd sequence about a point of symmetry. Hence, the GDFT over the extended sequence becomes equivalent to Fourier series of an even or odd periodic function. Thus, all these expansions can be expressed by a linear combination of either discrete cosine [3] or discrete sine basis vectors. These transforms in general are referred to as discrete trigonometric transforms. To understand the different types of trigonometric transforms, let us first look at the various types of symmetric extensions of a finite length sequence.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

68

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

2.2.3.1

Symmetric Extensions of Finite Sequences

Consider a finite length sequence x(n), 0 ≤ n ≤ N − 1 of length N . The sequence may be symmetrically extended at its end point (say around the last sample point x(N −1)) in two different ways. The extended sample is symmetric about the sample point itself. We refer to this type of symmetric extension as the whole-sample symmetric (WS) extension. Alternatively, the symmetric extension may be made centering about the midpoint between the (N − 1)th and N th sample. This type of extension is referred to as half-sample symmetric (HS) extension. Similarly, there are two types of antisymmetric extensions about a sample point of a sequence. They are referred to as whole-sample antisymmetric (WA) extension and half-sample antisymmetric extension, respectively. In Figure 2.2, all these extensions about the right end sample point of a finite length sequence of length 4 are illustrated. Note that for a WA extension, a zero has to be introduced at the N th sample point. These extensions are mathematically defined below: 1. For the WS extension at the end sample point, x(n) 0≤n≤N −1 x˜(n) = x(2N − n − 2) N ≤ n ≤ 2N − 2 2. For the HS extension at the end sample point, x(n) 0≤n≤N −1 x˜(n) = x(2N − n − 1) N ≤ n ≤ 2N − 1 3. For the WA extension at the end sample point,  x(n) 0≤n≤N −1  0 n=N x ˜(n) =  −x(2N − n) N + 1 ≤ n ≤ 2N

4. For the HA extension at the end sample point, x(n) 0≤n≤N −1 x˜(n) = −x(2N − n − 1) N + 1 ≤ n ≤ 2N − 1 2.2.3.2

(2.69)

(2.70)

(2.71)

(2.72)

Symmetric Periodic Extension

Depending upon the nature of periodic symmetric extension at the two ends (at sample positions 0 and N − 1) of a finite length sequence of length N , it becomes either a periodic or an antiperiodic sequence. The resulting period of the extended sequence depends upon types of extensions made at its two ends. Moreover, a strict period of a sequence becomes either even or odd. If the symmetric extension at the left end (the 0th sample position) is either

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

69

Image Transforms

Original Finite Sequence

(a) Whole Sample Symmetry (WS)

(b) Whole Sample Anti−symmetry (WA)

(d)

Half Sample Symmetry (HS)

(c) Half Sample Anti−symmetry (HA)

(e)

Figure 2.2: Different types of symmetric and antisymmetric extensions at the end of a sequence: (a) Original, (b) WS, (c) HS, (d) WA, and (e) HA.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

70

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

Table 2.4: Summary of observations of symmetric periodic extension of a sequence of length N Symmetric extensions WSWS WSHS HSHS HSWS WSWA WSHA HSHA HSWA WAWS WAHS HAHS HAWS WAWA WAHA HAHA HAWA

Periodic (P) / antiperiodic (A) P P P P A A A A A A A A P P P P

Length of period 2N − 2 2N − 1 2N 2N − 1 2N 2N − 1 2N 2N − 1 2N 2N + 1 2N 2N − 1 2N + 2 2N + 1 2N 2N + 1

Even (E) or Odd (O) E E E E E E E E O O O O O O O O

WS or HS, the strict period becomes even; otherwise it is odd. Therefore their expansions with either a set of cosine or sine basis vectors are possible. In Figures 2.3 and 2.4, examples of such strict periods of symmetric periodic extension of a finite length sequence of length 4 are shown. The corresponding extensions are encoded by the successive short form of the extensions (WS, HS, WA, or HA) with the first two letters for the left end and the last two letters for the right end of the sequence, respectively. Samples of the original sequence are marked by a double arrow under the horizontal axis. We may observe that the resulting sequences of length N in general periodic sense become either periodic or antiperiodic. A summary of observations is provided in Table 2.4. Each type of symmetric extension in the above table is associated with an appropriate GDFT, which eventually provides us a type of discrete cosine transform or discrete sine transform. The length of the original sequence is chosen in such a manner (N − 1, N or N + 1) that the length of the general period becomes either 2N or 2N −1. Considering the parity of the length of this period, they are termed as even or odd trigonometric transform. In Tables 2.5 and 2.6 [95] different types of DCTs and DSTs and the corresponding GDFTs deriving them are provided. Corresponding functional forms of symmetric extensions are also shown in those tables. Expressions of these transforms are given in the following subsection.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

71

Image Transforms

WSWS

(WSWS) HSWS

(HSWS) WSWA

(WSWA) HSWA

(HSWA)

WSHS

(WSHS) HSHS

(HSHS) WSHA

(WSHA) HSHA

(HSHA)

Figure 2.3: Symmetrically extended even periodic sequences from a finite length sequence of length 4.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

72

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

WAWS

(WAWS) HAWS

(HAWS) WAWA

(WAWA) HAWA

(HAWA)

WAHS

(WAHS) HAHS

(HAHS) WAHA

(WAHA) HAHA

(HAHA)

Figure 2.4: Symmetrically extended odd periodic sequences from a finite length sequence of length 4.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

73

Image Transforms

Table 2.5: Different types of discrete cosine transforms (DCT) Length of input N +1

Symmetric extensions: x ˜(n) = E(x(n)) WSWS: x ˜(n) =



x(n), x(2N − n),

n = 0, 1, 2, . . . , N , n = N + 1, . . . , 2N − 1.

Length of period

GDFT

DCT type

2N

F0,0

C1e

F0,0

C1o

N

WSHS: x ˜ (n) =



x(n), x(2N − 1 − n),

n = 0, 1, 2, . . . , N − 1, n = N, . . . , 2N − 2.

2N − 1

N

HSHS: x ˜(n) =



x(n), x(2N − 1 − n),

n = 0, 1, 2, . . . , N − 1, n = N, . . . , 2N − 1.

2N

F

0, 1 2

C2e

N

HSWS: x ˜ (n) =



x(n), x(2N − 2 − n),

n = 0, 1, 2, . . . , N − 1, n = N, . . . , 2N − 2.

2N − 1

F

0, 1 2

C2o

N

WSWA: x ˜(n) =

2N

F1 ,0 2

C3e

(

x(n), 0, −x(2N − n),

n = 0, 1, 2, . . . , N − 1, n = N, n = N + 1, . . . , 2N − 1.

N

WSHA: x ˜(n) =



x(n), −x(2N − 1 − n),

n = 0, 1, 2, . . . , N − 1, n = N, . . . , 2N − 2.

2N − 1

F1 ,0 2

C3o

N

HSHA: x ˜ (n) =



x(n), −x(2N − 1 − n),

n = 0, 1, 2, . . . , N − 1, n = N, . . . , 2N − 1.

2N

F1 1 , 2 2

C4e

N

HSWA: x ˜(n) =

(

x(n), 0, −x(2N − 2 − n),

n = 0, 1, 2, . . . , N − 2, n = N − 1, n = N, . . . , 2N − 2.

2N − 1

F1 1 , 2 2

C4o

Table 2.6: Different types of discrete sine transforms (DST) Length of input N −1

N −1 N

N −1

N

N −1 N

N

Symmetric extensions: x ˜(n) = E(x(n)) WAWA: x ˜(n) =

WAHA: x ˜(n) =

(

HAHA: x ˜ (n) =



HAWA: x ˜(n) =

(

8 > < > :

n = 0, n = 1, 2, . . . , N − 1, n = N, n = N + 1, . . . , 2N − 1.

Length of period

GDFT

DST type

2N

jF0,0

S1e

jF0,0

S1o

0, x(n), −x(2N − 1 − n),

n = 0, n = 0, 1, 2, . . . , N − 1, n = N, . . . , 2N − 2.

2N − 1

x(n), −x(2N − 1 − n),

n = 0, 1, 2, . . . , N − 1, n = N, . . . , 2N − 1.

2N

jF

0, 1 2

S2e

x(n), 0, −x(2N − 2 − n),

n = 0, 1, 2, . . . , N − 2, n = N − 1, n = N, . . . , 2N − 2.

2N − 1

jF

0, 1 2

S2o

2N

jF 1 ,0 2

S3e

n = 0, n = 1, 2, . . . , N − 1, n = N, . . . , 2N − 2.

2N − 1

jF 1 ,0 2

S3o

WAWS: x ˜(n) =

WAHS: x ˜(n) =

0, x(n), 0, −x(2N − n),

(

(

0, x(n), −x(2N − n),

0, x(n), x(2N − 1 − n),

n = 0, n = 1, 2, . . . , N , n = N, . . . , 2N − 1.

HAHS: x ˜(n) =



x(n), x(2N − 1 − n),

n = 0, 1, 2, . . . , N − 1, n = N, . . . , 2N − 1.

2N

jF 1 1 , 2 2

S4e

HAWS: x ˜ (n) =



x(n), x(2N − 1 − n),

n = 0, 1, 2, . . . , N − 1, n = N, . . . , 2N − 2.

2N − 1

jF 1 1 , 2 2

S4o

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

74

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

2.2.3.3

Different Types of Discrete Trigonometric Transforms

Let x(n), n = 0, 1, 2, ... , be a sequence of input data. Then different types of N −point DCTs and DSTs are defined as follows: Type-I Even DCT: C1e (x(n)) = XIe (k) =

r

N X 2 2 2πnk α (k) x(n) cos , 0 ≤ k ≤ N, (2.73) N 2N n=0

Type-I Odd DCT: C1o (x(n)) = XIo (k) =

r

N −1 X 2 2 2πnk α (k) x(n) cos , 0 ≤ k ≤ N − 1, N 2N − 1 n=0 (2.74)

Type-II Even DCT: C2e (x(n)) = XIIe (k) =

q

2 N α(k)

N −1 X

x(n) cos

n=0

2πk(n + 12 ) , 2N 0 ≤ k ≤ N − 1,

(2.75)

Type-II Odd DCT: C2o (x(n)) = XIIo (k) =

q

2 N α(k)β(k)

N −1 X

x(n) cos

n=0

2πk(n + 21 ) , 2N − 1 0 ≤ k ≤ N − 1, (2.76)

Type-III Even DCT: C3e (x(n)) = XIIIe (k) =

q

2 N α(k)

2π(k + 12 )n x(n) cos , 2N n=0 0 ≤ k ≤ N − 1,

N −1 X

(2.77)

Type-III Odd DCT: C3o (x(n)) = XIIIo (k) =

q

2 N α(k)β(k)

N −1 X n=0

x(n) cos

2π(k + 21 )n , 2N − 1 0 ≤ k ≤ N − 1, (2.78)

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

75

Image Transforms

Type-IV Even DCT: C4e (x(n)) = XIV e (k) =

q

2 N

q

2 N

N −1 X

x(n) cos

n=0

2π(k + 12 )(n + 21 ) , 2N 0 ≤ k ≤ N − 1,

(2.79)

2π(k + 12 )(n + 12 ) , 2N − 1 0 ≤ k ≤ N − 2,

(2.80)

Type-IV Odd DCT: C4o (x(n)) = XIV o (k) =

N −2 X

x(n) cos

n=0

Type-I Even DST: S1e (x(n)) = XsIe (k) =

r

N −1 2 X 2πkn x(n) sin , 1 ≤ k ≤ N − 1, (2.81) N n=1 2N

Type-I Odd DST: S1o (x(n)) = XsIo (k) =

r

N −1 2 X 2πkn x(n) sin , 1 ≤ k ≤ N − 1, N n=1 2N − 1 (2.82)

Type-II Even DST: S2e (x(n)) = XsIIe (k) =

q

2 N α(k)

2πk(n + 21 ) x(n) sin , 2N n=0 1 ≤ k ≤ N − 1,

N −1 X

(2.83)

Type-II Odd DST: S2o (x(n)) = XsIIo (k) =

r

N −1 2πk(n + 21 ) 2 X x(n) sin , 1 ≤ k ≤ N − 1, N n=0 2N − 1 (2.84)

Type-III Even DST: S3e (x(n)) = XsIIIe (k) =

q

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

2 N α(k)

2π(k + 12 )(n x(n) sin , 2N n=1 0 ≤ k ≤ N − 1, N X

(2.85)

76

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

Type-III Odd DST: S3o (x(n)) = XsIIIo (k) =

r

N 2π(k + 21 )n 2 X x(n) sin , 0 ≤ k ≤ N − 2, N n=1 2N − 1 (2.86)

Type-IV Even DST: S4e (x(n)) = XsIV e (k) =

q

2 N

q

2 2 N β (k)

N −1 X

x(n) sin

n=0

2π(k + 12 )(n + 21 ) , 2N 0 ≤ k ≤ N − 1,

(2.87)

Type-IV Odd DST: S4o (x(n)) = XsIV o (k) =

N −1 X n=0

x(n) sin

2π(k + 21 )(n + 12 ) , 2N − 1 0 ≤ k ≤ N − 1, (2.88)

where α(p) and β(p) in the foregoing ( q 1 2, α(p) = 1, ( q 1 2, β(p) = 1,

equations are given by for p = 0 or N , otherwise.

(2.89)

for p = N − 1, otherwise.

(2.90)

All these transforms are linear, distributive, and invertible. The inverse relationships between the transform domain and the original signal domain are stated below [95]: x(n) x(n) x(n) x(n) x(n) x(n) x(n) x(n) x(n) x(n) x(n) x(n) x(n) x(n) x(n) x(n)

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

C1e {C1e {x(n)}}, C3e {C2e {x(n)}}, C2e {C3e {x(n)}}, C4e {C4e {x(n)}}. C1o {C1o {x(n)}}, C3o {C2o {x(n)}}, C2o {C3o {x(n)}}, C4o {C4o {x(n)}}. S1e {S1e {x(n)}}, S3e {S2e {x(n)}}, S2e {S3e {x(n)}}, S4e {S4e {x(n)}}. S1o {S1o {x(n)}}, S3o {S2o {x(n)}}, S2o {S3o {x(n)}}, S4o {S4o {x(n)}}.

(2.91)

Image Transforms

77

In a DCT-based compression algorithm, type-II even DCT is used for transforming discrete functions. In our subsequent discussion, we concentrate on even DCTs and DSTs only, and all four types of even DCTs and DSTs are simply referred to as type-I, type-II, type-III, and type-IV DCTs and DSTs, respectively. Moreover, the unqualified term DCT is to be implied as the type-II even DCT. 2.2.3.4

Convolution Multiplication Properties

The operation for which the convolution multiplication properties hold for trigonometric transforms is discrete convolution with symmetrically extended sequences. Depending upon the nature of the periodicity of these general periodic sequences, this operation becomes either a circular convolution or a skew-circular convolution. When both the extended sequences become periodic, symmetric convolution turns out to be the circular one. On the other hand, both being antiperiodic it becomes the same as the skew-circular convolution. Convolution between antiperiodic and periodic functions is not defined within its general period. This type of convolution is known as symmetric convolution, which is formally defined below [95]. Definition 2.8 Symmetric Convolution between two sequences x(n) and y(n) is defined as the convolution between their symmetrically extended sequences of the same general period. When both the extended sequences are periodic, the convolution operation is defined as the circular convolution. If both are antiperiodic, the operation is defined as the skew-circular convolution. Symmetric convolution for a periodic (in its strict sense) and antiperiodic sequence of the same general period is not defined. Let the symmetric extensions of x(n) and y(n) of the same general period be denoted as Ea (x(n)) and Eb (y(n)), respectively. Let us also denote the symmetric convolution operator by ‘z’. So the symmetric convolution between x(n) and y(n) is expressed as Ea (x(n)) ⊛ Eb (y(n)) if Ea (.) and Eb (.) are periodic. xzy(n) = Ea (x(n)) s Eb (y(n)) if Ea (.) and Eb (.) are antiperiodic. (2.92) With this defintion, the convolution multiplication properties of these transforms can be expressed in a general form as given below [95]. Tc (xzy(n − n0 )) =

√

2N Ta (x(n)) Tb (y(n))

(2.93)

where Ta (.) and Tb (.) are discrete trigonometric transforms (DTT) associated with corresponding extensions Ea (.) and Eb (.) for sequences x(n) and y(n), respectively, and accordingly the symmetric convolution operation is performed on them. Tc (.) is another DTT, and n0 is a constant integer whose value is either 0 or 1. Following the convolution multiplication properties of GDFT

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

78

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

(see Eq. (2.68)), a few specific cases involving even DCTs are illustrated in the following theorem.

Theorem 2.9 Let u(n) = x(n) ⊛ y(n), and w(n) = x(n)sy(n). The numbers of samples in x(n) and y(n) are such that their symmetric extensions produce a general period of 2N . The convolution multiplication properties involving the even DCTs are listed below [95]. C1e (u(n)) C2e (u(n))

= =

√ √2N C1e (x(l)) C1e (y(m)) , 2N C2e (x(l)) C1e (y(m)) ,

C1e (u(n − 1))

=

√ 2N C2e (x(l)) C2e (y(m)) ,

C3e (w(n)) = C4e (w(n)) = C3e (w(n − 1)) =

√ √2N C3e (x(l)) C3e (y(m)) , √2N C4e (x(l)) C3e (y(m)) , 2N C4e (x(l)) C4e (y(m)) ,

0 ≤ n, l, m ≤ N , 0 ≤ n, l ≤ N − 1, 0 ≤ m ≤ N, 0 ≤ l, m ≤ N − 1, −1 ≤ n ≤ N − 1, 0 ≤ n, l, m ≤ N − 1, 0 ≤ n, m, l ≤ N − 1, and, 0 ≤ l, m ≤ N − 1 , −1 ≤ n ≤ N − 2. (2.94)

The convolution-multiplication properties are also applicable for other different combination of trigonometric transforms. For a comprehensive list, we may refer to the paper by Martucci [95]. However, another set of relationships is provided below involving both even DCTs and DSTs at the same time. −C2e (u(n))

=

√ 2N S1e (x(l)) S2e (y(m)) ,

S1e (u(n))

=

√ 2N C1e (x(l)) S1e (y(m)) ,

S2e (u(n))

=

√ 2N C2e (x(l)) S1e (y(m)) ,

S2e (u(n))

=

√ 2N S2e (x(l)) C1e (y(m)) ,

S1e (u(n − 1))

=

√ 2N C2e (x(l)) S2e (y(m)) ,

S3e (w(n))

=

√ 2N C3e (x(l)) S3e (y(m)) ,

S4e (w(n))

=

√ 2N C4e (x(l)) S3e (y(m)) ,

√ S4e (w(n)) = √2N S4e (x(l)) C3e (y(m)) , S3e (w(n − 1)) = 2N C4e (x(l)) S4e (y(m)) ,

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

1 ≤ l ≤ N − 1, 0 ≤ n, m ≤ N − 1, 1 ≤ n, m ≤ N − 1, 0 ≤ l ≤ N, 1 ≤ l, n ≤ N − 1 , 1 ≤ m ≤ N − 1, 1 ≤ l, n ≤ N − 1 , 0 ≤ m ≤ N, 0 ≤ l, m ≤ N − 1 , 0 ≤ n ≤ N − 2, 0 ≤ l ≤ N − 1, 1 ≤ m, n ≤ N , 0 ≤ l, n ≤ N − 1, 1 ≤ m ≤ N, 0 ≤ l, m, n ≤ N − 1 , and, 0 ≤ l, m, n ≤ N − 1 . (2.95)

79

Image Transforms

2.2.4

Type-II Even DCT

As the Type-II even DCT (or Type-II DCT as referred to subsequently) is used in DCT-based compression schemes such as JPEG, MPEG, etc., we review its properties in more detail in this section. 2.2.4.1

Matrix Representation

As the DCTs are linear operations, they can be conveniently represented by matrix operations. Let CN denote the N × N type-II DCT matrix whose (k, q n)th element (for 0 ≤ k ≤ N − 1 and 0 ≤ n ≤ N − 1) is given by (2n+1)πn 2 ) N .α(k)cos( 2N

tion:

CN =

(see Eq. (2.75)) as represented by the following nota-

"r

# 2 πk(2n + 1) .α(k)cos( ) N 2N

.

(2.96)

0≤(k,n)≤N −1

Following the above notation, general even N -point DCT matrices of typeI II III IV I, II, III, and IV are denoted by CN ,CN , CN , and CN , respectively. If the type is not mentioned in the superscript, the type of the matrix should be considered as type-II. Similarly, for even DSTs, the transform matrices are I II III IV denoted by SN ,SN , SN , and SN for type-I, II, III, and IV N -point DST, respectively. In this case also, if the type is not mentioned in the superscript such as SN , it is to be considered as a type-II DST matrix. Let the sequence {x(n), n = 0, 1, ... N − 1} be represented by the N dimensional column-vector x. Then the type-II DCT of x is given as follows: X = CN .x.

(2.97)

As the type-II DCT is an orthonormal transform, the following relationship holds with its inverse: −1 T CN = CN . (2.98) Rows of CN satisfy the following: properties. Theorem 2.10 For even N , each row of the DCT matrix CN is either symmetric (for even rows) or antisymmetric (for odd rows) about its center, that is, CN (k, n) for k even CN (k, N − 1 − n) = (2.99) −CN (k, n) for k odd 2.2.4.2

Downsampling and Upsampling Properties of the DCTs

Both type-I and type-II DCTs have interesting relationship with downsampled and upsampled sequences. They are stated below [94]:

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

80

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

Theorem 2.11 If XI (k) = C1e (x(n)), k, n = 0, 1, 2, .. , N , then xd (n) = (N −k) −1 XI (k)−X √I x(2n + 1) = C2e { } for k, n = 0, 1, 2, .... , N2 − 1. 2 N 2,

then Theorem 2.12 If XII (k) = C2e (x(n)), k, n = 0, 1, 2, ... , −1 XII (k)−X II (N −k) √ xu (n) = C1e { } for k, n = 0, 1, 2, ... , N , where 2 0, n even, xu (n) = x( n−1 ), n odd. 2

(2.100)

Theorem 2.11 is useful for decimating signals directly in the compressed domain, while Theorem 2.12 is used in interpolation. 2.2.4.3

Subband Relationship of the type-II DCT

Subbands are components of a sequence in its multiresolution representation. Suppose x(n), n = 0, 1, ... , N − 1 be an N -point data sequence with even N . Let the sequence x(n) be decomposed into two subbands xL (n) and xH (n) of length N2 each as follows: xL (n) = xH (n) =

1 2 {x(2n) 1 2 {x(2n)

+ x(2n + 1)}, − x(2n + 1)}, n = 0, 1, ... , N2 − 1.

(2.101)

The relationship between the DCT of subbands (of N2 point) with the original DCT (of N -point) of the sequence are stated in the following theorem. Theorem 2.13 Let xL (n) and xH (n) be subbands of a sequence x(n) as computed from Eq. (2.101), and let XL (k) = C2e (xL (n)) and SH (k) = S2e (xH (n)). Then X(k), DCT of x(n), from XL (k)’s and SH (k)’s is obtained as follows [72]: √ √ πk πk X(k) = 2 cos( )XL (k) + 2 sin( )SH (k), 0 ≤ k ≤ N − 1, (2.102) 2N 2N where  0 ≤ k ≤ N2 − 1,  XL (k), XL (k) = (2.103) 0, k = N2 ,  −XL (N − k), N2 + 1 ≤ k ≤ N − 1, and

 SH (k),     √ NX 2 −1 SH (k) = 2 (−1)n xH (n),    n=0  SH (N − k),

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

0≤k≤ k= N 2

N 2

− 1,

N 2,

+ 1 ≤ k ≤ N − 1.

(2.104)

81

Image Transforms

2.2.4.4

Approximate DCT Computation

If most of the energy of a signal is concentrated in the lower-frequency zone, Eq. (2.102) can be approximated as [72] √ πk 2 cos( 2N )XL (k), k ∈ {0, 1, .... , N2 − 1}, X(k) = (2.105) 0, otherwise. This approximation is referred to as the subband approximation of DCT. It is further simplified by removing the cosine factor as shown in the following expression: √ 2 · XL (k), k ∈ {0, 1, .... , N2 − 1}. (2.106) X(k) = 0, otherwise. This simplified approximation is referred to as the low-pass truncated approximation of DCT. 2.2.4.5

Composition and Decomposition of the DCT Blocks

The composition and decomposition of the DCT blocks [67] are carried out by exploiting the spatial relationship of block DCTs. Let {x(n), n = 0, 1, ... , M N − 1} be a sequence of length M N . This sequence is partitioned into M blocks (or subsequences) each containing N data points. In the block DCT space, an N -point DCT is applied to each block of N data points. Hence the N -point DCT of the p-th block is expressed as follows:

(N )

Xp

q

(k) =

N −1 X

(2n + 1)πk ), 2N n=0 0 ≤ p ≤ M − 1, 0 ≤ k ≤ N − 1.

2 N α(k)

x(pN + n) cos(

(2.107)

On the other hand, the M N -point DCT of x(n) is given by X (MN ) (k)

=

q

MN X−1

(2n + 1)πk ), 2×M ×N n=0 0 ≤ k ≤ M × N − 1.

2 MN α(k)

x(n) cos(

(2.108)

In both of the above two equations, α(k) is given by Eq. (2.89). We may observe that the block DCT transformation as expressed in Eq. (2.107) is an orthonormal expansion of the sequence {x(n)} with a set of M N basis vectors [67], each of which could be derived from the basis vectors of the N -point DCT by translating the basis vector with the multiple of block sizes and padding with zeroes. As this derived set is also orthonormal, there exists an invertible linear transformation from one transform to the other. This

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

82

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain (N )

implies that, for a sequence of N -point DCT blocks {Xi }, i = 0, 1, ... , M −1, there is a matrix A(M,N ) of size M N × M N such that the corresponding composite DCT X (MN ) (M N -point DCT) holds the following relation with M block DCTs: X (MN )

=

(N )

A(M,N ) [X0

The matrix A(M,N ) is given by  −1 CN  0N   A(M,N ) = CMN  ...   0N 0N

0N −1 CN .. . 0N 0N

0N 0N .. . 0N 0N

(N )

X1

(N )

. . . XM−1 ]T .

··· ··· .. .

0N 0N .. .

0N 0N .. .

··· ···

−1 CN

0N −1 CN

0N

(2.109)



   ,  

(2.110)

where 0N represents the N × N null matrix. A typical example of a conversion matrix is given below: −1 C4 A(2,4) = C8 04  0.7071  =  

0.6407 0 −0.225 0 0.1503 0 −0.1274

04 C4−1

0 0.294 0.7071 0.5594 0 −0.2492 0 0.1964

0 −0.0528 0 0.3629 0.7071 0.5432 0 −0.2654

0 0.0162 0 −0.0690 0 0.3468 0.7071 0.6122

0.7071 −0.6407 0 0.225 0 −0.1503 0 0.1274

0 0.294 0.7071 0.5594 0 −0.2492 0 0.1964

0 0.0528 0 −0.3629 0.7071 −0.5432 0 0.2654

0 0.0162 0 −0.069 0 0.3468 −0.7071 0.6122



 . 

(2.111) We find that the conversion matrices and their inverses are sparse. Hence, this property is exploited to design a computational technique with fewer number of multiplications and additions of two numbers than those needed in the usual matrix multiplications. This is elaborated in the next subsection. 2.2.4.6

Properties of Block Composition Matrices

Let us partition a composition matrix A(M,N ) into M × M submatrices, each of which has the dimension N × N . We refer the (i, j)th, 0 ≤ i, j ≤ M − 1 submatrix of A(M,N ) as Ai,j . Similarly, the DCT matrix CMN is also partitioned into a set of M × M submatrices whose (i, j)th, 0 ≤ i, j ≤ M − 1 submatrix is denoted by (CMN )i,j . From Eq. (2.110), T Ai,j = (CMN )i,j CN .

(2.112)

Two useful properties of block composition matrices are presented in the following theorems. Theorem 2.14 Given odd M and even N , elements of Aj, M −1 satisfy the 2 following condition: Aj, M −1 (k, l) = 0, if k + l is odd. 2

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

(2.113)

83

Image Transforms

Proof: T From Eq. (2.112), Aj, M −1 = (CMN )j, M −1 CN . 2 2 For the sake of convenience, let us rename (CMN )j, M −1 as S. From Eq. 2 (2.10), S(k, l) = (−1)k S(k, N − 1 − l). Hence, N −1 X

Aj, M −1 (k, l) = 2

T S(k, t)CN (t, l),

t=0

N 2

−1 X (S(k, t)CN (l, t)

=

t=0

+(−1)(k+l) S(k, t)CN (l, t)),  N 2 −1   X S(k, t)CN (l, t), k + l even, 2 =   t=0 0, k + l odd.

(2.114)

Theorem 2.15 Given even N , Ai,j and Ai,M−1−j are related as follows: Ai,j (k, l) = (−1)k+l Ai,M−1−j (k, l).

(2.115)

Proof: For convenience let us rename (CMN )i,j and (CMN )i,M−1−j as S0 and S1 , respectively. From Eq. (2.10), S0 (k, l) = (−1)k S1 (k, N − 1 − l). Now, Ai,j (k, l) = =

N −1 X

S0 (k, t)CN (l, t),

t=0 N −1 X t=0

((−1)k S1 (k, N − 1 − t)

(−1)l CN (l, N − 1 − t)), N −1 X = (−1)k+l S1 (k, u)CN (l, u),

(2.116)

u=0

Substituting (N − 1 − t) as u, = (−1)k+l Ai,M−1−j (k, l).

In [67], it has been shown that A(M,N ) is a sparse matrix where for every M × N blocks there are N − 1 zeroes, and in total there are M N (N − 1) zeroes. The corresponding property is stated below.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

84

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

Theorem 2.16 In A(M,N ) every ith row such that, i mod M = 0, 0 ≤ i ≤ M N − 1, contains M N − M zeroes.

From Theorems 2.16 and 2.14 we can state the following theorem about the number of zeroes in each row of the composition matrix when M is odd. Theorem 2.17 If M is odd, the number of zeroes (nz (i)) in the ith row of A(M,N ) is given by the following expression. nz (i) = =

M N − M, N 2,

if i mod M = 0, Otherwise.

(2.117)

Hence, the extent of sparseness of a composition matrix is stated in the following form. Theorem 2.18 The total number of zeroes (nz ) in A(M,N ) is as follows: nz

= =

M N (N − 1), M even, N (3M N − 2M − N ), M odd. 2

(2.118)

Proof: M even: There are MN M = N rows, which have M N − M zeroes each. Hence, the total number of zeroes is N (M N − M ) = M N (N − 1). M odd: In addition to the rows with M N − M zeroes, there are M N − N rows each having N2 zeroes. Hence, the total number of zeroes is N (M N − M ) + (M N − N ) N2 = N2 (3M N − 2M − N ). From the above properties we may have the number of operations required for performing block composition and decomposition operations. These are stated below. Theorem 2.19 The number of multiplications (nm ) and additions (na ) for composition of M adjacent N -point DCT blocks are given below. nm = na

= =

M (M − 1) 2 N + N. 2

(M N − N )M N, (M N − N )(M N −

N 2

M even, − 1), M odd.

(2.119) (2.120)

Proof:

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

85

Image Transforms

M even: As magnitudes of elements are repeated according to Theorem 2.15, for M N − N rows it requires MN numbers of multiplications. 2 However, for them, the number of additions remains at M N − 1. Again, from Theorem 2.16 for N rows, there are M nonzero elements whose magnitudes are the same. Hence, each of them requires a multiplication and M − 1 additions. The numbers of multiplications and additions for even M are as follows: nm

na

= =

(M N − N ) MN 2 + N, M(M−1) 2 N + N. 2

= (M N − N )(M N − 1) + N (M − 1), = (M N − N )M N.

(2.121)

(2.122)

M odd: As magnitudes of elements are repeated according to Theorem 2.15, for M N − N rows it requires (M−1) N + N2 = MN numbers of 2 2 multiplications. However, for them, the number of additions remains at M N − N2 −1. Again, from Theorem 2.16 for N rows, there are M nonzero elements whose magnitudes are the same. Hence, each of them computes with 1 multiplication and M − 1 additions. This makes the numbers of multiplications and additions as nm

na

= =

(M N − N ) MN 2 + N, M(M−1) 2 N + N. 2

= (M N − N )(M N − = (M N − N )(M N −

N 2 − N 2 ).

1) + N (M − 1),

(2.123)

(2.124)

Theorem 2.20 The number of multiplications (nm ) and additions (na ) for decomposition of an M N -point DCT block into M adjacent N -point DCT blocks are as follows: nm

= = na

MN 2 (M N − N + 1), (M−1)N (M N − N + 2

= =

(MN )2 , 2 M(M−1) 2 N 2

M even, M odd.

(2.125)

M even, + ( MN − 1)N, M odd. 2

(2.126)

1) +

M 2 2 N ,

Proof:

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

86

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

M even: In A(M,N ) T , for every pair of ith and i + M 2 N rows, the magnitudes of corresponding elements of the same columns are the same (see Theorem 2.15). Exploiting this property, we have the following numbers of multiplications and additions for each pair. Moreover, due to Theorem 2.16, each row contains N − 1 zeroes. nm na

= = =

MN 2 (M N − MN 2 .M N, (MN )2 . 2

N + 1), (2.127)

M odd: In this case, N rows around the center of the transformation zeroes. For other rows, they occur in pairs with the matrix have MN 2 similar property of even M . nm na

= = = =

(M−1)N (M N − N + 1) + MN 2 2 N, (M−1)N M 2 (M N − N + 1) + 2 2 N . (M−1)N M N + ( MN 2 2 − 1)N, M(M−1) 2 MN N + ( 2 2 − 1)N.

(2.128)

2.2.4.7

Matrix Factorization

The N -point DCT matrix, CN , could be factorized into a product of a few sparse matrices. This is given below: #" " # 0N CN I N J N 1 2 2 2 2 CN = √ PN , (2.129) 0 N J N C IV J N −I N N JN 2 2 2 2 2

where PN is the N × N  1 0  0  PN =  0   0 0

2

2

permutation matrix as defined below:  0 0 ··· 0 0 0 ··· 0 0 0 · · · 0 1 0 · · · 0  1 0 · · · 0 0 0 · · · 0  0 0 · · · 0 0 1 · · · 0 .  ··· ···  0 0 · · · 1 0 0 · · · 0 0 0 ··· 0 0 0 ··· 1

(2.130)

IN , JN and 0N are N × N identity, reverse identity, and zero matrices, respectively. 2.2.4.8

8-Point Type-II DCT Matrix (C8 )

As the 8 × 8 block DCT is used in JPEG and MPEG compression techniques, a few specific properties of its transform matrix (C8 ) are worth reviewing.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

87

Image Transforms

• Factorization: C8 may be factorized as a product of matrices [41], that are mostly sparse, and some of them contain either 1 or −1 as nonzero elements. These properties are useful in designing fast matrix multiplication operations for various algorithms. C8 = DP B1 B2 M A1 A2 A3 ,

(2.131)

where, D = D [0.3536 0.2549 0.2706 0.3007 0.3536 0.4500 0.6533 1.2814]T . D(x) denotes a diagonal matrix whose elements of its diagonal are formed by the column vector x. Definitions of other matrices in Eq. (2.131) are given below.  1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0  0 0 0 0 0 0 0

 P = 



 B1 =   

 M = 



 A1 =   

 A2 =   

 A3 =  

2.2.4.9

1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

0 0 0 1 0 0 0

1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 1 0 0 0 0 0

0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

1 −1 0 0 0 0 0 0

1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0

0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 1 0

0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 1 0 0

0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 1 0 0 −1

0 0 0.7071 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0

1 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 1

0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0

0 0 1 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 1 −1 0

 , 

0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1

0 0 0 0 −0.9239 0 −0.3827 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0





   , B2 =   

0 0 0 0 0 0.7071 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 −1 0 0 0 0 0 −1 0 0 0 0 0 −1 −1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 −1 0 0 0 0 0 −1 0 0 0 0 0 −1 0 0 0 0 0 −1

0 0 0 0 −0.3827 0 0.9239 0



 , 

0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1



 . 

1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0



0 0 1 −1 0 0 0 0

0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 1 0 −1

0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0

0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1



 , 

 , 



  , and 

Integer Cosine Transforms

Integer cosine transforms (ICT) [18] are derived from a DCT matrix as its integer approximations and preserving its properties of orthogonality, symmetry, relative order, and sign of the elements of the matrix. For example, from the C8 DCT matrix we may obtain the following general form of a ma-

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

88

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

trix preserving the symmetry and signs of its elements. 

     T8 (a, b, c, d, e, f ) =      

 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 a b c d −d −c −b −a   e f −f −e −e −f f e   b −d −a −c c a d −b  , 1 −1 −1 1 1 −1 −1 1   c −a d b −b −d a −c   f −e e −f −f e −e f  d −c b −a a −b c −d

(2.132)

where a, b, c, d, e, and f are integers satisfying the following constraints for preserving the orthogonal property and relative order of their magnitude corresponding to elements in C8 at the same locations of the matrix. ab = ac + bd + cd, a ≥ b ≥ c ≥ d and e ≥ f.

(2.133)

Hence, an infinite number of transform matrices could be derived satisfying the above constraints. A typical example of one such matrix with a = 5, b = 3, c = 2, d = 1, e = 3, and f = 1 are given below. Magnitudes of all the elements in the following transform is in the form of 2n or 2n + 1 where n is an integer. This makes multiplication with these elements quite fast, as it can be implemented using shift and add method. 

     T8 (5, 3, 2, 1, 3, 1) =      

1 5 3 3 1 2 1 1

 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 2 1 −1 −2 −3 −5   1 −1 −3 −3 −1 1 3   −1 −5 −2 2 5 1 −3  . −1 −1 1 1 −1 −1 1   −5 1 3 −3 −1 5 −2   −3 3 −1 −1 3 −3 1  −2 3 −5 5 −3 2 −1

(2.134)

For making the transform orthonormal, we have to divide each row vector by normalizing scalar constants. This means that, after the transform, the transform coefficients should be divided by the corresponding magnitudes of each row vector of the transform matrix. This, in fact, is taken care of during the quantization process so that it does not introduce any additional overhead in the computation of quantized coefficients for compression of data. For example, the normalizing constants for the row vectors of T8 (5, 3, 2, 1, 3, 1) are 8, 78, 40, 78, 8, 78, 40, and 78, respectively. Following similar approaches, different integer cosine matrices for other DCT matrices may be obtained. Out of them, in the H.264, the following ICT

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

Image Transforms

matrix (T4 ) corresponding to the 4-point DCT matrix (C4 ) is used.   1 1 1 1  2 1 −1 −2  . T4 =   1 −1 −1 1  1 −2 2 −1

89

(2.135)

The inverse of T4 also has elements suitable for integer arithmetics during the matrix multiplication operation.

2.2.5

Hadamard Transform

In the Hadamard transform [52] of a sequence of length 2m , m ∈ Z, elements of the transform matrix (Hdm ) are either 1 or −1. The matrix is uniformly scaled so that it becomes orthonormal. The Hadamard transform matrix can be defined recursively in the following way: Hd0 Hdm

= 1, Hdm−1 = √12 Hdm−1

Hdm−1 . −Hdm−1

(2.136)

The advantage of the Hadamard transform is that it is a real transform and does not require multiplication operation in its computation.

2.2.6

Discrete Wavelet Transform (DWT)

Previously we have discussed that there exist two mother wavelets φ(x) and ψ(x) such that their translated and dilated forms provide an orthonormal basis. In this section we discuss the properties of these two functions defined over a finite discretized grid ZN = {0, 1, 2, . . . , N − 1}. 2.2.6.1

Orthonormal Basis with a Single Mother Wavelet

From a mother wavelet φ(n), the family of translated basis vectors is defined as {φ(n − k)|k ∈ ZN }. The following theorem states when this family forms the orthonormal basis in ZN [45]. Theorem 2.21 The orthonormal basis for a finite length sequence of length N is formed from a mother wavelet φ(n) by its translation at every point in ˆ ˆ ZN if and only if |φ(n)| = 1 for all n ∈ ZN , where φ(n) is the DFT of φ(n). The above theorem implies that we would not be able to achieve frequency localization for a mother wavelet. In fact, as the magnitude of the spectrum becomes 1 for every frequency, the mother wavelet is the Dirac delta function or δ(n), which is the same trivial orthonormal expansion as discussed earlier. However, we may overcome this constraint when two mother wavelets (or sometimes denoted as parent wavelets) are used as discussed in the following.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

90 2.2.6.2

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

Orthonormal Basis with Two Mother Wavelets

In this case, we consider sequences whose lengths are even numbers (say, N = 2M , M, N ∈ Z). The following theorem states the conditions for existence of parent wavelets for forming an orthonormal basis [45] [93]. Theorem 2.22 For N = 2M , there exist two mother wavelets φ(n) and ψ(n) such that the union of basis sets B1 = {φ(n − 2k)|k ∈ ZM } and B2 = {φ(n − 2k)|k ∈ ZM } with cardinality of each set being M forms an orthonormal basis. The basis set will be orthonormal if and only if the following conditions are satisfied for all n ∈ ZN : 2 ˆ ˆ + M )|2 |φ(n)| + |φ(n = 2, 2 ˆ ˆ + M )|2 |ψ(n)| + |ψ(n = 2, ∗ ∗ ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ φ(n)ψ (n) + φ(n + M )ψ (n + M ) = 0.

(2.137)

Let us reflect on the nature of these two mother wavelets from the constraints imposed upon by Eq. (2.137). According to this equation, the average 2 2 ˆ ˆ + M )|2 should be 1. Suppose |φ(n)| ˆ of |φ(n)| and |φ(n is set to 2. In that 2 ˆ case, |φ(n + M )| should be zero (0). Hence, φ(n) behaves like a low-pass filter ˆ function. However, the third constraint of Eq. (2.137) enforces |ψ(n)| to be 2 ˆ zero, thus implying |ψ(n + M )| = 2. Hence, ψ(n) acts like a high-pass filter. The transform obtained from the orthonormal basis set B1 , which is defined from φ(n) (with low-pass filter response), provides the approximation of the function at half the resolution of the original one. The approximated function at lower resolution may further be transformed using the translated and dilated forms of mother wavelets φ(n) and ψ(n) in the next level. The high-pass filtering function ψ(n) provides the orthonormal basis (B2 ) for transforming the function into its details at the given resolution. In a dyadic expansion of a function, at each stage only the details are retained leaving aside its approximation at the lowest level of resolution. Let us discuss the well-known Haar wavelets under this context. 2.2.6.3

Haar Wavelets

We illustrate the discrete Haar wavelet transform for N = 8. In Z8 , the pair of Haar wavelets forming the orthonormal basis are as follows: φ(n) = ψ(n) =

√1 (1, 1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0), 2 √1 (1, −1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0). 2

Both these functions satisfy Eq. (2.137). So the transformation matrix (W8 ) for the first stage of wavelet decomposition (into approximation and details)

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

91

Image Transforms

of a sequence x(n) of length 8 is given by the following.  1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0  0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0   0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0  1  0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1  W8 = √  0 0 0 0 0 2  1 −1 0  0 0 1 −1 0 0 0 0   0 0 0 0 1 −1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 −1



     .     

(2.138)

The first four rows of W8 correspond to the basis vectors formed from φ(n), whereas the last four rows are obtained from the ψ(n) mother wavelet. The transform (X = W8 x) provides the first four coefficients as the approximation coefficients, and the last four as the detail coefficients. In the same way, in successive stages, approximation coefficients are further transformed by W4 and W2 formed in the same way as in Eq. (2.138). Hence, in a dyadic expansion, the complete Haar transform can be expressed in the following way: W2 02×6 W4 04 X= W8 x (2.139) 06×2 I6 04 I4 In the above equation, 0m×n denotes the null matrix of dimension m×n where m and n are arbitrary integers. As previously, In and 0n denote the identity matrix and the null matrix, respectively, of dimension n × n. From Eq. (2.139) we derive the transform matrix for the discrete Haar transform (for N = 8) as follows:  1  1 1 1 1 1 1 1       H8 =       

√

16 √1 8 √1 4

√ 16 √1 8 √1 4

0

0

√1 2

− √12 0 0 0 0 0 0

√ 16 √1 8 − √14

0 0

√ 16 √1 8 − √14

√1 2

0 0

− √12 0 0 0 0

√

√

16 − √18

16 − √18

√1 4

√1 4

0 0

0 0

√1 2

− √12 0

0

0

0

√

16 − √18

0 − √14 0 0 0 √1 2

√

16

− √18 0 − √14 0 0 0 1 − √2

      .      

(2.140)

The last seven basis vectors in H8 are formed from the dilated and translated j form of ψ(n) (that is, 2− 2 ψ(2−j n − 2k), j ∈ {1, 2, 3}, k = 1, 2, .., 2Nj . The first row corresponds to the scaling function and computes the average of the function. We may extend this observation to construct the Haar transform matrix for other values of N = 2m , m ∈ Z. 2.2.6.4

Other Wavelets

Like the Haar wavelets, other wavelet functions may be obtained by satisfying Eq. (2.137). To make these functions real, the frequency transforms for φ(n)

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

92

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

b b and ψ(n) should be chosen such that φ(n) = φb∗ (N −n) and ψ(n) = ψb∗ (N −n). In fact, given an orthonormal mother wavelet φ(n), there exists a wavelet function ψ(n) satisfying the other two conditions of Eq. (2.137) for the orthonormal basis. The following theorem states this relationship. Theorem 2.23 Suppose N = 2M (N and M are positive integers), and φ(n) is a function such that {φ(n − 2k)|k = 0, 1, . . . , M } forms an orthonormal basis. Let us define the function ψ(n) as follows: ψ(n) = (−1)n−1 φ∗ (1 − n). In that case, {φ(n − 2k)|k = 0, 1, . . . , M } and {ψ(n − 2k)|k = 0, 1, . . . , M } generate the orthonormal basis in ZN . The above theorem implies that orthonormal wavelet basis vectors can be specified by a single mother wavelet function. A few more examples of such scaling functions (φ(n)) that have a compact support with real values are given below. These are from the family of Daubechies’ orthogonal wavelets [31], which can be formed for any even positive integer p, where the nonzero elements in the function occur only for 0 ≤ n < p. Two such functions for p = 4 and 6 are given below. D4 (n) = D6 (n) =

√ √ √ √ √ 2 (1 + 3, 3 + 3, 3 − 3, 1 − 3), √8 2 32 (b + c, 2a + 3b + 3c, 6a + 4b + 2c, 6a +

4b − 2c, 2a + 3b − 3c, b − c). (2.141) p √ √ √ In the above equation, a = 1 − 10, b = 1 + 10 and c = 5 + 2 10. 2.2.6.5

DWT through Filter Banks

The DWT can be computed efficiently using filter banks, a low-pass filter for computing the approximation coefficients, and a high-pass filter for computing the detailed coefficients. We can show that computation of inner products with the orthonormal basis vectors as obtained from two mother wavelets φ(n) and ψ(n), and is equivalent to the convolution operation (or filtering) with a pair of filters (say, with impulse responses h(n) and g(n), respectively). Let us define the conjugate reflection of a function w(n) as Definition 2.9 For any w(n) ∈ ZN , its conjugate reflection w(n) is defined as w(n) = w∗ (−n) = w∗ (N − n) for all n ∈ ZN . Theorem 2.24 Let x(n) be a sequence of length N (or x(n) ∈ ZN ), and w(n) be a function in ZN . Then, x ⊛ w(k) x ⊛ w(k)

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

= < x(n), w(n − k) >, = < x(n), w(n − k) >,

(2.142)

93

Image Transforms

where < a(n), b(n) > denotes the dot product between a(n) and b(n) in ZN . From the foregoing theorem the wavelet coefficients using the orthonormal basis from φ(n) and ψ(n) are computed by using their conjugate mirror filters [93] as follows. Theorem 2.25 Suppose h(n) = φ(n) and g(n) = ψ(n) are two corresponding mother wavelets. Then approximation (ak , 0 ≤ k < M ) and detail (dk , 0 ≤ k < M ) coefficients of a function x(n) ∈ ZN are obtained as follows: ak dk

= =

x ⊛ h(2k) = x ⊛ g(2k) =

< x(n), φ(n − 2k) >, < x(n), ψ(n − 2k) > .

(2.143)

This implies that downsampled x ⊛ h(n) and x ⊛ g(n) with a downsampling factor 2 (by retaining even samples and dropping odd samples in a sequence) provide the first-level decomposition of x(n) into wavelet coefficients. From Theorem 2.23 we find that g(n) = (−1)n−1 h∗ (1 − n). Reconstruction of x(n) from wavelet coefficients is also possible by using a pair of filters, as shown in Figure 2.5. The process of transformation of x(n) into a set of wavelet coefficients is also known as analysis of the function, whereas the inverse operation is known as synthesis. In the analysis stage, the filtered sequence is downsampled by a factor of 2, whereas in synthesis, input sequences are upsampled by the same factor before filtering. There exist combinations of h(n), g(n), h′ (n) and g ′ (n) for which perfect reconstruction (that is, x0 (n) = x f0 (n)) is possible. This is not only true for orthonormal transforms, but also for non-orthogonal transforms (also known as biorthonormal wavelet transforms in this specific case). We consider here the relations among these filter banks for perfect reconstruction. h (n )

2

a1 ( n )

2

h '(n)

2

g '(n)

x 0 (n ) g (n )

2

d 1( n )

~x ( n ) 0

Figure 2.5: The discrete wavelet transform and its inverse using filter banks.(Reproduced from Figure 1.10 of Chapter 1.) Definition 2.10 The even downsampling of x(n) by a factor of 2 is defined as retaining of the even-indexed samples and dropping the odd ones. The operation is defined below. De (x)(n) = x(2n). (2.144)

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

94

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

In the same way, the odd downsampling of x(n) by a factor of 2 is defined as retaining of the odd-indexed samples and dropping the even ones. Mathematically, the operation is defined below. Do (x)(n) = x(2n + 1).

(2.145)

Definition 2.11 The upsampling of x(n) by a factor of 2 is defined as inserting zeroes either between an odd and even sample, or between an even and odd sample. The first one we refer to as even upsampling (denoted by Ue (.)), and the latter as odd upsampling (denoted by Uo (.)). These operations are defined as follows. x(n), if m = 2n, Ue (x)(m) = (2.146) 0, otherwise. Uo (x)(m) =

x(n), 0,

if m = 2n + 1, otherwise.

(2.147)

If it is not mentioned, we consider the upsampling operation as even upsampling, and the operation is denoted by U (.). According to Figure 2.5, perfect reconstruction of the input sequence implies that it should satisfy the following. x e0 (n) = h′ ⊛ Ue (De (h ⊛ x0 ))(n) + g ′ ⊛ Uo (Do (g ⊛ x0 ))(n)

(2.148)

For the above, the filter banks have the following relationship. hb′ (n)b h(n) + gb′ (n)b g (n) = 2, hb′ (n)b h(n + M ) + gb′ (n)b g (n + M ) = 0.

(2.149)

The above relationship can be further simplified with orthonormal wavelet expansion as shown below. h′ (n) g ′ (n)

= h(n), = g(n).

(2.150)

In a more general form accommodating the delay and gain in the final reconstruction of the function, the conditions in Eq. (2.149) can be expressed using the z-Transform as follows [100]: H(z)H ′ (z) + G(z)G′ (z) = 2.c.z −l , ′ ′ H (z)H(−z) + G (z)G(−z) = 0.

(2.151)

where H(z), G(z), H ′ (z), and G(z) are the z-Transforms of h(n), g(n), h′ (n), and g ′ (n), respectively. c is a positive real constant, and l is a nonnegative

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

95

Image Transforms

Table 2.7: Daubechies 9/7 analysis and synthesis filter banks for lossy compression n 0 ±1 ±2 ±3 ±4

Analysis filter bank h(n) g(n − 1) 0.603 1.115 0.267 -0.591 -0.078 -0.058 -0.017 0.091 0.027

Synthesis filter bank h′ (n) g ′ (n + 1) 1.115 0.603 0.591 -0.267 -0.058 -0.078 -0.091 0.017 0.027

Table 2.8: 5/3 analysis and synthesis filter banks for lossless compression n 0 ±1 ±2

Analysis filter bank h(n) g(n − 1) 6 1 8 2 1 − 8 2 1 −8

Synthesis filter bank h′ (n) g ′ (n + 1) 6 1 8 1 − 28 2 − 18

integer. The reconstructed output (e x0 (n)), in that case, will become cx0 (n−l). The second part of Eq. (2.151) is satisfied if the biorthogonal filters are chosen in the following way: H ′ (z) = −cz −m G(−z), G′ (z) = cz −m H(−z).

(2.152)

In JPEG2000 biorthogonal wavelets are used. Filter banks corresponding to these wavelets are shown in Tables 2.7 [4] and 2.8 [48]. We find that these filters satisfy Eq. (2.151) for m = 1 and c = 1.0. Because of this, in the analysis stage, the downsampled sequence from the low-pass filter (h(n)) retains only the even-indexed sample, whereas downsampling from the high-pass one (g(n)) keeps the odd-indexed sample [119]. Eventually, in the synthesis stage, corresponding upsampling becomes even and odd upsampling, respectively. 2.2.6.6

Lifting-based DWT

The lifting operation involves polyphase (or in our context, two-channel) decomposition of a sequence and prediction of its one channel from the other. This removes redundancy in that stream. In a dual lifting operation, subsequently the unprocessed part of the sequence is also modified or updated from the residual information of the other channel. For example, as shown in Figure 2.6, the sequence x(n) is split into two phases or channels comprising sequences of even and odd samples (xe (n) and xo (n)), respectively. In the first

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

96

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

stage of lifting, odd samples are predicted from even samples, and residues are computed. In the next stage, those are used to update the even sequence (xe (n)) so that the resulting sequences are in the form of a(n) and d(n). Perfect reconstruction is possible by performing the inverse operations as shown in Figure 2.7.

x e(n)

x( n)

SPLIT

+

P( )

xo (n)

a( n)

U( )

-

d( n)

Figure 2.6: Dual lifting operations. Wavelet filters can be implemented by a cascade of such basic lifting blocks. This makes the computation efficient. Various combinations of predictor (P (.)) and update (U (.)) functions implement these wavelet filters. For example, implementation of Daubechies 9/7 filters and Lee Gall’s 5/3 integer wavelets are provided in Eq. (2.153) and (2.154), respectively. Lifting scheme for 9/7 filters a(0) (l) d(0) (l) d(1) (l) a(1) (l) d(2) (l) a(2) (l) a(l) d(l)

= = = = = = = =

x(2l), x(2l + 1), d(0) (l) + α(a(0) (l) + a(0) (l + 1)), a(0) (l) + β(d(1) (l) + d(1) (l − 1)), d(1) (l) + γ(a(1) (l) + a(1) (l + 1)), a(1) (l) + δ(d(2) (l) + d(2) (l − 1)), ζa(2) (l), d(2) (l)/ζ,

where α ≈ −1.59, β ≈ −0.053, γ ≈ 0.88, δ ≈ 0.44, and ζ ≈ 1.15.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

(2.153)

97

Image Transforms

xe(n)

-

a( n)

U( )

P( )

MERGE

x( n)

+ xo (n)

d( n)

Figure 2.7: Inverse lifting operations.

Lifting scheme for 5/3 filters a(0) (l) = x(2l), d(0) (l) = x(2l + 1), d(l) a(l)

2.3

(0)

(0)

= d(0) (l) − ⌊ (a (l)+a2 (l+1)) ⌋, and , ⌋. = a(0) (l) + ⌊ (d(l)+d(l−1)) 4

(2.154)

Transforms in 2-D Space

As images are functions in a 2-D space, 2-D transforms are more relevant to our discussion. In fact, all the above transforms in 1-D could be extended to 2-D, if the basis functions are separable in each dimension [52]. This implies that a function b(x, y) can be expressed as a product of two 1-D functions of variables along each dimension (e.g., b(x, y) = φ(x)ψ(y)). This is also true for discrete transforms. A finite 2-D discrete function f (m, n), 0 ≤ m < M, 0 ≤ n < N can also be represented by a matrix of dimension M × N . Let Φ = {φi (m)|0 ≤ i, m < M } and Ψ = {ψj (n)|0 ≤ j, n < N } be two sets of orthonormal discrete functions in 1-D. It could be easily shown that Ω = {ωij (m, n) = φi (m)ψj (n)|0 ≤ i, m < M, 0 ≤ j, n < N } form the orthonormal basis of the 2-D discrete functions of dimension M × N . Hence, the 2-D transform coefficients for expanding f (m, n) with these basis

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

98

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

functions could be computed as follows: c(l, k) = = =

M−1 −1 X NX m=0 n=0 M−1 −1 X NX

∗ f (m, n)ωij (m, n),

f (m, n)φ∗i (m)ψj∗ (n),

m=0 n=0 M−1 X φ∗i (m) m=0

N −1 X

!

(2.155)

f (m, n)ψj∗ (n) ,

n=0

for 0 ≤ l ≤ M − 1, and 0 ≤ k ≤ N − 1. Similar to 1-D transform (see Eq. (2.44)), the foregoing equation can also be expressed in the form of a matrix transformation. Consider the matrix representation of the function f (m, n) as f of dimension M ×N . The transform matrices of basis functions Φ and Ψ are also represented in the following form.   T φ0 ∗ T    φ1 ∗      . Φ= (2.156) .   .     . T φM−1 ∗   T ψ0 ∗ T     ψ1 ∗     . (2.157) Ψ= .   .     . ∗T ψN−1 Then the 2-D transform of f is given by Eq. (2.158). F = ΦfΨT .

(2.158)

Given the property of orthonormal matrices, the inverse transform can be expressed as T f = ΦH F ΨH . (2.159) For computing the 2-D transforms, we apply 1-D transforms to all rows and to all columns successively in Eq. (2.160). F = =

T ΦfΨ , T Φ ΨfT .

(2.160)

Definitions of all the transforms discussed in 1-D are trivially extended to 2-D following the framework as presented above. Most of their properties in 1-D also could be extended to 2-D. However, as DCT is used in compression standards, we review some of its properties in 2-D in the following subsection.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

99

Image Transforms

2.3.1

2-D Discrete Cosine Transform

In 2-D also there are eight different types of DCT. Out of them, we concentrate only on the type-I and type-II even 2-D DCTs . For an input sequence x(m, n), m = 0, 1, 2, . . . , M ; n = 0, 1, 2, . . . , N , these are defined as follows: XI (k, l) =

2 2 2 N .α (k).α (l).

M X N X

m=0 n=0

XII (k, l) =

2 N .α(k).α(l).

M−1 −1 X NX

mπk nπl ) cos( )), M N 0 ≤ k ≤ M, 0 ≤ l ≤ N. (2.161)

(x(m, n) cos(

(x(m, n) cos(

m=0 n=0 cos( (2n+1)πl )), 0≤k 2N

(2m + 1)πk ) 2M

(2.162)

≤ M − 1, 0 ≤ l ≤ N − 1.

The type-I 2-D DCT is defined over (M +1)×(N +1) samples, whereas the type-II 2-D DCT is defined over M × N samples. These can also be derived from the 2-D GDFT of symmetrically extended sequences, as in the 1-D case. We denote the type-I and the type-II 2-D DCTs of x(m, n) by C1e {x(m, n)} and C2e {x(m, n)}, respectively. 2.3.1.1

Matrix Representation

A 2-D input sequence {x(m, n), 0 ≤ m ≤ M − 1, 0 ≤ n ≤ N − 1} is represented by M × N matrix x. Its DCT is expressed in the following form: T . X = DCT (x) = CM .x.CN

2.3.1.2

(2.163)

Subband Approximation of the Type-II DCT

The approximate DCT computation scheme as discussed earlier, exploiting subband relationship of type-II DCT coefficients, can also be directly extended to the 2-D. Let the low–low subband xLL (m, n) of the image x(m, n) be computed as xLL (m, n) =

1 4 {x(2m, 2n) +

x(2m + 1, 2n) +x(2m, 2n + 1) + x(2m + 1, 2n + 1)}, 0 ≤ m, n ≤

N 2

− 1. (2.164) Let XLL (k, l), 0 ≤ k, l ≤ N2 −1 be the 2D DCT of xLL (m, n). Then the subband approximation of the DCT of x(m, n) is given by [72] πk πl 2cos( 2N ) cos( 2N )XLL (k, l), k, l = 0, 1, ......, N2 − 1, X(k, l) = (2.165) 0, otherwise. Similarly, the low-pass truncated approximation of the DCT is given by 2XLL(k, l), k, l = 0, 1, ...., N2 − 1, X(k, l) = (2.166) 0, otherwise.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

100

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

2.3.1.3

Composition and Decomposition of the DCT Blocks in 2-D

Following the same analysis as presented for 1-D [67], we express the block composition and decomposition operations in 2-D. Let AL,N be the block composition matrix, which combines L N -point DCT blocks into a block of LN -point DCT. Consider L × M number of N × N -DCT blocks in 2-D. Then its composition into a single LN × M N block is expressed as 

  X (LN ×MN ) = A(L,N )   

(N ×N )

X0,0 (N ×N ) X1,0 .. . (N ×N ) XL−1,0

(N ×N )

X0,1 (N ×N ) X1,1 .. . (N ×N ) XL−1,1

··· ··· .. . ···

(N ×N )

X0,M−1 (N ×N ) X1,M−1 .. . (N ×N ) XL−1,M−1



  T A  (M,N ) . 

(2.167) Similarly, for decomposing a DCT block X (LN ×MN ) to L × M DCT blocks of size N × N each, the following expression is used:      

(N ×N )

X0,0 (N ×N ) X1,0 .. . (N ×N ) XL−1,0

2.3.1.4

(N ×N )

X0,1 (N ×N ) X1,1 .. . (N ×N ) XL−1,1

··· ··· .. . ···

(N ×N )

X0,M−1 (N ×N ) X1,M−1 .. .. (N ×N ) XL−1,M−1



   = A−1 X (LN ×MN ) A−1T .  (L,N ) (M,N ) 

(2.168)

Symmetric Convolution and Convolution–Multiplication Properties for 2-D DCT

Like 1-D, similar convolution–multiplication properties also hold here. In particular, operations involving both type-I and type-II even DCTs are stated below [95]. C2e {x(m, n)zh(m, n)} =

C2e {x(m, n)}C1e {h(m, n)},

(2.169)

C1e {x(m, n)zh(m, n)} =

C2e {x(m, n)}C2e {h(m, n)}.

(2.170)

Equations (2.169) and (2.170) involve M × N multiplications for performing the convolution operation in the transform domain. 2.3.1.5

Fast DCT Algorithms

As observed earlier, it is not sufficient to propose or design an equivalent algorithm in the compressed domain. We should also consider the merits and demerits of the scheme with respect to alternative spatial domain processing. A faster DCT computation makes spatial domain processing more attractive as the overhead of forward and inverse transforms gets reduced subsequently. In this section let us review a few of these efficient approaches for computing

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

Image Transforms

101

the DCT coefficients. Various algorithms are reported for computing DCT of a sequence efficiently [3, 24, 25, 26, 37, 38, 41, 74, 88, 146, 157]. Out of them, a few demand special architecture for processing the data. Duhamel and Mida [38] provided a theoretical lower bound on the multiplicative complexity of the 1-D N (= 2n )-point DCT as µ(CN ) = 2n+1 − n − 2,

(2.171)

where the length of the DCT is N = 2n , and µ denotes the minimum number of multiplications required in the computation. Loeffler et al. [88] proposed a fast 1-D 8-point DCT algorithm with 11 multiplications and 29 additions using graph transformations and equivalence relations. This algorithm achieves the theoretical lower bound on the required number of multiplications (that is, 11 for 1-D DCT). In 2-D, algorithms using polynomial transforms [37, 146] are shown to be very efficient. These algorithms require a comparable number of additions and the smallest number of multiplications of all known algorithms, leading to an almost 50% reduction in multiplications required by the conventional fast separable DCT computation. However, polynomial algorithms are more complex for implementation. Cho and Lee [26] introduced a direct 2-D 4 × 4-point DCT algorithm achieving similar computational complexity, but maintaining simple and regular computational structures typical of the direct row–column and the 2-D vector radix DCT algorithms [158]. This algorithm computes the 2-D DCT from four 1-D 4-point DCTs [25]. For determining the number of multiplications and additions they considered applying the fast 1-D DCT algorithm either by Lee [82] or Hou [59]. Thus, their algorithm requires 96 multiplications and 466 additions for the 2-D 8 × 8-point DCT. The theoretical bound of the multiplicative complexity in 2-D is determined by Feig and Winograd [41]. For a 2-D 2n × 2n -point DCT, it is given as µ(CN ⊗ CN ) = 2n (2n+1 − n − 2), (2.172) where the length of the DCT is N = 2n and ⊗ is the Kronecker product and CN ⊗ CN represents the 2-D DCT matrix. They proposed an algorithm for computing the 8 × 8 block DCT, which requires 94 multiplications and 454 additions. Subsequently, Wu and Man [157] pointed out that, using the fast 1-D 8-point DCT algorithm [88] in Cho and Lee’s technique for computing 2D 8 × 8 DCT [25], we may achieve the optimal number of multiplications. The resulting number of multiplications is 8 × 11 = 88, which is the same as the multiplicative lower bound of Eq (2.172). The number of additions remains the same as before (466). However, it is possible to compute even with less number of multiplications if we uses other different operations such as shift, 2’s complement operations, etc. For example, in [5] and [78], two such algorithms are reported that require only 5 multiplications, 29 additions, and a few two’s complement operations (reportedly 16 in [5] and 12 in [78]) for computing an 8-point DCT. Thus,

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

102

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

according to [78], only 80 multiplications, 464 additions, and 192 two’s complement operations are required for computing the 2-D 8×8-point coefficients. The complexities of various 8 × 8 DCT computation algorithms are summarized in Table 2.9. Table 2.9: Complexity comparison of various algorithms for 8 × 8 DCT

††

2.3.2

Algorithm

Year

Ahmed et al. [3] Chen et al. [24] Kamanagar and Rao [74] Vetterli [146] Arai et al. [5] †† Loeffler et al. [88] Feig and Winograd [41] Cho et al. [26] Wu and Man [157]

1974 1977 1982 1985 1988 1989 1992 1993 1998

1-D DCT M A 64 64 16 26 5 11

29 29

2-D DCT M A 1024 1024 224 416 128 430 104 474 80 464 176 464 94 454 96 466 88 466

It also requires additional two’s complements operations Source: From [147] with permission from the author.

2-D Discrete Wavelet Transform

As discussed for separable transforms, the 2-D DWT also can be implemented by applying the 1-D DWT along the rows and columns of an image. The computational steps are described in Figure 2.8. In this figure, the first level of decomposition or analysis of an input image is shown. As a result of this processing, four sets of wavelet coefficients are obtained. They are referred to as approximation (LL), horizontal (HL), vertical (LH), and diagonal (HH) coefficient subbands, respectively. As explained in Chapter 1, in our notation, the first letter L or H corresponds to the application of a low-pass (L) or high-pass (H) filter to the rows, and the second letter refers to the same application to the columns. After filtering, half the samples are dropped by downsampling with a factor of 2 as is done for a 1-D transform. For the next level of dyadic decomposition, the LL subband is decomposed into four subbands in the same way, and the process could be iterated till the lowest level of resolution of representing the image. For reconstructing the image (also known as synthesis operation), inverse operations are performed in the reverse order. The reconstruction starts from the lowest level of subbands, and from each lower level, the next higher level image representation (the corresponding LL subband) is formed. In this computation, first the subbands are upsampled by a factor of two with zero insertions in a way similar to the 1-D synthesis

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

103

Image Transforms

LL

LH

HL

HH

Output Image

Image

1-D DWT along columns

1-D DWT along rows

L

H

1-D IDWT along columns

1-D IDWT along rows

L

H

Figure 2.8: 2-D DWT and IDWT.

process. The upsampled subbands are then filtered by corresponding synthesis filters and the results are added to obtain the reconstructed image for the next higher level. In this case also, efficient DWT and IDWT computations can be performed by lifting stages for individual 1-D transformation. 2.3.2.1

Computational Complexity

Let us consider the cost of filtering for 1-D DWT with the filters h(n) and g(n). Let the corresponding length of these filters be |h| and |g|, respectively. For every output sample, the number of multiplications and additions in convolving an FIR filter of length l are (l + 1) and l, respectively. Hence, for every pair of wavelet subband coefficients ((a(n), d(n))), we require |h| + |g| + 2 multiplications and (|h| + |g|) additions. However, if the filters are symmetric, the |g| number of multiplications gets reduced to (⌈ |h| 2 ⌉ + ⌈ 2 ⌉ + 2). Hence, for implementing the 5/3 filter, we require 7 multiplications and 8 additions for every two samples. In 2-D, these operations are performed twice for every pixel in the reconstructed image. Thus, the number of per-pixel operations in this case is 7 multiplications and 8 additions (7M + 8A). Similarly, 9/7 filtering can be performed with 13 multiplications and 16 additions for every pixel in 2-D. These computations can be performed much faster using lifting schemes. Daubechies discussed in [32] that for even |h| and |g|, the number of operations for 1-D |g| lifting implementation of these filters involve ( |h| 2 + 2 + 2) multiplications and that many number of additions. Typically, 9/7 lifting implementation requires 6 multiplications and 4 additions for every pair of output samples. It implies that, in 2-D, per-pixel computation cost becomes 6M + 8A. However, in 5/3

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

104

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

lifting, multiplication can be performed by right-shift operations. Hence, it requires only 4 additions and 2 shift operations (≈ 4A) for every output pixel in 2-D.

2.4

Summary

Image transforms provide alternative descriptions of images and are useful for image and video compression. There are various techniques for transforming or factorizing an image as a linear combination of orthogonal basis functions. For a finite discrete image, the number of these discrete basis functions (or basis matrices) is also finite, and transformations are invertible. Some of the properties of these transforms, in particular, properties of discrete Fourier transforms, generalized discrete Fourier transforms, trigonometric transforms, discrete cosine transforms, and discrete wavelet transforms were reviewed in this chapter.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

Chapter 3 Image Filtering

3.1 3.2 3.3

3.4

3.5

3.6 3.7

Linear Shift Invariant (LSI) Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Discrete LSI Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Filtering a Finite Length Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.1 Extension by Zero Padding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.1.1 Linear Convolution Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.2 Periodic Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.2.1 Circular Convolution Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.2.2 Linear Convolution Performed through Circular Convolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.3 Antiperiodic Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.3.1 Skew Circular Convolution Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.3.2 Circular Convolution as a Series of Skew Circular Convolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.4 Symmetric Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.4.1 Symmetric Convolution Matrices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.4.2 Linear Convolution through Symmetric Convolution . Block Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.1 Overlapping and Save Methods in the Transform Domain . . . . . 3.4.2 Overlapping and Add Methods in the Transform Domain . . . . . . 3.4.2.1 Filtering with Symmetric FIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.2.2 Filtering with Antisymmetric FIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.2.3 Filtering with an Arbitrary FIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.2.4 Efficient Computation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Filtering 2-D Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5.1 Separable Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5.1.1 Sparse Computation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5.1.2 Computation through Spatial Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5.1.3 Quality of Filtered Images with Sparse Computation . 3.5.2 Nonseparable Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Application of Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6.1 Removal of Blocking Artifacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6.2 Image Sharpening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

106 107 108 108 109 110 110 111 111 112 112 112 113 115 117 118 119 120 123 124 124 126 126 127 128 129 130 132 132 132 134

Filtering of an image or any signal, in general, is the process of emphasizing or attenuating some of its frequency components. Subsequently, the resulting image or signal retains features associated with those frequency components. Image filtering is often required in various applications such as reducing noise, extracting edges and boundaries of objects, interpolating functional values, etc. The term filtering itself is self-explanatory if we consider the representation of a function f (x) in the frequency domain by its Fourier transform, 105

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

106

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

say fb(jω). Given a filtering function b h(jω), where the frequency component at a frequency ω0 is modified by a factor of b h(jω0 ), the filtered output in the frequency domain becomes b g(jω) = b h(jω)fb(jω). Hence, the corresponding processed function in its original domain (say, temporal or spatial domain) becomes the inverse Fourier transform of b g(jω), which is represented in the text as g(x). The filtering function in the frequency space ( b h(jω) in this example) is more commonly referred to as the frequency response or transfer function of the filter. The equivalent operation of filtering in the spatial or temporal domain (original domain of the function) is the convolution of the function with h(x), which is the inverse Fourier transform of b h(jω). This has been already discussed in the previous chapter, where the convolution– multiplication properties of Fourier transform as well as of discrete Fourier transform are discussed (see Sections 2.1.3.1 and 2.2.1.3). However, in this chapter, we briefly review this concept with respect to the analysis of a linear system, in particular a discrete linear system. This would be followed by adaptation of this computation in the block DCT domain, which is different from the frequency domain of the Fourier transform. Convolution–multiplication properties (CMP) with certain restrictions are also applicable to trigonometric transforms, as discussed before (see Chapter 2, Section 2.2.3). We also discuss their suitable adaptation for filtering images in this chapter. Here, initially, we limit our discussion to 1-D only. Later the concepts are extended to 2-D.

3.1

Linear Shift Invariant (LSI) Systems

Definition 3.1 Linear system: A system is said to be linear if a linear combination of inputs provide the same linear combination of their outputs. For example, if responses for inputs x1 and x2 are y1 and y2 , respectively, the response of ax1 + bx2 , where a and b are arbitrary scalar constants, is ay1 + by2 . In our discussion we consider systems processing either time- or space-varying signals into similar forms and thus characterizing them in terms of their input– output responses. Definition 3.2 Shift invariant system: A system is shift invariant if the response of a translated input in its domain maintains the same translation in its original response. For example, if the response of f (x) is g(x), for a shift invariant system, the response of f (x − x0 ) is g(x − x0 ) for all values of x0 . A system is called linear shift invariant (LSI), when it is both linear and shift invariant. For an LSI system, we characterize its behavior from its impulse

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

107

Image Filtering

response, which is the response obtained from the system given a unit infinite impulse (modeled as the Dirac delta function δ(x)) as its input. This is stated in the following theorem. Theorem 3.1 Given the impulse response of an LSI system as h(x), the output response g(x) of an input f (x) is obtained by the following expression. Z ∞ g(x) = f (χ)h(x − χ)dχ. (3.1) −∞

The above operation is also known as the convolution operation and denoted by the operator ‘⋆’ such that g(x) = h⋆f (x). The convolution operation is commutative but not associative. Moreover, for a bounded function, we get a bounded response if and only if its impulse response satisfies the following condition. Z ∞ |h(x)|dx < ∞. (3.2) −∞

We also discussed in the previous chapter that the equivalent operation of convolution in the frequency domain is multiplication, as restated here in the following form. ˆ F(h⋆f (x)) = h(jω) fˆ(jω). (3.3) The above relationship provides the prime motivation for designing filters ˆ in the frequency space by specifying its frequency response h(jω) in terms ˆ ˆ of its magnitude (|h(jω)|) and phase (∠h(jω)) at varying frequency. In this case, the computation of the output is usually performed in the frequency space followed by the inverse Fourier transform to represent the response in its original domain. However, for discrete LSI systems, filters are more often designed in the original space itself by specifying its impulse response, and computations are usually performed in the spatial or temporal domain.

3.2

Discrete LSI Systems

A discrete LSI system processes discrete functions in the form of a sequence f (n), n ∈ Z as defined earlier. The system has the same linear and shiftinvariant properties and can be characterized by the impulse response, which is also a sequence (say, h(n)) at discrete points in its domain sampled with the same periodicity. Hence, the convolution operation of Eq. ( 3.1) is expressed in the discrete domain in the following form: h⋆f (n) =

∞ X

m=−∞

f (m)h(n − m) =

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

∞ X

m=−∞

h(m)f (n − m).

(3.4)

108

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

The foregoing equation provides bounded sequence for a bounded input sequence if h(n) satisfies the following condition: ∞ X

n=−∞

|h(n)| < ∞.

(3.5)

An impulse response h(n) is finite length if ∃ N1 , N2 ∈ Z such that h(k) = 0, ∀k ≤ N1 and ∀k ≥ N2 . Otherwise, the impulse response is called infinite length impulse response. For a finite length impulse response h(n), the system is stable if |h(n)| < ∞, ∀n ∈ Z. In our context, we refer to a discrete LSI system as a filter and its impulse response as the filter response. A filter with finite length impulse response is called a finite impulse response (FIR) filter, whereas a filter with infinite length impulse response is known as an infinite impulse response (IIR) filter. As in most of the applications of image and video processing FIR filters are used, we restrict our discussion to this type of filter.

3.3

Filtering a Finite Length Sequence

Let us consider the filtering of a finite length sequence x(n), 0 ≤ n ≤ N − 1 of length N . Given a finite length impulse response h(n), we investigate the relationship between the output and input of an LSI system. As the finite length sequence is defined only for the interval between 0 and N − 1, let us consider how to exploit this fact by defining functional values at other undefined sample points for modeling certain real-world input conditions or for satisfying certain constraints in computation. The observation window (the interval for the output response) is also the other flexibility in designing this computational model. In the following subsections we discuss the different types of extended definition of the finite length sequence and the corresponding computation for obtaining the output response from the system.

3.3.1

Extension by Zero Padding

This is the usual notion of a finite length sequence by considering x(n) = 0 for n ≥ N and n < 0. In this case, given an impulse response h(n), the linear convolution as given in Eq. (3.4) is applicable. The corresponding CMP holds in the z-transform [100] domain in this case, which is stated in the following theorem. Theorem 3.2 Let the z-transform of x(n) and h(n) be X(Z) and H(Z), respectively. In that case, the z-transform of y(n) = x⋆h(n) is obtained as Y (Z) = H(Z)X(Z),

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

(3.6)

109

Image Filtering

where Y (Z) is the z-transform of y(n).

3.3.1.1

Linear Convolution Matrix

Let us consider a type of FIR filter with an impulse response h(n), 0 ≤ n ≤ L − 1 of length L. It is observed that the output response of this filter has a length of N +L−1 given the input of length N . Accordingly, by considering the observation window between 0 and N + L − 1, the input–output relationship is expressed by the following matrix representation. In this case, as before, a finite length sequence is represented by a column vector. 

where,

 y(0)     y(1) x(0)      x(1)  .         . .      y(L − 1)  = H (N +L−1)×N  . . l        x(L − 1)  .      y(N − 1)    .     . x(N − 1) y(N + L − 1) 

(N +L−1)×N

Hl

h(0) 0  h(1) h(0)   . .   . .  = h(L − 1) h(L − 2)  . .   0 0   . . 0 0

··· ··· ··· ··· ··· ··· ··· ··· ···

0 0 . . h(0) . . . 0

··· ··· ··· ··· ··· ··· ··· ··· ···

(3.7)

 0  0   .   .   . (3.8) 0   .  h(0)    . h(L − 1)

In the above example, we have considered L to be less than N . Given a finite length filter response h(n), we obtain the linear convolution matrix (denoted (N +L−1)×N as Hl ) in Eq. (3.7). The dimension of this matrix is (N +L−1)×N . Due to the linear and distributive property of DCTs, we express Eq. (3.7) in the transform domain as follows: (N +L−1)×N

DCT (y) = DCT (Hl

)DCT (x),

(3.9)

where DCT (.) denotes the appropriate DCT (in 1-D or 2-D with proper dimensionality of a vector or matrix), and y and x denote the output and input column vectors, respectively.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

110

3.3.2

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

Periodic Extension

The periodic extension of x(n) with a period N implies that x(N + n) = x(n). In this case, a filter with impulse response with the same periodicity N generates an output with the periodicity N . With this property, we also consider the periodic extension of an FIR filter with a response h(n), 0 ≤ n ≤ N − 1 of length N . By keeping the observation window between 0 and N − 1, the output of this system is obtained by the circular convolution as discussed in the previous chapter. The operator for this operation is denoted in this text as ⊛, and the operation is shown below. y(n) = x(n) ⊛ h(n) =

n X

m=0

x(m)h(n − m) +

N −1 X

m=n+1

x(m)h(n − m + N ). (3.10)

It has been discussed in the previous chapter that the convolution– multiplication property for the circular convolution holds in the discrete Fourier transform space. This is restated here in the following theorem. Theorem 3.3 Let DFT of x(n) and h(n) be x b(k) and b h(k), respectively. In that case, the DFT of y(n) = x(n) ⊛ h(n) is obtained as yb(k) = b h(k)b x(k),

(3.11)

where yb(k) is the DFT of y(n). 3.3.2.1

Circular Convolution Matrix

As in the case of linear convolution we express the computation of circular convolution with a convolution matrix (say, HcN ×N ) in the following form.     y(0) x(0)  y(1)   x(1)      N ×N    , . . (3.12)   = Hc       . . y(N − 1) x(N − 1) where,

HcN ×N



h(0) h(N − 1)  h(1) h(0)  . . =   . . h(N − 1) h(N − 2)

··· ··· ··· ··· ···

 h(1) h(2)  .  . .  h(0)

(3.13)

From Eq. ( 3.3) we find that the N -point DFT matrix diagonalizes the circular convolution matrix. Hence, the basis vectors of the corresponding DFT become the eigenvectors [55], and the DFT coefficients of h(n) are the eigen-values [55] of this convolution matrix. Due to the linear and distributive property of DCTs, a relationship similar to Eq. (3.9) also holds here. But it is less efficient to compute with DCT coefficients in this form than that with DFT coefficients.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

111

Image Filtering

3.3.2.2

Linear Convolution Performed through Circular Convolution

As linear convolution is the requirement for processing an input sequence with an FIR filter, it is of interest to adapt the circular convolution operation to perform similar task. In this case, given an impulse response h(n) of length L and an input sequence x(n) of length N , the sequence is padded with adequate number of trailing zeroes to both these sequences so that their length becomes equal. The circular convolution of these zero-padded sequences provides a result similar to that is obtained by the linear convolution of x(n) and h(n). In the previous subsection we have observed that the length of the output for linear convolution under this circumstance becomes N + L − 1. Hence, in this case, the number of trailing zeroes to be added for h(n) and x(n) should be at least N − 1 and L − 1, respectively. With this extension, the circular convolution between them (both of length N +L−1) produces the same output sequence. Hence, we require N + L − 1-point DFT to perform the equivalent operation in the frequency domain.

3.3.3

Antiperiodic Extension

In an antiperiodic extension, x(n) is defined outside the interval between 0 and N − 1 as x(N + n) = −x(n), where N is the period of antiperiodicity. The extended signal has the strict periodicity of 2N . In this case, if a finite impulse response h(n), 0 ≤ n ≤ N − 1 is extended antiperiodically in the same way, its convolution with the extended x(n) produces an output with the same (N ) antiperiodicity. By keeping the observation window restricted between 0 and N − 1, the convolution expression is expressed in the following form. y(n) = x(n) s h(n) =

n X

x(m)h(n− m)−

m=0

N −1 X

x(m)h(n− m+ N ). (3.14)

m=n+1

This type of convolution is called skew circular convolution and is denoted by the operator s. In this case, the CMP is true for odd frequency discrete Fourier transform (OFDFT) (see Section 2.2.2 of Chapter 2), which is restated in the following form. Theorem 3.4 Let x b 21 ,0 (k) and b h 12 ,0 (k) be the OFDFTs of x(n) and h(n), respectively. The OFDFT of their skew circular convolved output y(n) = x(n)sh(n) is obtained by the following expression. h 21 ,0 (k)b x 21 ,0 (k), yb21 ,0 (k) = b

where yb21 ,0 (k) is the OFDFT of y(n).

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

(3.15)

112 3.3.3.1

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

Skew Circular Convolution Matrix

As before, we also express the convolution operation with the help of matrix operations and denote the corresponding convolution matrix as HsN ×N . The convolution matrix takes the following form:   h(0) −h(N − 1) · · · −h(1)  h(1) h(0) · · · −h(2)   N ×N  . . ··· .  Hs = (3.16) .  . . ··· .  h(N − 1) h(N − 2) · · · h(0)

The skew circular convolution matrix is obtained from the circular convolution matrix by negating its elements above the main diagonal. 3.3.3.2

Circular Convolution as a Series of Skew Circular Convolution

In [110] it is shown that circular convolution is performed by a series of skew circular convolution by partitioning the sequence at each stage and, subsequently, the output is obtained as a concatenation of results from individual partitions. Let us consider the partitioning of the input sequence x(n) of length N into two N2 halves x1 (n), 0 ≤ n ≤ N2 − 1, and x2 (n), N2 ≤ n ≤ N − 1. Now, Eq. (3.12) is rewritten in the following form. y1 A B x1 = . (3.17) y2 B A x2 In the above equation, A and B are submatrices of HcN ×N of dimension N2 × N2 , and y1 and y2 are subcolumn vectors corresponding to two halves of the output response. Eq. (3.17) is also written in the following form: y1 y2

= =

1 2 (A 1 2 (A

+ B)(x1 + x2 ) + 12 (A − B)(x1 − x2 ), + B)(x1 + x2 ) − 12 (A − B)(x1 − x2 ).

(3.18)

It can be shown that 12 (A + B) and 21 (A − B) are circular convolution and skew-circular convolution matrices, respectively. This process is iterated by partitioning y1 in the same way till we get a trivial circular convolution matrix (of dimension 2 × 2). In [110], an efficient computation of skew circular convolution of a real sequence is described by using the generalized DFT.

3.3.4

Symmetric Extension

In Section 2.2.3.1 of chapter 2, we have discussed the different types of symmetric extension of a finite sequence and their implications in definitions of various discrete trigonometric transforms such as type-I to type-IV even and odd DCT s as well as DSTs. We have also listed several CMPs as applicable

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

113

Image Filtering

Table 3.1: Convolution–multiplication properties for symmetrically extended sequences involving type-II even DCT and type-II even DST Symmetric extensions

Ranges of

Convolution–multiplication

h(n)

x(n)

h(n)

x(n)

WSWS

HSHS

0 →N

0 →N −1

y(n) = e x e (n) ⊛ h(n)

property

WSWS

HAHA

0 →N

0 →N −1

0 → N −1

√ 2N C1e (h(n))C2e (x(n)) √ S2e (y(n)) = 2N C1e (h(n))S2e (x(n))

WAWA

HSHS

1 →N

0 →N −1

0 → N −1

S2e (y(n)) =

WAWA

HAHA

1 →N

0 →N −1

0 → N −1

−C2e (y(n)) =

0 → N −1

C2e (y(n)) =

√ 2N S1e (h(n))C2e (x(n)) √

2N S1e (h(n))S2e (x(n))

to different pairs of symmetrically extended sequences. In this chapter we observe the structure and properties of convolution matrices for various pairs of symmetrically extended sequences. Later on we explore their applicability in designing algorithms for filtering in the block DCT domain. In our discussion we restrict our attention to those convolution–multiplication properties that involve either a type-II even DCT or a type-II even DST. The corresponding types of extensions and their CMPs are shown in Table 3.1. In the table, the output sequence y(n) is computed as the circular convolution of the extended sequences obtained from x(n) (denoted by x e(n)) and h(n) (denoted by e h(n)), respectively. The type of corresponding extensions are also shown in respective entries of the table. We use here same notations for representing different types of even DCTs and DSTs as used in the previous chapter (Section 2.2.3.3 of Chapter 2). 3.3.4.1

Symmetric Convolution Matrices

Let us study the structure of the convolution matrices for the cases mentioned in Table 3.1. Let us represent the corresponding convolution matrix with the notation Ha,b such that a ∈ {W A, W S} and b ∈ {HA, HS} for performing convolution between h(n) and x(n) by extending them according to the symmetry (or antisymmetry) a and b at their both ends, respectively. The dimension of Ha,b is N × N , such that y = Ha,b x,

(3.19)

where y and x are column vectors of length N for the output and input, respectively. In [79] it has been shown that Ha,b s can be expressed as linear combination of the following matrices. Let us denote these matrices as H1 , H2 , H3 , and

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

114

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

H4 . They are given below.  h(0)

0

··· 2  h(0) ···  h(1) 2  . . ···  H1 =  . . ···   h(N − 2) h(N − 3) · · · h(N − 1) h(N − 2) · · · 

h(1)   h(2)  .  H2 =  .   h(N − 1) h(N ) 2

 h(0)

    H3 =     

    H4 =    

2

0 . . 0 0

0 0 . . 0 h(N ) 2

h(2) h(3) . . h(N ) 2

0

h(1) · · · h(0) ··· 2 . ··· . ··· 0 ··· 0 ··· 0 0 . .

··· ··· ··· ··· ··· ···

0 0 . . h(0) 2

h(1)

h(N − 1) h(N ) 2

. . 0 0

0 0 . . 0 h(0) 2



    ,   

h(N ) 2

0 . . 0 0



    ,   

 h(N − 2) h(N − 1)  h(N − 3) h(N − 2)  . .  , . .   h(0)  h(1) 2 h(0) 0 2

··· ··· ··· ··· h(N ) ··· 2 h(N − 1) · · ·

0 h(N ) 2

. . h(3) h(2)

h(N ) 2

(3.20)

(3.21)

(3.22)



 h(N − 1)  .  . .   h(2)  h(1)

(3.23)

Finally, Ha,b s are expressed by foregoing matrices as follows: HW S,HS HW A,HS HW S,HA HW A,HA

= = = =

(H1 + H3 ) + (H2 + H4 ), (H1 − H3 ) + (H2 − H4 ), (H1 + H3 ) − (H2 + H4 ), (H1 − H3 ) − (H2 − H4 ).

(3.24)

We find that H3 = H1T . Both H1 + H3 and H1 − H3 are Toeplitz matrices 1 . However, the former is a symmetric matrix and the latter is an antisymmetric one. Similarly, H2 + H4 and H2 − H4 are symmetric and antisymmetric Hankel matrices,2 respectively. From the convolution–multiplication properties, 1 Elements 2 Elements

along diagonals of a Toeplitz matrix are of the same values. along off-diagonals of a Hankel matrix are of the same values.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

Image Filtering

115

diagonalizations of these matrices are expressed by the following equation. √ −1 HW S,HS = C T D( √2N {C1e h}N )C, 0 N −1 T HW A,HS = S D1√ ( 2N {S1e h}1 )C, (3.25) HW S,HA = S T D( 2N√ {C1e h}N 1 )S, −1 HW A,HA = −C T D−1 ( 2N {S1e h}N )S. 1 where C and S are the type-II even DCT and DST matrices, respectively. Similarly, C1e and S1e are the respective type-I even DCT and DST matrices. D(x) denotes the diagonalization of a column vector x of length N into a diagonal matrix of N × N whose diagonal element at ith row is x(i). Similarly, Dm (.) denotes a square matrix generated from its input column vector such that its mth off-diagonal elements 3 are formed from it. Finally, {x}qp denotes the column vector formed from x from its pth element to the qth one. 3.3.4.2

Linear Convolution through Symmetric Convolution

Symmetric convolution can also be used to perform the linear convolution of a sequence x(n) of length N with an impulse response h(n) of length L. However, h(n) should have points of symmetry or antisymmetry so that one half of it (or part of it) generates the complete sequence through symmetric extensions. Types of symmetric extensions at its two ends (of the selected part) as well as the chosen symmetric extensions of the input signal determine the type of convolution to be performed eventually. Under the context of CMPs involving only type-II even DCT and DST (see Table 3.1), impulse responses should have a form such that symmetric extension of type Whole-sample Symmetric, and Whole-sample Symmetric (WSWS), or Whole-sample Antisymmetric, and Whole-sample Antisymmetric (WAWA) generates it fully. Such an example is shown in Figure 3.1(a) and (b). In this case, the WSWS extension applied to the right half of Figure 3.1(a) (i.e., Figure 3.1(b) itself) generates itself. Hence, for performing equivalent linear convolution, we need to pad zeroes to the input sequence (say, as shown in Figure 3.1(c)) not only to its end but also to its beginning. Given the length of the impulse response as L, we require L+1 2 number of zeroes to be added at both its ends. Similarly, for the WAWA type of extension to the right half of an impulse response (and thus generating the full response through this extension), it requires L−1 number 2 of zeroes to be added at both ends of the input data for obtaining the same result of a linear convolution. We present here in Table 3.2 from [95] the full list of number of zeroes required to be added at both ends for every type of symmetric extension. Depending on the type of convolution, which is again determined by the types of symmetric extensions to the filter response as well as to the input sequence, we should apply the appropriate convolution– 3 The mth off-diagonal is formed by the (i, j)th elements of the matrix such that j−i = m. An element x(k) of the vector x is inserted into the kth appearance of a matrix-location satisfying the above property while scanning its rows and columns from left to right and top to bottom.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

116

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

(a)

(b)

(c)

(d)

Figure 3.1: (a) Impulse response, (b) right-half response, (c) input sequence, and (d) zero-padded input sequence. multiplication property (see Table 3.1). In this computation, we have to take care of the boundary conditions of the input data and adapt it accordingly before applying the transformations. The preceding and trailing zeroes of input data provide the equivalent condition of a finite length sequence for a linear convolution. However, this may not be ideal for a block-based computation. We elaborate on this in the next section. Table 3.2: Number of zeroes required to be added at both ends for every type of symmetric extensions Left end symmetry WS

WS L+1 2

Right end symmetry WA HS HA L−1 L−1 L−1 2 2 2

WA

L+1 2

L−1 2

L−1 2

L−1 2

HS

L 2

L −1 2

L 2

L 2

HA

L 2

L −1 2

L 2

L 2

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

117

Image Filtering

3.4

Block Filtering

Processing input data in blocks is quite common in several applications of image and signal processing. In particular, block processing is quite common in compression of audio, images, and videos. In this type of representation, the advantages lie in keeping the buffer requirement low, introducing inherent parallelism, and opening up opportunity for designing pipelined architecture for the computation. Hence, in this section, we review the approaches for filtering sequences partitioned into blocks of a fixed size (say M ). Let us consider filtering of an input sequence x(n) with a finite impulse reN sponse h(n). Let the input sequence x(n), 0 ≤ n ≤ N −1 be partitioned into M subsequences of length M (assume N is a multiple of M ). Let the ith partition N be denoted as xi (n), 0 ≤ i ≤ M − 1, iM ≤ n ≤ (i + 1)M − 1. In a block filtering, the objective is to design the equivalent filtering technique of the sequence x(n) by processing a block or a set of neighboring blocks. There are two basic approaches for block filtering, namely, the overlapping and add method and the overlapping and save method. In the overlapping and add method, each block (say, xi ) is independently filtered (say, yi (n) = xi (n)⋆h(n)), assuming that their boundaries in both the directions are padded with zeroes. Finally, the sum total of all such responses provides the same result as obtained by N −1 M X filtering the whole sequence at a time (i.e y(n) = x(n)⋆h(n) = yi (n)). i=0

For the ith block filtering with h(n) of length L generates a sequence yi (n) of length M + L − 1 in between iM and (i + 1)M + L − 1.

In the overlapping and save method, for each block (say, the ith block), its adjacent neighboring blocks in both the directions are concatenated together in larger block, and this acts as the input to the convolution operation. If the length of adjacent data is sufficient enough to provide the necessary intervals of stimulation affecting its response around every sample point of the central block (that is, the ith block), it is sufficient to save the response associated with the central block in the resulting output stream. The number of adjacent blocks required for concatenation depends on the length of the impulse response. For a causal system, it is sufficient to concatenate only the block L to its left. For a length L, we need to concatenate at least ⌈ M ⌉ number of blocks from its left. However, for a noncausal response, we need to concatenate from both sides. Suppose h(n) is defined in an interval between −(L − 1) and (L − 1). In that case, the number of blocks to be concatenated from both end L is also ⌈ M ⌉.

While designing efficient algorithms, we may restrict computations pertaining to the central block only following both the approaches. Eventually, this makes both the computations equivalent. We discuss next how these ap-

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

118

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

proaches are adapted in the transform domain, namely, in the block DCT domain.

3.4.1

Overlapping and Save Methods in the Transform Domain

A useful technique under this category was reported by Kresch and Merhav [79]. They have performed filtering of blocks using convolution–multiplication properties for both DCTs and DSTs, and their method is applicable to any arbitrary type of FIR, be it a symmetric noncausal or an asymmetric causal sequence. Consider the extended neighborhood of a block xi with (i − 1)th and (i + 1)th block such that the ith output block yi is obtained from the convolution with an FIR h(n), −N ≤ n ≤ N . By matrix notation, we can write it in the following form.   xi−1 + yi = H2 (H1+ + H1− ) H2−  xi  . (3.26) xi+1 where H1+ (= H1p ) and H2+ (= H2p ΦN ) are formed from the nonnegative half of the impulse response (that is, hp (n) = {h(0), h(1), · · · , 2h(N )}) as shown in Eqs. (3.20) and (3.21), respectively. Similarly, H1− (= H3m ) and H2− (= H4m ΦN ) are defined from the nonpositive half of the impulse response (that is, hm (n) = {h(0), h(−1), · · · , 2h(−N )}) following Eqs. (3.22) and (3.23), respectively. ΦN is the N × N flipping matrix and given by the following form.   0 ··· 0 1 0 · · · 1 0  ΦN =  (3.27) 0 · · · 0 0 . 1 ··· 0 0 We find that CN ΦN = ΨN CN and SN ΦN = ΨN SN , where ΨN = −1 D({(−1)m }N m=0 ). From Eqs. (3.24) and (3.25), the above relationship is expressed in the transform domain in the following form. Note that we have used both the DCT and DST of input blocks in our expression (see Eq. (3.28)). The DCT of a block xi is denoted as Xic , whereas its DST is denoted by Xis . Yic

=

√

1 (D(√ 4

c 2N {C1e hp }N−1 )(Xic + ΨXi−1 ) 0 p N−1 c c +D( 2N {C h } )(X + ΨX ) 1e i i−1 0 √ c −D−1 (√2N S1e {hm }N−1 )(Xic − ΨXi+1 ) 1 m N−1 c c +D−1 ( 2N√ S1e {h }1 )(Xi − ΨXi+1 ) T p N s s +CN S (D( 2N {C h } )(X − ΨX 1e 1 i i−1 ) √N c c +D1√ ( 2N S1e {hp }N−1 )(X + ΨX ) i i−1 1 s s +D( √2N {C1e hm }N 1 )(Xi − ΨXi−1 ) m N−1 c c +D1 ( 2N S1e {h }1 )(Xi + ΨXi+1 ))).

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

(3.28)

Image Filtering

119

The above expression could be further simplified for symmetric, antisymmetric, and causal responses. As the input is assumed to be available in the block DCT space, efficient cosine-to-sine transformation (CST) and sine-to-cosine transformation (SCT) are presented in [79]. In a different approach, Yim [165] used the linear and distributive properties of DCTs for developing efficient algorithms for filters with symmetric response. In this case, the submatrices of the convolution matrix in Eq. (3.26) hold the following relation. H2+ = (H2− )T .

(3.29)

Considering H0 = H1+ + H1− , Eq. (3.26) is rewritten in the block DCT domain as follows. c c Yic = DCT (H2+ )Xi−1 + DCT (H0 )Xic + DCT (H2− )Xi+1 .

(3.30)

Exploiting the properties of DCT matrices and the symmetry in the response, Yim [165] proposed an efficient computation in the 8 × 8 block DCT space.

3.4.2

Overlapping and Add Methods in the Transform Domain

In these methods, the contribution of an input block to the filtered response of neighboring blocks and also to itself is measured in isolation from others [107]. In the block DCT domain, this is computed in three steps, namely, 1. The block, X, is padded with zero neighbors and merged into a single larger block, say Xl . 2. Apply CMPs to the larger block for computing the filtered response in the transform domain. 3. Decompose the larger block into smaller ones, each providing the respective contribution to the neighboring blocks (including the central one). Finally, the sum total of all such contributions from its neighbors, including its own response, provides the filtered response for the block. The first and third steps in the above involve multiplication of DCT blocks with block composition and decomposition matrices as discussed in the previous chapter. We use the same notation for denoting them in subsequent discussion. Accordingly, A(L,N ) denotes the block composition matrix for merging L adjacent N -point DCT blocks into a single LN point DCT block. For computing the filtered output of any general arbitrary response (that is, noncausal asymmetric FIR), only two of the CMPs as described in Table 3.1 are used. They correspond to the the first and last rows of the table. As the last one involves the DST, we need to convert DCT blocks into a DST

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

120

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

block. We refer to this operation as DST composition. The DST composition matrix for transforming L adjacent DCT blocks of length N into a DST block of length LN is denoted by B(L,N) and is given by the following expression.  T  CN 0N · · · 0N  0N C T · · · 0N  N . B(L,N ) = SLN  (3.31)  . . ··· .  T 0N 0N · · · CN

As before, in the above equation, SLN is the LN -point type-II DST matrix, and CN is the N -point type-II DCT matrix. In subsequent subsections we present the properties and theorems related to filtering with different types of FIRs. 3.4.2.1

Filtering with Symmetric FIR

Let us consider the impulse response as h(n), −L ≤ n ≤ L. It is symmetric if h(n) = h(−n). From the related CMP, as discussed earlier, it is sufficient to compute with its positive half h(n), 0 ≤ n ≤ L. Let it be denoted as h+ (n). However, to make the operation equivalent to the linear convolution, we need to compute with an extended neighborhood. The extent of this neighborhood depends upon the length of the filter (that is, 2L+1). So, given a block size N , L the number of adjacent blocks to be merged is ⌈ N ⌉. Let us restrict ourselves to the case L ≤ N . Hence, only two neighboring blocks are to be merged during the computation. We now state a theorem accounting for the contributions from neighboring blocks of the ith input block. Theorem√3.5 Consider a matrix U of size 3N × 3N such that U = −1 I AT(3,N ) D({ 6NC3N h+ }3N )A(3,N ) and its N × N submatrices Uij , 1 ≤ i, j ≤ 0 3 are defined as follows:   U11 U12 U13 U = U21 U22 U23  . U31 U32 U33

Let Xi be the i-th DCT block, and Yi be the DCT of the filtered output at the same location. Then, Yi is given by the following expression:   Xi−1 (3.32) Yi = Es Fs Gs  Xi  . Xi+1 where Es = U32 , Fs = U22 , and Gs = U12 .

Proof: Let us consider the contribution of a single block X to its neighboring blocks. For this we compute the filtered response by composing a larger block

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

Image Filtering

121

surrounding X with zeroes. This computation is based on the same overlap and add principle and is shown in the following:   0N Y = U X , 0N (from Eq. (2.94) and Eq. (2.110)). (3.33)   U12 X = U22 X  . U32 X From Eq. (3.33) we determine the contributions of the (i − 1)th and (i + 1)th neighboring blocks toward the i-th block, and its response Yi is expressed in the form of Eq. (3.32). The matrices Es , Fs , and Gs are referred to as filtering matrices. From Theorem 3.5 we obtain their relationship with submatrices of A3,N . Let us use the same notation for denoting the the submatrices of A3,N as Ai,j , 0 ≤ i, j ≤ 2, each√of dimension N × N . Similarly, we also denote diagonal submatrices −1 I of D({ 6NC3N h+ }3N ) as Di = Di,i , 0 ≤ i ≤ 2 . With these, the filtering 0 matrices are expressed in the following form. Es Fs Gs

= = =

AT0,2 D1 A0,1 + AT1,2 D2 A1,1 + AT2,2 D3 A2,1 , AT0,1 D1 A0,1 + AT1,1 D2 A1,1 + AT2,1 D3 A2,1 , AT0,0 D1 A0,1 + AT1,0 D2 A1,1 + AT2,0 D3 A2,1 .

(3.34)

Theorem 3.6 Filtering matrices (as defined in Theorem 3.5) have the following properties. 1. Fs is a symmetric matrix. 2. Fs (k, l) = 0 if k + l is odd. 3. Es (k, l) = (−1)k+l Gs (k, l). Proof: For proving these properties, we take the help of Theorems 2.14 and 2.15 as shown below: √ −1 I 1. U (= AT(3,N ) D({ 6NC3N h+ }3N )A(3,N ) of Theorem 3.5) is symmetric 0 −1 as it is in the form of U DU , where D is a diagonal matrix. Hence, Fs (= U1,1 ) is also symmetric. 2. Let us consider a matrix Si = ATi,1 Di Ai,1 . Let the tth diagonal element (at tth row) of Di be denoted as d(t). Hence, an element of Si is expressed

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

122

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

as follows: N −1 X

Si (k, l) =

t=0 N −1 X

=

ATi,1 (k, t)d(t)Ai,1 (t, l), (3.35) Ai,1 (t, k)d(t)Ai,1 (t, l).

t=0

Now, from Theorem 2.14, if k and l are of opposite polarities, either Ai,1 (t, k) = 0 or Ai,1 (t, l) = 0. This implies that S(k, l) is zero if k + l is 2 X odd. As Fs = Si , Fs (k, l) = 0 if k + l is odd. i=0

3. Let Si,0 = ATi,0 Di Ai,1 and Si,2 = ATi,2 Di Ai,1 . From Theorem 2.15, Ai,0 (k, l) = (−1)k+l Ai,2 (k, l). Hence,

Si,0 (k, l) = = =

N −1 X

t=0 N −1 X

ATi,0 (k, t)d(t)Ai,1 (t, l), Ai,0 (t, k)d(t)Ai,1 (t, l),

(3.36)

t=0 N −1 X

(−1)t+k Ai,2 (t, k)d(t)Ai,1 (t, l).

t=0

Next we consider two cases separately, one for l as even and the other for l as odd. For even l: In Eq. (3.36) all Ai,1 (t, l) for odd t becomes zero (see Theorem 2.14). Hence, N 2

Si,0 (k, l) =

−1 X (−1)2m+k (Ai,2 (2m, k)

m=0

d(2m)Ai,1 (2m, l)) N 2

=

−1 X (−1) (Ai,2 (2m, k)

(3.37)

k

m=0

=

d(2m)Ai,1 (2m, l)) (−1)k Si,2 (k, l)

For odd l: In Eq. (3.36) all Ai,1 (t, l) for even t becomes zero (see Theorem

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

123

Image Filtering

2.14). Hence, N 2

−1 X (−1)2m+1+k (Ai,2 (2m + 1, k)

Si,0 (k, l) =

m=0

d(2m + 1)Ai,1 (2m + 1, l)) N 2

k+1

−1 X (Ai,2 (2m + 1, k)

=

(−1)

=

d(2m + 1)Ai,1 (2m + 1, l)) (−1)k+1 Si,2 (k, l)

(3.38)

m=0

From Eqs. (3.37) and (3.38), it follows that Si,0 (k, l) = (−1)k+l Si,2 (k, l) As Es =

2 X

Si,0 and Gs =

i=0

Es (k, l) = (−1)k+l Gs (k, l).

2 X

(3.39)

Si,2 ,

i=0

3.4.2.2

Filtering with Antisymmetric FIR

In this case, the approach is similar to the previous one. However, it applies a different CMP and models skewcircular convolution in its equivalent computation. A filter response h(n) is antisymmetric when h(n) = −h(−n). Note that, in this case, h(0) = 0. Hence, the complete specification of the filter can be obtained from the strict positive half of the response such as h(n), 1 ≤ n ≤ L. Let this portion of the response be denoted as hp (n). Here, the filtered response is computed in the DCT space by applying the last CMP of Table 3.1. This demands conversion of adjacent input DCT blocks into a DST block. The input–output relationship for filtering with antisymmetric FIR is expressed in the following theorem. Theorem 3.7 a matrix V √ Consider I AT(3,N ) D−1 ({ 6NS3N hp }13N −1 )B(3,N ) i, j ≤ 3, are defined as follows:  V11 V = V21 V31

of size 3N × 3N such that V = and its N × N submatrices Vij , 1 ≤ V12 V22 V32

 V13 V23  . V33

Let Xi be the i-th DCT block, and Yi be the DCT of the filtered output at the same location. Then, Yi is given by the following expression:   Xi−1 (3.40) Yi = − Ea Fa Ga  Xi  , Xi+1 where Ea = V32 , Fa = V22 , and Ga = V12 .

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

124

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

Similar to the filtering matrices of symmetric FIR, Ea , Fa , and Ga are found to have the following properties. The proof is of similar in nature and is omitted from the text. Theorem 3.8 Filtering matrices (as defined in Theorem 3.7) have the following properties. 1. Fa (k, l) = 0, if k + l is even. 2. Ea (k, l) = (−1)k+l+1 Ga (k, l). 3.4.2.3

Filtering with an Arbitrary FIR

By using the above two methods, we compute filtered output for any arbitrary FIR in the block DCT space. This is achieved by expressing any arbitrary FIR h(n) as a sum of symmetric response hs (n) and antisymmetric response ha (n) such that hs (n) = 21 (h(n) + h(−n)), and ha (n) = 21 (h(n) − h(−n)). Let us rename h+ (n) as hs (n), 0 ≤ n ≤ L, and hp (n) as ha (n), 1 ≤ n ≤ L. Hence, by applying both the Theorems 3.5 and 3.7, we easily obtain the following input–output relationship. Theorem 3.9

Yi = E

F

  Xi−1 G  Xi  , Xi+1

where E = Es − Ea , F = Fs − Fa and G = Gs − Ga .

(3.41)

For symmetric h(n), Ea = Fa = Ga = 0N . Similarly, for antisymmetric h(n), Es = Fs = Gs = 0N . For a causal impulse response, G = 0N , implying Gs = Ga . Again, from Theorems 3.6 and 3.8 in this case (for a causal response), E = 2Es = −2Ea . 3.4.2.4

Efficient Computation

In each of the above cases, computation essentially involves multiplication and addition of matrices of dimensions N × N . Instead of performing computation by direct multiplication and addition of filtering matrices, we adopt a more efficient policy by using modified filtering matrices as derived from the original ones: s) Ps = (Es +G , 2 s) Qs = (Es −G , 2 (3.42) a) Pa = (Ea +G , 2 a) Qa = (Ea −G . 2

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

125

Image Filtering

The choice of these derived matrices is primarily motivated by the fact that they are relatively sparse, as can be observed from the properties of Theorems 3.6 and 3.8. The following theorem states the extent of sparsity of these matrices. Theorem 3.10 Each of the matrices Fs , Ps , Qs , Fa , Pa , and Qa has at least N 2 zeroes in each row or each column. Hence, the number of multiplications (nm ) and additions (na ) required for multiplying one of these matrices with an input block of size N are given as nm na

2

= N2 , = ( N2 − 1)N.

(3.43)

Using derived filtering matrices, efficient computation for both the noncausal symmetric and antisymmetric filtering operations are designed. As steps of these computations are similar for both cases, they are shown in Table 3.3. In this table, the corresponding filtering matrices are denoted by P , Q, and F , respectively. Their roles should be considered under the respective context of the type of responses. Instead of computing all individual contributions of neighbors at the same stage, for efficient handling of input data, contributions of a single block (say, the ith block) to its neighboring blocks are computed at the same time. They are subsequently buffered and pipelined in the process of accumulation for both the (i − 1)th and (i + 1)th blocks (see the last step of Table 3.3). Table 3.3: Computational steps and associated complexities of filtering an input DCT block of size N with symmetric or nonsymmetric responses Steps K = P Xi L = QXi Wi = F Xi Ui = K + L Vi = K − L Yi = Ui+1 + Wi + Vi−1 Total

nm N2 2 N2 2 N2 2

2 3 N 2

na N ( N2 N ( N2 N ( N2

− 1) − 1) − 1) N N

2N + 2)

N (3N 2

In the more general case of filtering with arbitrary noncausal and causal response, it is observed that the sparsity of derived matrices does not provide any additional advantage. In this case, it is required to employ direct matrix operations with original filter matrices such as E, F , and G. For noncausal cases, it takes 3N 2 multiplications and 3N 2 − N additions for N samples,

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

126

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

Table 3.4: Per sample computational cost of filtering in 1-D Impulse response type Symmetric Antisymmetric Causal Noncausal arbitrary

nm 3N 2 3N 2

2N 3N

na 3N+2 2 3N+2 2

2N − 1 3N − 1

whereas for causal filters the numbers are 2N 2 and 2N 2 − N , respectively. Computational complexities of different cases are summarized in Table 3.4.

3.5

Filtering 2-D Images

The methods discussed above for 1-D are easily extended to 2-D if the impulse response is separable. However, for nonseparable cases, we need to employ different strategies. We discuss below the filtering of images with both separable and nonseparable filters in the DCT domain.

3.5.1

Separable Filters

For separable filters, a finite impulse h(m, n) can be written in the form of h(m, n) = h1 (m)h2 (n), −L ≤ m, n ≤ L. Let us represent the (i, j)th input block as xi,j in 2-D, and its corresponding type-II DCT as Xi,j . The inputoutput theorems in 1-D can easily be extended to 2-D. We present below the extension of Theorem 3.9 as it is stated in a more generic framework. Theorem 3.11 Let h(m, n) = h1 (m)h2 (n), −L ≤ m, n ≤ L be the finite impulse response of a separable filter. Let us express each kernel function (h1 (n) or h2 (n)) of the separable function as a sum of a pair of symmetric and antisymmetric functions as described below: h1s (n) h1a (n) h2s (n) h2a (n)

= = = =

1 2 (h1 (n) 1 2 (h1 (n) 1 2 (h2 (n) 1 2 (h2 (n)

+ h1 (−n)), − h1 (−n)), + h2 (−n)), − h2 (−n)).

(3.44)

Let E1s , F1s , and G1s be the filter matrices corresponding to the response h1s (n) formed according to Theorem 3.5. Similarly, E2s , F2s , and G2s are formed from h2s (n). For the antisymmetric component h1a (n)( h2a (n)), these are E1a (E2a ), F1a (F2a ), and G1a (G2a ), respectively (from Theorem 3.7).

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

127

Image Filtering

Table 3.5: Per-pixel computational cost of filtering in 2-D Impulse response type Symmetric Antisymmetric Causal Noncausal arbitrary

nm 3N 3N 4N 6N

na 3N + 2 3N + 2 4N − 2 6N − 2

Then, the DCT of the filtered output of (i, j)th block, Yi,j , is given by the following expression:  T  E2 Xi−1,j−1 Xi−1,j Xi−1,j+1 Xi,j Xi,j+1  F2T  , Yi,j = E1 F1 G1  Xi,j−1 (3.45) Xi+1,j−1 Xi+1,j Xi+1,j+1 GT2 where E1 = E1s − E1a , F1 = F1s − F1a , and G1 = G1s − G1a . Similarly, E2 = E2s − E2a , F2 = F2s − F2a , and G2 = G2s − G2a .

Due to the separability property of the impulse response, filtered outputs are computed in two stages. First, the computation is carried out along the vertical direction, and next, it is applied along the horizontal direction. Hence, for separable responses, the computation in Theorem 3.11 is expressed in the following equivalent form:   Xi−1,j Zi,j = E1 F1 G1  Xi,j  , Xi+1,j   (3.46) T E2T Yi,j = Zi,j−1 Zi,j Zi,j+1 F2  . GT2

For each stage of computation we adopt similar computation strategies of 1-D as charted in Table 3.3. Thus, per-pixel computational costs for different types of filter responses are given in Table 3.5. Similar strategies are also adopted for other methods [79, 165] in 1-D. 3.5.1.1

Sparse Computation

In the block DCT space, we may opt for computing with a sparse DCT block. As in most cases, higher frequency components are of smaller magnitudes, they may not be considered during computation, and only first N2 × N2 lowfrequency coefficients are used for this purpose. This may be applicable to a few selected blocks, even at times for all the input blocks. This type of computation is termed here as sparse computation. In the overlapping and add

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

128

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

Table 3.6: Per-pixel computational cost of filtering in 2-D using the ASC Impulse response type Symmetric

nm 3N 8

na 3N+20 16

Antisymmetric

3N 8

3N+20 16

N 2

N−1 2

3N 4

3N−2 4

Causal Noncausal arbitrary

Table 3.7: Per-pixel computational cost of filtering in 2-D using the SNC Impulse response type Symmetric

nm 5N 4

5N 4

Antisymmetric

5N 4

5N 4

Causal

9N 4

9N+6 4

Noncausal arbitrary

5N 2

5N+2 2

na −1 −1

method discussed here, we consider two variations of this sparse computation. First, all the input DCT blocks are taken as sparse. This is referred to as all sparse computation (ASC). In the second variation, the neighboring blocks are considered as sparse. In the latter case, all the DCT coefficients of the central block are used in the computation. This variation is called sparse neighbor computation (SNC). We also refer to the nonsparse computation, that is, filtering with all the coefficients of every DCT block, as full block computation (FBC). Per-pixel computational costs of these two techniques are given in Tables 3.6 and 3.7, respectively. 3.5.1.2

Computation through Spatial Domain

As explained in Chapter 1, the cost of computation through the spatial domain should include those of inverse and forward transformation of the DCT. In this regard, the computational costs of these transforms are accounted for by the efficient technique as reported in [82]. According to this method, the required number of multiplications (nm ) and additions (na ) for 2-D N × N DCT transform are given below. nm na

= =

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

N2 2 log2 N, 3N 2 2 log2 N

− N 2 + N.

(3.47)

129

Image Filtering

Table 3.8: Per-pixel computational cost of filtering through convolution in the spatial domain Impulse response type Symmetric Antisymmetric Causal Noncausal arbitrary

nm 2N + 2 + log2 N 2N + log2 N 2N + 2 + log2 N 4N + 2 + log2 N

2N 2N 2N 4N

na + 3log2 N + 3log2 N + 3log2 N + 3log2 N

−2+ −4+ −2+ −2+

2 N 2 N 2 N 2 N

Let a separable filter of nonuniform kernel h(m, n) = h1 (m)h2 (n), −N ≤ m, n ≤ N , be applied to an image. In the spatial domain, the convolution operation is efficiently implemented by a sequence of three operations, namely, shift, multiplication, and addition. These are carried out for each nonzero h1 (m) and h2 (n) in two stages. In the first stage, the shifts are along vertical directions and in the second stage, these are applied in horizontal directions on the data obtained from the first stage. Following this implementation per-pixel computational complexities of these filters are shown in Table 3.8. From Tables 3.5 and 3.8, it is observed that, for small block sizes, symmetric or antisymmetric filtering in the block DCT domain perform better than the spatial domain technique. However, the latter is superior to DCT filtering for more general types of impulse responses. However, the ASC or the SNC technique (see Tables 3.6 and 3.7) offers significant savings in the computation. It is of interest to know how the quality of the results suffers due to them. This is discussed in the next subsection with typical examples of filtering. 3.5.1.3

Quality of Filtered Images with Sparse Computation

The quality of filtered output is judged with reference to the output obtained by the linear convolution operation in the spatial domain. In this regard, the peak signal-to-noise ratio (PSNR) is an appropriate measure. Moreover, to observe the blocking and blurring artifacts due to the introduction of discontinuities at boundaries of 8 × 8 blocks, the JPEG quality metric (JPQM) is used. As discussed previously (see Section 1.7.2.2), the higher the value of JPQM, the better is the quality of the image, and for an image with good visual quality, the JPQM value should be close to 10 or higher. The results presented here are obtained by applying separable filters of uniform kernels in the form of g(m, n) = h(m)h(n). Typically, we have chosen a set of kernels as given in Tables 3.9, 3.10, 3.11, and 3.12 for different types of filter response. For each case, the FBC, the ASC, and the SNC algorithms are used. The PSNR and JPQM values obtained on application of these filters over a typical image Lena (of size 256 × 256) are shown in Table 3.13. From Table 3.13, it is observed that the PSNR values obtained from the

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

130

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

Table 3.9: A noncausal symmetric FIR n -3 1 h(n) 12

-2 − 16

-1 0

1

1 3

1 3

1 2

2 − 16

3 1 12

Table 3.10: A noncausal antisymmetric FIR n -3 1 h(n) - 12

-2 -1 1 - 13 6

0 1 0 13

2 − 16

3 1 12

FBC are very high (> 300 dB), implying that the FBC in the block DCT space is an equivalent technique of the linear convolution in the spatial domain. We also observe that all the JPQM values obtained from these techniques are significantly high. However, these values vary depending on filter response and input data. We also compare PSNR values obtained from the ASC and the SNC. As the PSNR values obtained from the ASC are significantly less than those obtained from the SNC, the latter technique is better suited for different applications. Though its computational cost is higher than that of the ASC, it is substantially low compared to the FBC, and computationally more efficient than filtering through spatial domain operations (see Tables 3.8 and 3.7).

3.5.2

Nonseparable Filters

Due to the nonseparability of the response, it is not possible to translate the convolution–multiplication property in 2-D into a linear form. Rather, in this case, we need to perform point-wise multiplication between the coefficients in the transform space. We restrict our discussion to filtering with symmetric nonseparable finite impulse responses. Let h(m, n), −L ≤ m, n ≤ L be denoted as the impulse response. As it is symmetric, h(m, n) = h(−m, −n). Hence, the specification in any quadrant in the 2-D space is sufficient enough to describe the complete response. Let us denote the response in the first quadrant as h+ (m, n) = h(m, n), 0 ≤ m, n ≤ L. For block filtering, we follow the same strategy of merging the neighboring blocks of an input block. Then, the convolution–multiplication property of 2-D transforms is applied by pointwise multiplication of type-I DCT coefficients of the response and type-II DCT coefficients of the merged DCT block. This property is an extended form of what is shown in the first row of Table 3.1. Finally, block decomposition is performed on the larger filtered block, and the central target block is saved in the resulting output. The above computational steps are summarized in the theorem given below.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

131

Image Filtering

Table 3.11: A noncausal FIR n -3 1 h(n) 12

-2 − 16

-1 0

1

1 3

1 4

1 2

2 1 − 12

3 1 12

Table 3.12: A causal FIR n 0 h(n) 12

1

2

3

1 4

1 8

1 8

Theorem 3.12 Let h(m, n), −L ≤ m, n ≤ L be the symmetric finite impulse response, and its response in the first quadrant is denoted as h+ (m, n) = h(m, n), 0 ≤ m, n ≤ L. Let Xi,j be the (i, j)th N × N input DCT block. Then, the DCT of the filtered output of (i, j)th block, Yi,j , is given by the following expression: Yi,j =

  Xi−1,j+1 N Xi,j+1  AT(3,N ) H  A(3,N ) P T , Xi+1,j+1 (3.48) where A(3,N ) is the block composition matrix as discussed earlier. H is the type-I DCT of the response in the first quadrant. In our notation, a matrix formed by the elements h(m, n), a ≤ m ≤ b, c ≤ n ≤ d is represented as {h(m, n)}a≤m≤b,c≤n≤d. Thus H is given by 



Xi−1,j−1 P AT(3,N ) A(3,N )  Xi,j−1 Xi+1,j−1

Xi−1,j Xi,j Xi+1,j

H = 6N {C1e {h+ (m, n)}0≤m,n≤3N (k, l)}0≤k,l≤3N −1 .

Table 3.13: PSNR (in DB) and JPQM values of filtered output using proposed techniques Type Symmetric Antisymmetric Causal Noncausal arbitrary

h(n) (from Tables) 3.9 3.10 3.12 3.11

FBC PSNR JPQM 302.21 10.89 329.05 14.62 304.43 10.82 304.26 10.93

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

ASC PSNR JPQM 36.58 11.41 45.91 19.19 41.60 9.43 37.66 11.08

SNC PSNR JPQM 44.25 12.01 50.44 16.99 53.89 10.67 45.92 11.82

132

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

P is the selection matrix as given below. P = 0N IN

0N .

0 N and IN are N × N zero and identity matrices, respectively. The operator N denotes the elementwise multiplication. The above technique [104] follows the overlap and save approach.

3.6

Application of Filtering

Filtering is used in different applications of image and video processing. In subsequent chapters, we find its various applications in the development of algorithms for image and video processing in the compressed domain. In this section, let us consider two typical cases, namely, removal of blocking artifacts and sharpening of images.

3.6.1

Removal of Blocking Artifacts

Reconstruction from highly compressed images suffers greatly from blocking artifacts. In Figure 3.2(b), we demonstrate an image compressed by JPEG compression algorithm at quality factor 10. We can see the annoying presence of blocking artifacts in the image. This is also implied by a very low JPQM value (3.88) of the image. Using low-pass filtering, we mask these blocking artifacts substantially. Such a processed image with a Gaussian filter of standard deviation 2.0 is presented in Figure 3.2(c). The blocking artifacts are significantly reduced in this image, which is also highlighted by a remarkable improvement of its JPQM value (10.74).

3.6.2

Image Sharpening

To sharpen an image, we add a fraction of the high-pass filtered output with it. As DCT is a linear transform, we can simply add the difference from its lowpass filtered DCT blocks, scaled by a weight, to itself. Let Bf be the low-pass filtered block in the transform domain. Let B be its corresponding original block. Hence, the sharpened block in the transform domain is computed as follows: Bs = B + λ(B − Bf ). (3.49) In Eq. (3.49), λ(> 0) is the parameter controlling the amount of image sharpening. Figure 3.3 shows a sharpened images for λ = 0.9.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

133

Image Filtering

(a)

(b)

(c) Figure 3.2: Removal of blocking artifacts of highly compressed JPEG images using Gaussian filtering in the compressed domain:(a) original image, and (b) compressed at quality factor 10 (JPQM = 3.88), and (c) filtered image (JPQM = 10.74).

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

134

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

Figure 3.3: Image sharpening using Gaussian filtering with λ = 0.9 and σ = 2.0 (JPQM = 9.87).

3.7

Summary

Filtering of images in the block DCT space can be performed by the application of suitable convolution–multiplication properties of trigonometric transforms or by using the linear and distributive property of the DCT to the convolution operation of the spatial domain. However, we need to take care of discontinuities introduced due to block boundaries in the block DCT space. To obviate this problem, we adopt the strategy of block composition and decomposition. There are other approaches that consider a larger neighborhood in their computational model for the same purpose. The advantage of working with separable filter response is that it can trivially extend the linear computation model (involving a CMP) of 1-D to 2-D. However, for a nonseparable filter response, we need to perform the nonlinear operation of point-wise multiplication of the transform coefficients of the response and the input image block.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

Chapter 4 Color Processing

4.1 4.2

4.3 4.4

4.5

4.6

4.7

Color Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Color Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.1 RGB Color Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.2 CIE XYZ Color Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.3 CIE Chromaticity Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.4 YCbCr Color Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processing Colors in the Compressed Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Color Saturation and Desaturation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.1 Normalized YCbCr Color Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.2 Maximum Saturation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.3 Desaturation of Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.4 Computation in the Block DCT Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.5 Computational Cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.5.1 MaxSat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.5.2 SatDesat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.5.3 DCT-domain Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Color Constancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.1 Estimating Spectral Components of a Single Illuminant . . . . . . . . 4.5.1.1 Computation in the Block DCT Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.1.2 Cost of Computation and Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.2 Color Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.2.1 Color Correction in the YCbCr Color Space . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.2.2 Color Correction by Chromatic Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Color Enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.1 Alpha Rooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.2 Multicontrast Enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.3 Multicontrast Enhancement with Dynamic Range Compression 4.6.4 Color Enhancement by Scaling DCT Coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.4.1 Preservation of Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.4.2 Preservation of Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.4.3 The Algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.5 Examples of Color Enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.5.1 Iterative Enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

136 137 137 137 138 139 140 140 142 142 144 144 145 145 145 146 146 147 148 150 151 152 153 153 154 154 155 155 155 156 157 158 158 159

With the rapid advancement in imaging technology, color images are more easily available and used in different applications than ordinary black and white or gray scale images. Increasing use of color has led to formulation of new challenges and problems in image processing. For example, various image capturing and display devices have their own limitations on data acquisition and rendition. Hence, different techniques and algorithms have been advanced 135

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

136

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

to overcome their limitations and to preserve color information as images are exchanged between devices. Mostly, these algorithms are developed in the spatial domain. However, a few techniques have also been reported for processing color images in the compressed domain, in particular in the block discrete cosine transforms (DCT) domain. In this chapter we discuss some of the techniques and problems of color processing in the block DCT space. First, we briefly introduce the fundamentals related to color processing, which is followed by a discussion on different approaches in the compressed domain.

4.1

Color Representation

Newton’s pioneering experiments on sunlight revealed the fact that the color of light depends upon its spectral components. Later, Grassmann [54] and Maxwell [97] laid the mathematical foundation of representation of a color factored into three independent variables. Grassmann stated the law of color matching [159], and Maxwell demonstrated that any additive color mixture could be matched by appropriate amount of three primary stimuli [98]. This is referred to as trichromatic generalization or trichromacy. For a long time, psychophysical experiments [159] were carried out to determine color matching functions (CMFs), which form a set of three functions providing numerical specification of color in terms of three coordinates or tristimulus values. Hence, it is the presence of different wavelengths of optical light and their relative strength that determine the sensation of color. This characteristics of a light source is expressed in terms of spectral power distribution (SPD). According to our perception, we attribute these three factors of color to the following. 1. Brightness: Brightness is the attribute of a visual sensation by which an area appears to emit light. 2. Hue: Hue is the attribute related to our perception of distinct colors such as red, yellow, green, blue, etc. If there is a shift in the dominant wavelength of the SPD, the hue of the associated color also shifts. 3. Saturation: Saturation indicates the purity of the perceived hue. It measures how an area is colorful in proportion to its brightness. It varies from neutral gray to saturated colors. The more the SPD is concentrated at a wavelength, the more saturated is the associated color. Again, for desaturating a color, we simply add white light that contains power at all wavelengths. Out of the above three, brightness is the feature of the achromatic component of the color. Hue and saturation form the chromatic components of color representation.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

Color Processing

4.2

137

Color Space

In an optical color camera, we have three sensors, each operating at different zones of the optical wavelengths, namely, with small wavelengths (blue zone), mid wavelength range (green zone), and large wavelengths (red zone). Let r(λ), g(λ), and b(λ) be relative spectral responses of sensors corresponding to red, green, and blue zones of the optical spectrum. We also consider E(λ) to be the SPD of the light source whose rays are reflected from an object surface point X and projected on x in the image plane. Let ρ(λ) represent the surface reflectance spectrum at X. In a simplified model, we compute the output of an individual sensor by accumulating spectral responses over the range of wavelength λ on which it is active. Assuming all the reflecting bodies as ideal 2-D flat Lambertian surfaces, the brightness values R, G, and B for respective sensors at an image coordinate x are expressed in the following form: R R = Rλ E(λ)ρ(λ)r(λ)dλ, G = Rλ E(λ)ρ(λ)g(λ)dλ, (4.1) B = λ E(λ)ρ(λ)b(λ)dλ.

4.2.1

RGB Color Space

In Eq. (4.1), the color of the pixel at x in the image plane is represented by the vector (R, G, B), whose each field denotes the amount of red, green, and blue to be mixed for producing the color according to our perception. The display devices also work on the same principle of mixing these three primary colors in the same proportion. The color space representing a color in this way is called the RGB color space. It may be noted that not all colors are reproducible by adding three primary colors. Some of them require subtraction of a primary color from the mixture of the other two. The major problem of representing a color in the RGB space is that it does not provide the perceptual factors of color representation, in particular, hue and saturation. That is why different other color spaces are proposed and used in various applications of color processing.

4.2.2

CIE XYZ Color Space

The International Commission on Illumination, better known as CIE (Commission Internationale d’Eclairage), is the primary organization that drives the standardization of color metrics and terminologies. In 1931, CIE defined its first colorimetry standard by providing two different but equivalent sets of CMFs. The first set of CMFs is called the CIE red–green–blue (RGB) CMFs, which are based on monochromatic primaries at wavelengths of 700 nm, 546.1 nm, and 435.8 nm, respectively [29]. The second set of CMFs, known as the

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

138

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

CIE XYZ CMFs, are defined in terms of a linear transformation of the CIE RGB CMFs [71]. The choice of this transformation was made in such a way that the CMF of the Y component represents the luminous efficiency function [159]. The other consideration was to yield equal tristimulus values for the equienergy spectrum through normalization of the three CMFs. Moreover, the transformation takes care of the fact that all the CMFs become nonnegative. This makes the CIE primaries physically nonrealizable. The Y tristimulus value is usually called the luminance and correlates with the perceived brightness of the radiant spectrum. The linear transformation from RGB to XYZ color space is given below. 

     X 0.49 0.31 0.20 R  Y  =  0.177 0.813 0.011   G  . Z 0.000 0.010 0.990 B

4.2.3

(4.2)

CIE Chromaticity Coordinates

Though a color is represented in a 3-D space, its chromatic information are represented in a 2-D space. One simple way to achieve this representation is to normalize the vector by its brightness value or the sum of the stimuli. This makes one of the coordinates redundant. It is obtained from the other two, as the three chromaticity coordinates sum up to unity. Hence, colors are represented using only two chromaticity coordinates. The plot of these points in the normalized 2-D space is known as the chromaticity diagram. The most commonly used chromaticity diagram is the CIE xy chromaticity diagram. The CIE xyz chromaticity coordinates are obtained from the X,Y, and Z tristimulus values in CIE XYZ space as given below: X , X +Y +Z Y y= , X +Y +Z Z z= . X +Y +Z

x=

(4.3) (4.4) (4.5)

In Figure 4.1, the plot of the curve corresponding to the visible monochromatic spectra on the CIE xy chromaticity diagram is shown. This shark-finshaped curve, along which the wavelength (in nm) is indicated, is called the spectrum locus. In the figure, a few typical points corresponding to optical wavelengths are also marked. All the physically realizable colors lie in the region inside the closed curve formed by the spectrum locus, and the line joining its two extremes of 360 nm and 830 nm is known as the purple line.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

139

Color Processing

0.9

519

0.8 G

0.7

Gamut Triangle

y

0.6 0.5 0.4

R

W

0.3

830

0.2 0.1

B 360 0.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5 x

0.6

0.7

0.8

0.9

Figure 4.1: CIE chromaticity diagram However, given the chormaticity coordinates of the three primary colors, the reproducible colors from their additive mixture lie within the convex hull or the triangle formed by them. This triangle is referred to as the gamut triangle (as shown in the figure), and the set of reproducible colors within it is called the color gamut. The coordinate point (0.33, 0.33) is the achromatic point in the chromaticity chart. This point is known as the reference white point (marked as ‘W’ in the figure).

4.2.4

YCbCr Color Space

It was already discussed in Chapter 1 (see Section 1.4.1) that the color space used in the JPEG compression is the YCbCr color space. The transformation from the RGB color space is shown below: 

       Y 0.256 0.502 0.098 R 0  Cb  =  −0.148 −0.290 0.438   G  +  128  . Cr 0.438 −0.366 −0.071 B 128

(4.6)

In this space, Y represents the luminance component, while Cb and Cr represent the chromatic parts. The above transformation is not linear. However,

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

140

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

if Cb and Cr are translated by −128, it becomes linear. In that case, the corresponding color space is also known as YUV color space.

4.3

Processing Colors in the Compressed Domain

The foremost advantage of processing colors in the DCT space is that the chromatic components of the data are separated from its luminance component. This leads to two different approaches on color processing in the compressed domain. In one approach, it is the luminance component (Y) that is subjected to the processing, keeping the Cb and Cr unaltered. For example, in different color enhancement algorithms [1, 84, 141], computation is carried out in the luminance component only. This makes substantial reduction in the computation. However, this operation does not ensure the preservation of colors, and in some techniques [105], the chromatic components are also adjusted accordingly. In the other approach, processing is restricted to chromatic components only, keeping the Y component unaltered. For example, we may implement chromatic shift [39] for correcting colors under biased illumination of a scene. The other advantage of DCT space is the spectral factorization of the data. This fact is exploited by treating DC and AC coefficients of each block differently. Moreover, the set of DC coefficients provides a low-resolution representation of the image. Using this set we estimate different statistics [109, 113] of the data and use them in the computation. For example, in [113], color palettes are recovered from DC coefficients of the compressed image. Similarly, in [109], the color constancy problem is solved by observing the statistical distribution of DC coefficients of chrominance components. In this chapter, we discuss a few representative problems of color processing using one of the above approaches. In our discussion we consider the following operations for color image processing. 1. Color saturation and desaturation 2. Color constancy 3. Color enhancement

4.4

Color Saturation and Desaturation

How to enhance colors through the process of saturation and desaturation in the CIE xy coordinate space is discussed in [90]. The process is demonstrated

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

141

Color Processing

in Figure 4.2. In this space the reference white (W ) lies at ( 13 , 31 ). Any radial straight line coming out of this point is considered to have chromaticity points with a constant hue value. On the other hand, saturation of the color increases with the increasing radial distance from W . In reality, constant hue lines in xy space are not straight lines. For simplifying the computation, these curves are approximated by a straight line joining the point (say p in Figure 4.2) and the reference white point (W ). With this simplified representation, the maximally saturated point in the CIE space is defined as the intersection of −−→ W p with an edge of the gamut triangle formed by the chromaticity points of the three primary colors in this space. This point is shown as s in Figure 4.2. In the next stage, desaturation is carried out by radially translating back the saturated point (say, at d in Figure 4.2) according to the center of gravity law for color mixture [61]. As points very near to W are more whitish (less saturated), they are kept aside from this computation. These are determined by computing the distance from W , and points lying at a distance less than a threshold are not processed as above. In Figure 4.2, the interior of the circle around W defines this region of unprocessed color points.

0.9 0.8 G

0.7

y

0.6 0.5 s d

0.4

p R

W

0.3 0.2 0.1

B 0.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5 x

0.6

0.7

0.8

0.9

Figure 4.2: Saturation and desaturation operation in xy chromaticity space.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

142

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

4.4.1

Normalized YCbCr Color Space

In the compressed domain, the foregoing computation becomes more efficient if it is carried out directly in the YCbCr color space. In that case, the computational overhead of conversion of color spaces gets eliminated. To this end, a normalized color space from the YCbCr is defined here. This space is referred to as the normalized CbCr color space (nCbCr). nCb =

Cb − 128 a.Y + b.Cb + c.Cr

and nCr =

Cr − 128 . a.Y + b.Cb + c.Cr

(4.7)

where a, b, and c are constants. From Eqs. (4.2) and (4.6), their values are obtained as 3.51, 1.99, and 0.14, respectively. The relationship between the CIE xy space and nCbCr space is given below: »

nCb nCr

–

=

»

−0.6823 1.532

−0.7724 −0.6047

–»

x y

–

+

»

0.4849 −0.3091

–

.

(4.8)

Similarly, a point ((x, y)) in the xy space is obtained from the (nCb, nCr) as follows: 2 3 2 32 3 2 1 3 x

4

y

5=4

−0.3789 −0.96

0.484

−0.4275

nCb

54

nCr

5+4

3 1 3

5.

(4.9)

In Figure 4.3 the chromaticity points of Figure 4.2 are shown in the nCbCr color space. We observe that the origin ((0, 0)) of the space becomes the reference white point. This simplifies the computation of saturation and desaturation points. Moreover, the characterization of hue preserving transformation in the YCbCr space could be conveniently expressed in the following form. Theorem 4.1 Two points in the Y CbCr space with color co-ordinates Cb1 −128 Cb2 −128 (Y1 , Cb1 , Cr1 ) and (Y2 , Cb2 , Cr2 ) have the same hue if Cr = Cr . 1 −128 2 −128

From the above theorem, we observe that colors of same hue lie along the radial straight line emanating from the point (128, 128) in the CbCr space.

4.4.2

Maximum Saturation

The adaptation of the method discussed in [90] for maximally saturating colors is described in the following algorithm. Algorithm Max Saturate Color (MaxSat) Input: A color point in YCbCr space denoted as P = (Y, Cb, Cr), a distance threshold τ . θ1 , θ2 Output: Maximally saturated point with the same hue and luminance, say, S = (Y, Cbs , Crs ).

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

143

Color Processing

0.7 R

0.5 0.3

nCr

0.1 W −0.1 s

d

p

B

−0.3 G −0.5

−0.5

−0.3

−0.1

0.1

0.3

0.5

0.7

nCb

Figure 4.3: Saturation–desaturation in nCbCr space. 1. Convert S into the coordinates in nCbCr space, say, p = (nCb, nCr), using Eq. (4.7). Let the normalizing factor in Eq. (4.7) be represented as F = a.Y + b.Cb + c.Cr. 2. If ((k p k> τ ) and (θ1 ≤ tan−1 ( nCr nCb ) ≤ θ2 )), perform the following operations. −−→ 2a. Compute the intersection between W p and the gamut triangle as s = (nCbs , nCrs ). 2b. Compute the maximally saturated chroma components as follows:

Cbs Crs

= a.Y

1 − b.nCb −b.nCr

−c.nCb 1 − c.nCr

−1

nCb nCr

+

128 . 128 (4.10)

End Algorithm Max Saturate Color In the above algorithm, the step 2b is required to preserve the RGB color vector in the saturated image. However, even without color preservation, the technique provides comparable results. Hence, the corresponding computation

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

144

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

is approximated by multiplying nCbs and nCrs with F . This makes the computation faster without any noticeable deterioration of the result. In Figure 4.4 (see color insert), the maximally saturated image of the input image ‘image22’ 1 is shown. In this example, τ is kept at 0.05, whereas values of θ1 and θ2 are taken as π2 and 2π, respectively. In Figure 4.5 (a) and (b)(See color insert), chromaticity points for the original image and the maximally saturated image, respectively, are plotted in the nCbCr space. It is observed that many points are clustered along the edges of the gamut triangle in the latter plot, while points in the vicinity of the reference white (W ) remain unchanged.

4.4.3

Desaturation of Colors

The computation of desaturation of colors also gets simplified compared to the methods discussed in [90], which uses the law of center of gravity for color mixing [61] for moving the chromaticity point of maximum saturation toward the reference white. In this computational model, the mass at the reference white is taken as the fraction of average luminance Yavg of the image. Let the corresponding fraction be denoted as w (w ∈ [0, 1]). The luminance value at the saturation point (say, Y ) is taken as its corresponding mass. Hence, in the nCbCr space, the chromaticity point (say, (nCbd , nCrd )) at the desaturation point (denoted as the point d in Figure 4.3) is computed as follows. 2 4

nCbd nCrd

3

2 3 nCbs Y 5= 4 5. Y + w.Yavg nCrs

(4.11)

Further, the luminance value in the desaturation point is taken as Y +w.Yavg . This method is referred to in this work as SatDesat. In Figure 4.6 (see color insert), the desaturated image from the maximally saturated one is shown. In this case, the value of w is empirically chosen as 0.2.

4.4.4

Computation in the Block DCT Space

The above algorithms in the YCbCr color space are developed for applying them directly in the block DCT space. Moreover, the computation reduces further if only the DC coefficients of individual blocks are processed. In Figure 4.7 (see color insert), the resulting images obtained from the two algorithms MaxSat and SatDesat are shown. Corresponding techniques in the DCT domain are referred to here as MaxSat-DCT and SatDesat-DCT. The resulting images are visually comparable to those obtained by the techniques in the spatial domain itself. However, due to the computation in the block DCT space, processed images suffer from blocking artifacts. In Table 4.1, the JPEG quality metric (JPQM) values are shown for the images in Figure 4.7, and they are found to be above 8. For observing the extent of color enhance1 Obtained

from the website http://dragon.larc.nasa.govt/retinex/pao/news

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

Color Processing

145

ment, color enhancement factors (CEF) (see Section 1.7.2.3 of Chapter 1) are also tabulated against different techniques. In addition to them, to observe how saturated images retain the distinguishing features and descriptions in an image, the structural similarity index (SSIM) [152] (see Section 1.7.2.1 of Chapter 1) between two images is computed. For a color image, the SSIM for all the three components Y , Cb, and Cr are computed separately, and they are named Y-SSIM, Cb-SSIM, and Cr-SSIM, respectively. From the table, we observe that the performance in the block DCT domain is comparable with that of spatial domain techniques.

Table 4.1: Performance of different algorithms on the image Bridge Method Y-SSIM Cb-SSIM Cr-SSIM CEF JPQM MaxSat 0.97 0.99 0.85 1.30 — SatDesat 0.91 0.95 0.92 1.34 — MaxSat-DCT 0.99 1.00 0.89 1.21 8.64 SatDesat-DCT 0.95 0.97 0.95 1.27 8.37

4.4.5

Computational Cost

Computation in the nCbCr space has an advantage while processing compressed images. As the inverse DCT of an image belongs to the YCbCr color space, the cost due to color space conversion is saved in all the algorithms suggested here. On the contrary, adoption of the existing algorithm [90] and its variation [114] requires this conversion. 4.4.5.1

MaxSat

In this algorithm, for processing each pixel, we require to (i) compute its chromaticity coordinates in the nCbCr space (with 5M + 2A operations), (ii) obtain the intersection with the gamut triangle (with 5M + 6A operations), and (iii) obtain Cb and Cr from the normalized coordinate of the saturation point (with 2M operations). Overall, the MaxSat algorithm requires 12M +8A operations per pixel. 4.4.5.2

SatDesat

The SatDesat algorithm performs an additional task of desaturation with 5M + 1A operations for each pixel. Hence, including the cost of the MaxSat, the total cost of computation becomes 17M + 9A per pixel.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

146

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

4.4.5.3

DCT-domain Techniques

As in the DCT domain only the DC coefficient of an 8 × 8 block is processed, 1 the computational cost per pixel reduces by a factor of 64 . In Table 4.2, the computational costs of different techniques are presented. The expressions take care of the cost of forward and inverse DCT transforms for spatial domain techniques [157].

Table 4.2: Per-pixel computational cost

4.5

Method MaxSat

Cost 14.75M + 22.5625A

SatDesat

19.75M + 23.5625A

MaxSat-DCT

3 16 M

+ 81 A

SatDesat-DCT

17 64 M

+

9 64 A

Color Constancy

From Eq. (4.1), we observe that the color components at a pixel are determined by three main factors, namely, reflection coefficients of the surface point whose image is formed; spectral power density (SPD) of the illuminants or radiations received by the scene from various sources; and the spectral responses of camera sensors. Typically, we consider the imaging of a 3-D scene under varying illumination. In that case, pixel values of images under different scene illumination vary greatly, and the colors rendered by display systems may also show these variations. However, a human observer is capable of perceiving true colors of the objects present in the scene even under this situation. Color constancy of a scene refers to restoration of colors from varying illumination of a scene. Its primary objective is to derive an illumination-independent representation of an image so that it could be suitably rendered with a desired illuminant. The problem has two parts. The first one attempts to estimate the spectral component of the illuminants, and in the other part, it performs color correction for rendering the image with a target illumination.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

Color Processing

4.5.1

147

Estimating Spectral Components of a Single Illuminant

Many techniques have been reported [12, 13, 43] for estimating the spectral components of the illuminant of a scene, with the assumption that it has a single illuminant. However, all these techniques solve the color constancy problem in the spatial representation of images in the RGB color space. For adapting them in the compressed domain, we need to perform processing in the YCbCr color space. In a simplified model [43], we assume that all the reflecting bodies have ideal 2-D flat Lambertian surfaces. According to Eq. (4.1), one of the objectives is to estimate E(λ) from an input color image, which is expressed in the form of a color vector (RE , GE , BE ) in the RGB color space. It is observed [43] that the problem is equivalent to finding a solution to an underconstrained set of equations. Hence, to solve this problem, we have to consider additional assumptions or constraints imposed from the environment. These are briefly discussed below with their necessary adaptation in the YCbCr color space. 1. Gray World: In the gray world assumption [17, 50], it is assumed that the average reflectance of all surfaces is gray or achromatic. Hence, the average of color components provides the colors of the incident illuminant. 2. White World: In this approach [81], an attempt is made to identify a white object in the scene and the color of these white pixels in the image determines the color of the illuminant. To obtain these values, we look for the maximum values of individual color components. This method is quite sensitive to the dynamic ranges of the sensors. However, if the dynamic range of brightness distribution satisfies the linear response of the sensor, this assumption works well in many cases. This assumption is referred to here as the white world assumption. In another variation in the YCbCr color space, instead of computing the maximum values in all the three components, the computation is carried out only in the Y component. The corresponding chromatic components of the pixel with maximum Y are chosen for the color of the illuminant. This assumption is referred to as white world in YCbCr. 3. Statistical Techniques: A more recent trend in solving the color constancy problem is to use statistical estimation techniques with prior knowledge on the distribution of pixels in a color space given known camera sensors and source of illumination. In these techniques, an illuminant (or a set of illuminants) is chosen from a select set of canonical illuminants based on certain criteria. Some of these approaches are discussed below. (a) Color Gamut Mapping: The color gamut of a scene provides the statistics of color distribution under an illumination. In this technique, an illuminant is mapped to a color gamut covering all possible color renditions under its exposure. There are color gamut

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

148

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

mapping approaches both in the 3D [44] and in the 2D [42] color spaces, where an objective is set to maximize the evidence of color maps with known maps of canonical illuminants. In a typical 2-D implementation [109], this statistics is collected in the CbCr space by discretizing it into 32 × 32 cells. (b) Color-by-Correlation In this approach [43], the attempt is made to maximize a likelihood of an illuminant given the distribution of pixels in the 2D chromatic space. In [43], it has also been shown that the computational framework is generic enough to accommodate many other algorithms (like the gamut mapping one in the 2D chromatic space). In [43], the chosen chromatic space is formed by norR G malized red (r = R+G+B ) and normalized green (g = R+G+B ) components. In the compressed domain [109], the method is adapted in the CbCr space. and statistics is collected in the same way. (c) Nearest Neighbor Classification As the above two techniques require significant amount of storage space for storing the statistics of each canonical illuminant, in [109] a simple nearest neighbor (NN) classification is used for determining the canonical illuminant. Let C ∈ Cb × Cr denote the SPD of an illuminant in the CbCr space, which follows a 2-D Gaussian distribution as given below: p(C) =

1 2π|Σ|

1

1 2

−1

e− 2 (C−µ)Σ

(C−µ)t

,

(4.12)

where 2 µ(= [µCb µ Cr ]) is the mean of the distribution and Σ(= σCb σCbCr ) is the covariance matrix . The canonical illu2 σCbCr σCr minant is chosen based on the distance of its mean illuminant from the mean chromatic component of the image. The distance function used in [109] is the Mahalanobis distance function [91]. Let the mean chromatic components of an image be Cm . Then, for an illuminant L with the mean µL and the covariance matrix ΣL , the distance between them is given below: T d(Cm , µL ) = (Cm − µL )Σ−1 L (Cm − µL ) .

4.5.1.1

(4.13)

Computation in the Block DCT Space

For computing in the block DCT space, we simply estimate the color of the illuminant from the DC coefficients of individual blocks, which is the average of 8 × 8 sample points in a block. However, with a marginal increase in computation, we include more number of points by taking three more additional points (averages of 4 × 4 subblocks) for each block. The same strategy is followed in [113] while collecting statistics for determining color pallets in the block DCT space. This is carried out by performing an inverse 2D DCT directly over the DCT coefficients.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

149

Color Processing

Table 4.3: List of algorithms for estimating the color components of an illuminant Algorithms Gray World Gray World White World White World in RGB White World in YCbCr Color by Correlation Color by Correlation Gamut Mapping Gamut Mapping Nearest Neighbor Nearest Neighbor

Domain Spatial Block DCT Spatial Block DCT Block DCT Spatial Block DCT Spatial Block DCT Spatial Block DCT

Short Name GRW GRW-DCT MXW MXW-DCT MXW-DCT-Y COR COR-DCT GMAP GMAP-DCT NN NN-DCT

Let Xij , 0 ≤ i, j ≤ 7 denote the DCT coefficients of an 8 × 8 block. From them the inverse 2 × 2 DCTs yij , 0 ≤ i, j ≤ 1, are computed as follows.      y00 1 1 1 1 X00 y01  1 1 −1 1 −1 X01   =    (4.14) y10  2 1 1 −1 −1 X10  . y11 1 −1 −1 1 X11

As the computation is carried out with a lower resolution of input images, let us discuss its effect in the quality of results. As reported in [109], it is found that the technique provides comparable results in estimating the spectral components with those obtained from the spatial domain techniques dealing with the full resolution of images. To demonstrate the comparative performances of different approaches, let us consider a metric named angular error reflecting the quality of estimation of the SPD. Let the target illuminant T be expressed by the spectral component triplet in the RGB color space as (RT , GT , BT ), and let the corresponding estimated illuminant be represented by E = (RE , GE , BE ). Then, the angular error (∆θ ) between these two is defined as →− − → T .E ∆θ = cos−1 ( − (4.15) → − → ). | T || E | In the above definitions, ‘.’ denotes the dot product between two vectors, and |.| denotes the magnitude of the vector. The techniques under comparison are listed in Table 4.3. The SPDs of the illuminants are estimated from the image data set captured by Barnard et al. [14] using different illuminants. These data are available at the website http://www.cs.sfu.ca/∼colour/data. There are 11 illuminants as listed in Table 4.4. Every image in the data set has also information

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

150

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

Table 4.4: List of illuminants. Illuminant Philips Ultralume Sylvania cool white Sylvania warm white Sylvania 50MR16Q Same with blue filter Lamp at 3500K temperature Same with blue filter Lamp at 4100K temperature Same with blue filter Lamp at 4700K temperature Same with blue filter

Nature of Source Fluorescent Fluorescent Fluorescent Incandescent Incandescent Incandescent Incandescent

Short Name ph-ulm syl-cwf syl-wwf syl-50mr16q syl-50mr16q+3202 solux-3500 solux-3500+3202 solux-4100 solux-4100+3202 solux-4700 solux-4700+3202

Table 4.5: Performance of different techniques of estimating illuminants Technique ∆θ GRW-DCT MXW-DCT MXW-DCT-Y COR-DCT GMAP-DCT NN-DCT GRW MXW COR GMAP NN

(in degree) 14.77 13.82 14.88 6.97 10.8 7.71 14.77 29.7 11.45 11.41 7.1

regarding the spectral components of the illuminant in the RGB color space. These are used for collecting statistics for different statistical techniques. In Table, 4.5 the median of the angular errors of the estimates over the complete set of images is shown. We observe that compressed domain techniques performed better than spatial domain techniques in this respect. 4.5.1.2

Cost of Computation and Storage

For expressing the computational cost of different techniques, let the number of pixels in an image be denoted by n. Moreover, while accounting for the cost of computation, in addition to the number of multiplications and additions, the number of comparisons is also taken into consideration. By extending our previous notation, the computational complexity is expressed as αM +

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

Color Processing

151

βA + γC, implying α number of multiplications, β number of additions and γ number of comparisons. Computational costs for a multiplication and for a division are also considered as equivalent. For n pixels, the grey-world (GRW) and the white-world (MXW) techniques, respectively, require 3M + 3(n − 1)A and 3(n − 1)C number of computations. For statistical techniques, it requires 9nM + 6nA operations for converting n pixels in the RGB color space to the YCbCr color space. These techniques also depend on the number of illuminants (say, nl ) and the fractional coverage (say, f ) over the discretized chromaticity space. Let us consider the size of the discretized space as nc , which is mentioned as 32 × 32 in algorithmic descriptions (see Section 4.5.1). Hence, the number of computations for processing n pixels becomes f nc nl A + (nl − 1)C for both the techniques COR and GMAP, although the latter performs only integer additions. The NN technique computes the Mahalanobis distance with 8M + 4A operations for each illuminant, as it uses 2 × 1 chromatic mean and symmetric covariance matrices of dimension 2 × 2. Hence, the total number of computations for the NN becomes 8nl M + 4nl A for n pixels. Every statistical technique needs to store the mean of the illuminant of dimension 3 × 1. Moreover, the NN technique needs to store three elements of the covariance matrix per illuminant. It makes its minimum storage requirement as 6nl number of elements. However, both the color-by-correlation (COR) and gamut-mapping (GMAP) techniques require more space for storing the chromaticity map, which has nc nl number of elements. Additionally, they also need to store the mean illuminant (3 per illuminant). In the block DCT space, color constancy techniques handle four 2×2 IDCT coefficients for each block. The computation of these values, as shown in Eq. (4.14), requires 9 additions with only a marginal overhead in the computation. Due to these operations, the input data size itself gets reduced by 14 th of the size of the block, which is 16 times in the context of JPEG compression. Hence, all the nonstatistical-based techniques run faster in the DCT domain. However, the statistical techniques are relatively independent of the input data size. There are savings from the conversion of pixels in the RGB color space to the YCbCr color space. Moreover, in the compressed domain, the additional overhead of reverse and forward transforms to and from the spatial domain is also avoided in DCT-based approaches. A summary of computational and storage complexities of all the techniques is provided in Table 4.6.

4.5.2

Color Correction

If we get the estimates of the SPD of the illuminant, this becomes useful in transforming the pixel values to those under a target illuminant. This computation is known as color correction and is performed following the Von Kries model [80]. The corresponding method is known as diagonal color correction, which is described in the following text. In the block DCT space, the operation is restricted to the DC coefficients only.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

152

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

Table 4.6: Complexities of different algorithms given nl number of illuminants, nc as the size of the 2-D chromaticity space, and n number of image pixels Algorithms GRW GRW-DCT MXW MXW-DCT MXW-DCT-Y COR COR-DCT GMAP GMAP-DCT NN NN-DCT

Computational Complexity 3M + 3(n − 1)A 3M + 3( 4n+9 − 1)A 64 3(n − 1)C n 9 nM + 24n+9 A + 3( 64 − 1)C 64 64 4n+9 ( 64 − 1)C 9nM + (6n + f nc nl )A + (nl − 1)C f nc nl A + (nl − 1)C 9nM + (6n + f nc nl )A + (nl − 1)C f nc nl A + (nl − 1)C (9n + 8nl )M + (6n + 4nl )A 8nl M + 4nl A

Storage Complexity – – – – – nc nl + 3nl nc nl + 3nl nc nl + 3nl nc nl + 3nl 6nl 6nl

Let the spectral components for the source illuminant be estimated as Rs , Gs , and Bs for red, green, and blue spectrum zones of the SPD, respectively. Let the corresponding spectral components for the target illuminant be given by Rd , Gd , and Bd . From a source pixel in the RGB color space with R, G, and B as its corresponding color components, the transformed or color-corrected components (Ru , Gu , and Bu , respectively) are expressed as follows: kr Ru

4.5.2.1

= =

Rd Rs ,

kg f f kr R, Gu

d = G kb Gs , R+G+B , = kr R+k g G+kb B = f kg G, Bu

=

Bd Bs ,

(4.16) =

f kb B.

Color Correction in the YCbCr Color Space

The expressions for diagonal corrections (see Eq. (4.16)) in the RGB color space are translated in the YCbCr color space, as it deems to be appropriate for processing in the compressed domain. This is stated in the following theorem.

Theorem 4.2 Let kr , kg , and kb be the parameters for diagonal correction as defined in Eq. (4.16). Given a pixel with color values in the YCbCr color space, the updated color values Yu , Cbu , and Cru are expressed by the following

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

Color Processing

153

equations: Cb′ = Cr′ = f= Yu = Cbu = Cru =

Cb − 128, Cr − 128,

3.51Y +1.63Cb′ +0.78Cr′ , 1.17(kr +kg +kb )Y +(2.02kb −0.39kg )Cb′ +(1.6kr −0.82kg )Cr′ f ((0.58kg + 0.12kb + 0.30kr )Y + 0.2(kb − kg )Cb′ +

0.41(kr − kg )Cr′ ), f ((0.52kb − 0.34kg − 0.18kr )Y + (0.11kg + 0.89kb )Cb′ + 0.24(kg − kr )Cr′ ) + 128, f ((0.52kr − 0.43kg − 0.09kb )Y + 0.14(kg − kb )Cb′ + (0.3kg + 0.7kr )Cr′ ) + 128.

(4.17) However, there is no significant reduction in the number of multiplications and additions in Eq. (4.17) compared to the diagonal correction method applied in the RGB color space. 4.5.2.2

Color Correction by Chromatic Shift

In [39] a simple color correction method is proposed by translating the chromatic components by the corresponding estimated components of the source illuminant. By adopting this simple strategy, it was demonstrated that good quality color rendition (or transfer) is possible. In this approach, if Yd , Cbd , and Crd are the color components of a target illuminant in the YCbCr space and the corresponding components in the source illuminant are Ys , Cbs , and Crs , color correction by chromatic shift is expressed by the following equations. Yu = Y, Cbu = Cb + Cbd − Cbs , (4.18) Cru = Cr + Crd − Crs . Typical examples of color correction following the estimation of the illuminant using the color-by-correlation technique in the DCT domain (COR-DCT) are shown in Figure 4.8 (see color insert).

4.6

Color Enhancement

Color enhancement aims at improving the rendering of images and thus increasing their visual perception. There exist a number of techniques [52, 69, 87, 126, 143, 156, 168] in the spatial domain toward this end. In the block DCT space also a few works [1, 84, 105, 141] have been reported in the recent past. Mostly, these techniques attempt to exploit the advantage of spectral factorization in the compressed domain and propose to treat DC and AC coefficients differently for enhancing images. A few representative algorithms are elaborated in subsequent sections.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

154

4.6.1

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

Alpha Rooting

In this technique, smaller values of DCT coefficients (magnitudes less than 1) get emphasized, whereas large values (> 1) get reduced. The technique is known as alpha rooting (AR) as the coefficients are modified by taking the (1 − α)th root (0 < α < 1) of their normalized values, the normalization factor being the maximum luminance value of the image (Ymax ), which is computed from the DC coefficients in the compressed domain. Thus a DCT coefficient X(i, j) is modified as given by the following equation. α−1 e j) = X(i, j) X(i, j) X(i, . Ymax

4.6.2

(4.19)

Multicontrast Enhancement

In this technique (MCE) [141], a contrast measure for spectral bands in the transform domain is defined. Using this measure, the DCT coefficients are modified so that contrasts for individual bands are scaled in the same proportion. In this way, only AC coefficients are modified, without affecting the DC coefficient for each block. Given the DCT coefficients of a block as X(i, j), 0 ≤ i, j ≤ 7, a kth spectral band is formed by the coefficients lying on the same diagonal such that i + j = n. Then the spectral energy Ek of the kth band is defined as follows: Ek =

1 Σi+j=k |X(i, j)|, Nk

(4.20)

where Nk is the number of coefficients in the kth spectral band. Then the contrast measure (ck ) in the kth band is defined as the ratio of the spectral energy in that band and the energy of the low-pass-filtered image retaining the frequency components of all the lower bands. This is defined below: Ek ck = . (4.21) Σt
et Σt
(4.22)

et and Et are the spectral energy for the tth band in the enhanced and where E original images, respectively.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

155

Color Processing

4.6.3

Multicontrast Enhancement with Dynamic Range Compression

A similar contrast measure is used in this approach also with a minor variation in the definition of the spectral energy of a band as given below. r 1 Ek = Σi+j=k |X(i, j)|2 . (4.23) Nk Moreover, in this technique, the DC coefficients are transformed with the help of a monotonically increasing mapping function, as it is done in conventional enhancement algorithms such as pixel mapping techniques [52]. The monotonic function (see Figure 4.9 and its color insert) used in this algorithm is given below: 1

1

(x γ + (1 − (1 − x) γ )) η(x) = , 2

0 ≤ x ≤ 1.

(4.24)

The algorithm also varies the parameter (γ) of dynamic range compression for each block, depending on its spectral content, and subsequently, the parameter is also smoothed by taking the average of its values used in the neighboring blocks. It has also the provision of choosing different contrast scaling factors (λ in [141]) for low-frequency and high-frequency bands. Further, in [84] a preprocessing step of noise removal and a postprocessing operation of smoothing the DC coefficients are also carried out for further improvement of the result.

4.6.4

Color Enhancement by Scaling DCT Coefficients

All the previous algorithms perform enhancement with the luminance component (Y ) without bringing any change in the corresponding chrominance components Cb and Cr. However, in [105], a simple color enhancement technique is proposed by scaling DCT coefficients in all the components. The approach aims at determining a suitable combination of brightness, contrast, and colors of pixels in an image for the betterment of the visualization of images. As it is quite difficult to characterize this combination, it is conjectured that, for natural images an inherent combination of brightness, contrast, and colors should be preserved in the process of enhancement. The color enhancement by scaling (CES) technique tries to preserve both the contrast and the color for enhancing images. 4.6.4.1

Preservation of Contrast

In this approach, a different contrast measure is used from the intuitive notion based on Weber’s law. Consider an image of size N × N with mean µ and standard deviation σ. According to Weber’s law, the contrast (ζ) of an image is given by ζ = ∆L L , where ∆L is the difference in luminance between a stimulus

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

156

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

and its surround, and L is the luminance of the surround [139]. As the mean provides a measure for the surrounding luminance and the standard deviation is strongly correlated with ∆L, the contrast ζ of an image is redefined as follows: σ ζ= . (4.25) µ The following theorem [105] states how the contrast of an image is related to the scaling of its DCT coefficients. Theorem 4.3 Let κdc be the scale factor for the normalized DC coefficient, and κac be the scale factor for the normalized AC coefficients of an image Y of size N × N , such that the DCT coefficients in the processed image Ye are given by κdc Y (i, j), for i = j = 0, Ye (i, j) = (4.26) κac Y (i, j), otherwise. The contrast of the processed image then becomes the original image.

κac κdc

times of the contrast of

Hence, for preserving the local contrast of each block in the block DCT space, κdc and κac should be the same. Let us denote the corresponding scaling factor as κ. 4.6.4.2

Preservation of Color

Though the above operations in the luminance component of an image preserve the contrast, they do not preserve the colors or color vectors of the pixels. Hence, we need to adjust also chromatic components. The following theorem [105] states how colors could be preserved under the uniform scaling operation. Theorem 4.4 Let U = {U (k, l)|0 ≤ k, l ≤ (N − 1)} and V = {V (k, l)|0 ≤ k, l ≤ (N − 1)} be the DCT coefficients of the Cb and Cr components, respectively. If the luminance (Y ) component of an image is uniformly scaled by a e and Ve are preserved by factor κ, the colors of the processed image with Ye , U the following operations: − 128) + 128), i = j = 0, N (κ( U(i,j) e N U (i, j) = (4.27) κU (i, j), otherwise, N (κ( V (i,j) − 128) + 128), i = j = 0, N Ve (i, j) = (4.28) κV (i, j), otherwise.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

157

Color Processing

4.6.4.3

The Algorithm

The CES algorithm has been developed based on the above two theorems. Its different stages of computation are described below. 1. Adjustment of local background illumination: For adjusting the background illumination, the DC coefficients are scaled using a global monotonic function. In [105], the following function is reported to be quite effective for performing this task. The function (see Figure 4.10 and its color insert), known as the twicing function, is also used in other works [101] for the purpose of enhancement. τ (x) = x(2 − x),

0 ≤ x ≤ 1.

(4.29)

Once a scaling factor is determined from the DC coefficient of the block, the same is used for scaling other DCT coefficients in subsequent operations. 2. Preservation of local contrast: According to Theorem 4.3, to preserve the contrast of the block, AC coefficients are also scaled with the same factor of the DC coefficient. However, it may cause overflow of values from the displayable range of the device. Hence, to restrict this overflow, the scale factor is clipped by a value as determined by the following theorem [105]. Theorem 4.5 Assuming that the values in a block lie within µ±λσ, the scaled values will not exceed the maximum displayable brightness value Bmax Bmax , if 1 ≤ κ ≤ µ+λ.σ . 3. Preservation of colors: In the last step, colors are preserved by scaling the DCT coefficients of the Cb and Cr components according to Theorem 4.4. It is observed that, in many cases, blocking artifacts occur near edges or near sharp changes of brightness and colors of pixels. Hence, in those cases, it is preferred to compute over a smaller block size. This is efficiently performed by a sequence of block decomposition, processing in smaller blocks, and finally composing the processed blocks into its original size. As discussed in Chapter 2 (see Section 2.2.4.5), the block decomposition and composition operations are performed efficiently in the DCT domain. To detect a block requiring these additional operations, the standard deviation σ of that block is used as a measure. If its value is greater than a threshold (say, σth ), the 8 × 8 block is decomposed into four subblocks, and the scaling operations are applied in those blocks independently.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

158

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

Table 4.7: Average performance measures obtained by different color enhancement techniques Measures JPQM CEF

AR 9.9 1.00

MCE 8.32 0.93

MCEDRC 9.71 1.00

CES 9.03 1.51

Table 4.8: Performance measures after iterative application of the CES algorithm on the image ‘image20’ Measures CEF JPQM

4.6.5

Number of iterations 2 3 4 5 1.96 2.21 2.24 2.23 8.05 7.32 6.69 6.37

Examples of Color Enhancement

Let us consider a few typical examples of color enhancement using the techniques as discussed earlier. In Figure 4.11 (see color insert), two such images are shown2 . In the implementation of the AR technique, the value of α has been kept as 0.98. In the MCE, the value of λ is kept at 1.95. In multicontrast enhancement with dynamic range compression (MCEDRC), the parameter γ of the function η(x) is empirically chosen as 1.95. The average JPQM and CEF values obtained on this set of images are presented in Table 4.7. From Table 4.7, the CES method is found to provide excellent color rendition in the enhanced images. However, as indicated from the JPQM measures, its performance in suppressing blocking artifacts is marginally poorer than that of other schemes. In Figure 4.12 (see color insert), enhancement results obtained by these techniques are presented. 4.6.5.1

Iterative Enhancement

We also observe the effect of iterative enhancement of an image where the enhanced image from the previous iteration acts as the input to the next stage of enhancement. It is found that the CEF improves with a few number of iterations. However, the resulting images heavily suffer from blocking artifacts. In Table 4.8, CEF and JPQM values are shown on the iterative application of the CES algorithm over the image ‘image20.’ Results after 2 and 3 iterations are also shown in Figure 4.13 (see color insert). 2 Obtained

from the website http://dragon.larc.nasa.govt/retinex/pao/news

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

Color Processing

4.7

159

Summary

Color processing in the compressed domain has the advantage of getting the input image in the YCbCr color space where its chromatic components are separated from the luminance component. This property is exploited in various techniques in the compressed domain by restricting the computation to the relevant components only. Moreover, the spectral factorization of the data in the DCT space provides other opportunities for designing efficient and effective algorithms by treating the DC and AC coefficients of each block differently. A few representative problems of color processing, namely, the saturation and desaturation of colors, color constancy, and color enhancement are discussed to highlight key approaches in the block DCT space.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

160

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

Original Image

(a) Saturation in Nomralized CbCr

(b) Figure 4.4: Maximum saturation in nCbCr: (a) image22 and (b) maximally saturated image.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

161

Color Processing nCbCr plot: Original 0.8 0.6 0.4

nCr

0.2 0

O

−0.2 −0.4 −0.6

−0.6

−0.4

−0.2

0 nCb

0.2

0.4

0.6

0.8

0.4

0.6

0.8

(a) nCbCr plot: After Saturation 0.8 0.6 0.4

nCr

0.2 0

O

−0.2 −0.4 −0.6

−0.6

−0.4

−0.2

0 nCb

0.2

(b) Figure 4.5: Chromaticity points in nCbCr: (a) image22 and (b) maximally saturated image. © 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

162

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain Saturation (nCbCr)−Desaturation

(a) nCbCr plot: After Saturation 0.8 0.6 0.4

nCr

0.2 0

O

−0.2 −0.4 −0.6

−0.6

−0.4

−0.2

0 nCb

0.2

0.4

0.6

0.8

(b) Figure 4.6: (a) image22: Desaturation from the maximally saturated image and (b) corresponding chromaticity plot in the nCbCr space.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

Color Processing

Saturation in Nomralized CbCr

(a) Saturation (nCbCr)−Desaturation

(b) Figure 4.7: image22: (a) Maxsat in DCT and (b) SatDesat in DCT.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

163

164

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

(a)

(b)

(c)

Figure 4.8: Example of color correction using COR-DCT: (a) original image, (b) diagonal correction, and (c) chromatic shift.

plot of η(x) 1 0.9 0.8 γ=0.95 γ=1.75

0.7

η(x)

0.6

γ=0.15

0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.1 0

0

0.2

0.4

0.6 x

Figure 4.9: Plot of η(x).

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

0.8

1

165

Color Processing

1 0.9 0.8 0.7

τ(x)

0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.1 0

0

0.2

0.4

0.6

0.8

x

Figure 4.10: Plot of τ (x).

(a)

(b)

Figure 4.11: Original images: (a) image7 and (b) image20.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

1

166

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

(AR)

(MCEDRC)

(AR)

(MCEDRC)

(MCE)

(CES)

(MCE)

(CES)

Figure 4.12: Color enhancement of the images.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

167

Color Processing

(a)

(b)

Figure 4.13: Color enhancement of ‘image20’ obtained with more than one iteration: (a) 2 and (b) 3.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

Chapter 5 Image Resizing

5.1

5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5

Image Halving and Image Doubling in the Compressed Domain . . . . . . . 5.1.1 Using Linear, Distributive and Unitary Transform Properties . . 5.1.2 Using Convolution-Multiplication Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1.2.1 Two-fold Downsampling of 8-point DCT Blocks in 1-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1.2.2 Twofold Upsampling of 8-point DCT Blocks in 1-D . . 5.1.2.3 Example in 2-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1.3 Using Subband DCT Approximation with Block Composition and Decomposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1.3.1 Image Halving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1.3.2 Image Doubling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1.4 Performance Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resizing with Integral Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.1 L × M Downsampling Algorithm (LMDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.2 L × M upsampling Algorithm (LMUS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resizing with Arbitrary Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hybrid Resizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.1 Computational Cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

170 170 172 173 175 175 176 177 179 182 184 184 185 187 191 192 193

Image resizing is often required for accommodating images into a suitable format as demanded by different applications involving display, transmission, and storage of images. Display devices over a wide range of resolution are available nowadays. Camera resolution also varies widely, and there is a need for displaying images in a desired spatial resolution in agreement with display resolutions. Hence, resizing is a task that needs to be performed in such a scenario. This is true not only for images, but videos also need to be resized for the same purpose. However, in this chapter we restrict ourselves to the problem of image resizing. The problem of video resizing is more complex and is closely related to the more general problem of transcoding of images and videos. Hence, this is discussed in Chapter 6. The problem of image resizing deals with conversion of an image of size M1 × N1 to that of a different size, M2 × N2 . In particular, when M2 = M21 and N2 = N21 , the operation is known as image halving. On the other hand, for M2 = 2M1 and N2 = 2N1 , the process is referred to as image doubling. If both M2 and N2 are less than M1 and N1 , respectively, the process is called downsampling. Again if they are greater than the other two, it is known as upsampling. There are various interpolation techniques for performing this task in the spatial domain. In this chapter, we review some of the key approaches 169

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

170

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

[36, 60, 62, 94, 99, 108, 103, 106, 111, 123, 124, 132, 134, 136] to solving this problem in the block DCT space by exploiting different properties of DCT as discussed in Chapter 2. In the next section, we first consider the problem of image halving and image doubling. Subsequently, techniques to carry out more general resizing tasks are discussed.

5.1

Image Halving and Image Doubling in the Compressed Domain

In the early stage of development of various techniques in the transform domain, problems of image halving and image doubling drew considerable attention from various researchers. Later, some of these techniques were extended to the development of resizing algorithms with arbitrary factors. To understand the development of these concepts, we first review various approaches to image halving and image doubling in the following subsections.

5.1.1

Using Linear, Distributive and Unitary Transform Properties

Several approaches use the linear, distributive, and unitary transform properties of the DCT for resizing images in this domain. For example, in [123] a simple algorithm of image halving is reported that exploits those properties. In this approach, adjacent four 8×8 blocks are converted into one block, which contains averages of 2 × 2 sub-blocks of pixels from each of them. Let xij , 0 ≤ i, j ≤ 1, denote these adjacent four blocks in the spatial domain (as shown in Figure 5.1). The downsampled block xd is generated from these blocks according to the following Eq. (5.1). xd = Σ1j=0 Σ1i=0 pi xij pTj , where, p0 =

In the above equations, defined as  0.5  0 D4×8 =   0 0

D4×8 04×8

, p1 =

04×8 D4×8

(5.1)

.

(5.2)

04×8 is a 4 × 8 null (or zero) matrix, and D4×8 is 0.5 0 0 0

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

0 0.5 0 0

0 0.5 0 0

0 0 0.5 0

0 0 0.5 0

0 0 0 0.5

 0 0  . 0  0.5

(5.3)

Image Resizing

x00

x01

x10

x11

171

Figure 5.1: Four adjacent spatial domain blocks. In the transform domain, Eq. (5.1) is given by DCT (xd ) = Σ1j=0 Σ1i=0 DCT (pi )DCT (xij )DCT (pTj ).

(5.4)

Eq. (5.4) provides the equivalent computation of bilinear decimation technique in the transform domain. A typical result from the transform domain operations is shown in Figure 5.2. Even though the matrices p1 and p2 are sparse in the spatial domain, their DCTs (denoted by P1 and P2 , respectively) are not so sparse, as shown below.   0.5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0  0.453 0.204 −0.034 0.010 0 −0.006 0.014 −0.041     0 0.49 0 0 0 0 0 −0.098     −0.159 0.388 0.237 −0.041 0 0.027 −0.098 −0.077  , P1 =    0 0 0.462 0 0 0 −0.191 0    0.106 −0.173 0.355 0.204 0 −0.136 −0.147 0.034      0 0 0 0.416 0 −0.278 0 0 −0.090 0.136 −0.173 0.360 0 −0.240 0.072 −0.027 (5.5) 

     P2 =      

 0.500 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 −0.453 0.204 0.034 0.010 0 −0.006 −0.014 −0.041   0 −0.49 0 0 0 0 0 0.098   0.159 0.388 −0.237 −0.041 0 0.027 0.098 −0.077  .  0 0 0.462 0 0 0 −0.191 0  −0.106 −0.173 −0.355 0.204 0 −0.136 0.147 0.034    0 0 0 −0.416 0 0.278 0 0 0.090 0.136 0.173 0.360 0 −0.240 −0.072 −0.027 (5.6)

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

172

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

(a)

(b)

(c)

Figure 5.2: Image halving using linear distributive and unitary properties of DCT: (a) original image, (b) bilinear decimation in spatial domain, and (c) downsampled image in the transform domain (58.24 dB with respect to the image in (b) with JPQM as 8.52). Hence, if a fast DCT (and IDCT) algorithm [157] is employed in spatial domain processing, it requires less computation compared to the above approach.

5.1.2

Using Convolution-Multiplication Properties

In this approach similar to the resizing operations in spatial domain, images are subjected to low-pass filtering before downsampling or after upsampling. In Chapter 3, we have already discussed how filtering is performed directly in the DCT domain by using the convolution multiplication property. For example, in [94], during the downsampling operation, low-pass filtering is applied using the third relationship of Eq. (2.94) of Chapter 2. The relevant relationship in 1-D is restated below. √ 2N C2e (x(l)) C2e (y(m)) , C1e (x ⊛ y(n − 1)) = (5.7) 0 ≤ l, m ≤ N − 1 , −1 ≤ n < N . Using the above, we compute the filtered output in the compressed domain. Next, by applying the downsampling property of DCT coefficients (refer to Theorem 2.11 in Section 2.2.4.2 of Chapter 2), the downsampled coefficients in the type-II DCT space are computed. For the doubling operation, the DCT coefficients are computed using Theorem 2.12 (refer to Section 2.2.4.2), which is followed by a low-pass filtering in the DCT domain. In [132], these techniques are further refined by considering the spatial relationship of adjacent blocks. It should be mentioned here that truncation or zero-padding of DCT coefficients itself is a kind of low-pass filtering operation, which also takes care of the adjustment of coefficients through the upsampling or downsampling processes as described in Theorems 2.11 and 2.12 of Chapter 2.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

173

Image Resizing

In [62], instead of a convolution-multiplication property of DCTs, a multiplication-convolution property is used. In this case, downsampling and upsampling operations are shown as the sum of multiplication operations of the sample values with given windows in the spatial domain. The multiplication operations are efficiently computed in the transform domain using symmetric convolution in the DCT domain (refer to the fourth relationship of Eq. (2.94) in Chapter 2). For the sake of brevity, the concept is discussed for processing DCT blocks in 1-D in the following subsections. 5.1.2.1

Two-fold Downsampling of 8-point DCT Blocks in 1-D

Let us consider two adjacent blocks of 8 sample points in the spatial domain and denote the sequences as x1 (n), 0 ≤ n ≤ 7 and x2 (n), 0 ≤ n < 7. Consider the half-symmetric extension of these two sequences such that for x1 (n) the point of symmetry lies in its beginning and the same at the end for x2 (n). The extended sequences are represented in the following forms: x1 (n) 0≤n≤7 x f1 (n) = (5.8) x1 (15 − n) 8 ≤ n ≤ 15 x2 (7 − n) 0 ≤ n ≤ 7 x f2 (n) = (5.9) x2 (n − 8) 8 ≤ n ≤ 15

This makes the length of the extended sequences 16. To form a concatenated sequence of x1 (n) followed by x2 (n), we multiply them them window functions w1 (n) and w2 (n), respectively, as given in the following expression: x(n) = w1 (n)x1 (n) + w2 (n)x2 (n) where

(5.10)

w1 (n) =

1 0≤n≤7 0 8 ≤ n ≤ 15

(5.11)

w2 (n) =

0 0≤n≤7 1 8 ≤ n ≤ 15

(5.12)

and,

In the DCT domain, equivalent operations on X1 (k) and X2 (k) (DCTs of x1 (n) and x2 (n)), respectively, are shown in the following expressions. First, DCTs of extended sequences are obtained as follows: 2X1 ( k2 ) for k even. f X1 (k) = (5.13) 0 for k odd. f2 (k) = X

k

(−1) 2 2X1 ( k2 ) for k even. 0 for k odd.

(5.14)

f1 (k) and X f2 (k) are 16-point DCTs of x1 (n) In the above equations, both X and x2 (n). Hence, the equivalent concatenation operation as described in Eq.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

174

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

(5.10) is performed using the convolution multiplication theorem in the following form: 1 f f X(k) = √ (X 1 (k)sW1 (k) + X2 (k)sW2 (k)), 4 2

(5.15)

where W1 (k) and W2 (k) are DCTs of w1 (n) and w2 (n). The symbol s denotes the skew circular convolution. Finally, for downsampling 16-point X(k) to 8-point coefficients, we perform the truncation operation with scaling as discussed in Chapter 2. Hence, representing DCT coefficients by column vectors Xd and X, respectively, the downsampled DCT coefficients are given by Xd = I8 08 X. (5.16) In [62], how the above computation could be performed efficiently by identifying several redundancies has been discussed. From Eqs. (5.15) and (5.16) equivalent computation is expressed as follows [62]. 1 Xd = √ (W1d X1 + SW1d SX2 ), 4 2

(5.17)

where W1d is defined from W1 , the DCT of w1 (n), as follows:

d W1

=

2√2W (1) 0 0 0 ··· 1 W1√ (2) + W1 (4) W1 (4) + W1 (6) W1 (6) + W1 (8) ··· 6 W1 (2) 6 0 2W1 (1) 0 0 ··· 6 6 W (4) W (2) + W (6) W (2) + W (8) W (4) + W (10) ··· 6 1 1 1 1√ 1 1 1 6 6 2W1 (1) 0 ··· 0 0 6 6 W1 (6) W1 (4) + W1 (8) W1 (2) + W1 (10) W1 (2) ··· √ + W1 (12) 4 0 0 0 2W1 (1) ··· W1 (8) W1 (6) + W1 (10) W1 (4) + W1 (12) W1 (2) + W1 (14) ··· 3 ··· 0 0 0 0 ··· W1 (8) + W1 (10) W1 (10) + W1 (12) W1 (12) + W1 (14) W1 (14) + W1 (16) 7 7 ··· 0 0 0 0 7 7 ··· W1 (6) + W1 (12) W1 (8) + W1 (14) W1 (10) + W1 (16) W1 (12) − W1 (16) 7 7. ··· 0 0 0 0 7 7 ··· W1 (4) + W1 (14) W1 (6) + W1 (16) W1 (8) − W1 (16) W1 (10) − W1 (14) 7 5 ··· 0 0 0 0 ··· W1 (2) + W1 (16) W1 (4) − W1 (16) W1 (6) − W1 (14) W1 (8) − W1 (12) (5.18)

In the above equation, due to the constraint of space, the first four columns of each row are shown in the top rows of the matrix and its bottom eight rows contain the remaining four columns corresponding to each of them. Further, S in Eq. (5.17) is defined below:   1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 −1 0 0 0 0 0 0    0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0    0 0 0 −1 0 0 0 0   S= (5.19) 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0  .   0 0 0 0 0 −1 0 0    0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0  0 0 0 0 0 0 0 −1

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

175

Image Resizing

5.1.2.2

Twofold Upsampling of 8-point DCT Blocks in 1-D

While upsampling an 8-point DCT block X(k), 0 ≤ k ≤ 7, first it is converted e into a 16-point block by zero-padding and appropriate scaling to X(k) as follows: √ 2X(k) 0 ≤ k ≤ 7 e X(k) = (5.20) 0 8 ≤ k ≤ 15 Let the upsampled block in the spatial domain be x(n). We obtain two 8-point blocks by using the same window functions in the following way: y1 (n) y2 (n)

= x(n)w1 (n), 0 ≤ n ≤ 7, = x(n + 8)w2 (n + 8), 0 ≤ n ≤ 7.

(5.21)

Equivalent operations in DCT space to obtain the DCT of y1 (n) and y2 (n) are shown in the following expressions: Y1 (k) = Y2 (k) =

1 e 4 (X(2k)sW1 (2k)), e (−1)k 14 (X(2k)sW 2 (2k)),

0 ≤ k ≤ 7, 0 ≤ k ≤ 7.

(5.22)

The above equations use the relationship of DCT coefficients between the npoint DCT coefficients with their upsampled versions (of 2n-point DCT) when the sequence is extended in the spatial domain with trailing zeroes or leading zeroes. The above computation is expressed in matrix notation as follows [62]: Y1 Y2

= =

1 √ (W1u X), 2 2 1 √ (SW u SX). 1 2 2

(5.23)

where W1u is defined from W1 as follows:

u W1

=

2√2W (1) 2W1 (2) 2W1 (4) ··· 1 √ 0 6 2W1 (1) W1 (2) + W1 (6) ··· 0 W1 (2) + W1 (4) 6 6 0 W1 (4) + W1 (6) 0 W1 (2) + W1 (8) ··· 6 6 0 W1 (6) + W1 (8) 0 W1 (4) + W1 (10) ··· 6 6 0 W1 (8) + W1 (10) 0 W1 (6) + W1 (12) ··· 6 6 0 W1 (10) + W1 (12) 0 W1 (8) + W1 (14) ··· 4 0 W1 (12) + W1 (14) 0 W1 (10) + W1 (16) ··· 0 W1 (14) + W1 (16) 0 W1 (12) − W1 (16) ··· 3 ··· 0 2W1 (6) 0 2W1 (8) ··· W1 (4) + W1 (8) 0 W1 (6) + W1 (10) 7 √ 0 7 ··· 2W1 (1) W1 (2) + W1 (10) 0 W (4) + W (12) 7 1 1 √ 7 ··· 0 W1 (2) + W1 (12) 2W1 (1) W1 (2) + W1 (14) 7 7. ··· 0 W1 (4) + W1 (14) 0 W1 (2) + W1 (16) 7 7 ··· 0 W1 (6) + W1 (16) 0 W1 (4) − W1 (16)7 5 ··· 0 W1 (8) − W1 (16) 0 W1 (6) − W1 (14) ··· 0 W1 (10) − W1 (14) 0 W1 (8) − W1 (12)

(5.24)

W1u also follows the same notation of W1d regarding representation of rows. 5.1.2.3

Example in 2-D

The above concept is extended in 2-D by exploiting the separability property of DCT. Let Xi,j , 1 ≤ i, j ≤ 2 be four adjacent 8 × 8 DCT blocks. Eq. (5.17) is extended to 2-D in the following form: Xd =

1 (Pd X11 PdT + Pd X12 QTd + Qd X21 PdT + Qd X22 QTd ), 32

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

(5.25)

176

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

(a)

(b)

Figure 5.3: Image halving and doubling using convolution-multiplication property [62]: (a) downsampled image(36 dB with respect to the image in Figure 5.2(b) with JPQM as 9.31) and (b) upsampled image with JPQM as 6.29. where Pd = W1d and Qd = SW1d S. Similarly, Eq. (5.23) is extended to 2-D as given below: Y11 = 18 (Pu XPuT ), Y12 = 18 (Pu XQTu ), (5.26) Y21 = 18 (Qu XPuT ), 1 T Y22 = 8 (Qu XQu ), where Pu = W1u and Qu = SW1u S. Typical examples of image halving and image doubling are shown in Figure 5.3. We refer to these techniques in this text as image halving using convolution multiplication property (IHCMP) and image doubling using convolution multiplication property (IDCMP), respectively.

5.1.3

Using Subband DCT Approximation with Block Composition and Decomposition

In some schemes, subband relationships of DCT coefficients (refer to Eqs. (2.165) and (2.166) of Chapter 2) are more effectively used to downsample and

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

Image Resizing

177

upsample input DCT blocks. As higher-order DCT coefficients are ignored here, the operation becomes equivalent to a low-pass filtering operation in the transform domain. The performance of such approximations is found to be better than the conventional low-pass filtering operations [36, 108]. The approximated coefficients are retargeted in DCT blocks of desired sizes (e.g., 8×8 for JPEG compressed images) with block composition and decomposition. Various intuitive approaches [36, 106, 125] are put forward in this regard. A few representative schemes are highlighted below. 5.1.3.1

Image Halving

Consider four adjacent 8 × 8 DCT blocks Xij , 0 ≤ i, j ≤ 1. We obtain 4 × 4 approximated DCT blocks using the subband relationship from each of them. For simplicity we use here only truncated approximations from Eq. (2.166) in d Chapter 2. Let the approximated 4 × 4 blocks be represented as Xij , which is given by the following expression: d Xij =

1 [Xij (k, l)]0≤k,l≤3 . 2

(5.27)

Next these four decimated blocks are merged to an 8 × 8 DCT block (Figure 5.4) with the help of the block composition matrix A(2,4) (refer to Section 2.2.4.5 of Chapter 2). d X00 Y = A(2,4) d X10

d X01 T d A(2,4) . X11

(5.28)

As the above technique performs the operation through subband approximation followed by block composition, we refer to this approach as Image Halving through Approximation followed by Composition (IHAC) [103]. The above computation could be performed more efficiently by exploiting the sparse property of A(2,4) and also the relationship among the elements of its submatrices. In [36], another equivalent form of computation is presented, as discussed below. For the sake of brevity, we restrict our discussion to 1-D here. Consider two adjacent 8-point DCT blocks as X1 and X2 (column vectors) and their 4d d point truncated approximations as X1 and X2 , respectively. Let us represent the 8 × 8 DCT matrix C8 as TL TR , where TL and TR are respective 8 × 4 submatrices. Then the downsampled 8-point DCT block (Y ) is computed as Y

d C4T 04 X1 , 04 C4T X2d = (TL C4T )X1d + (TR C4T )X2d , = (Rd + Sd )X1d + (Rd − Sd )X2d , = Rd (X1d + X2d ) + Sd (X1d − X2d ), =

TL

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

TR

(5.29)

178

4x4

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

4x4 4x4

4x4

4x4

4x4

8x8 4x4

4x4

Figure 5.4: Image halving [36]: four 4 × 4 approximated DCT coefficients of adjacent blocks are merged into an 8 × 8 DCT block. where Rd and Sd are found to be sparse matrices  .7071 0 0  0 .296 0   0 0 0   0 .5594 0 Rd =   0 0 .7071   0 −.2492 0   0 0 0 0 .1964 0

and,

as shown below.  0 .0162   0   −.069 , 0   .3468   0  .6122

(5.30)



 0 0 0 0  .6407 0 −.0528 0     0  .7071 0 0   −.2250  0 .3629 0  . Sd =   0 0 0 0    .1503  0 .5432 0    0 0 0 .7071 −.1274 0 −.2654 0

(5.31)

Y = (U + V )RdT + (U − V )SdT ,

(5.32)

In 2-D, the equivalent form of Eq. (5.27) is given as

where U V

d d d d = Rd (X00 + X10 ) + Sd (X00 − X10 ), d d d d = Rd (X01 + X11 ) + Sd (X01 − X11 ).

(5.33)

It is shown in [36] that the above computation is performed with 1.25 multiplications and 1.25 additions per pixel of the original image. As mentioned before, the algorithm presented above essentially performs subband approximation before composition of smaller blocks to the larger one. These operations may be performed in the reverse order also. In this case, four

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

179

Image Resizing

8x8

8x8

8x8

8x8

8x8

8x8

Figure 5.5: Image halving [103]: four 8 × 8 are composed and the composed block is approximated to an 8 × 8 DCT block.

(a)

(b)

Figure 5.6: Image halving: (a) IHAC (37.43 dB with respect to the image in Figure 5.2(b) with JPQM as 9.14) and (b) IHCA (36 dB with respect to the image in Figure 5.2(b) with JPQM as 9.31). 8 × 8 blocks are composed into a 16 × 16 block and the latter is decimated to an 8 × 8 one through subband approximation (see Figure 5.5). This approach is referred to as Image Halving through block Composition followed by subband Approximation (IHCA) [103]. Suppose Xij , 0 ≤ i, j ≤ 1 are four adjacent 8 × 8 blocks. In that case, computations related to the IHCA technique are given below. X00 X01 T Z = A(2,8) A . (5.34) X10 X11 (2,8)

1 [Z(k, l)] 0 ≤ k, l ≤ 7. (5.35) 2 However, in [103], it is observed that the IHCA is computationally more expensive than the former technique, requiring 6 multiplications and 5.75 additions per-pixel of the original image. Y =

5.1.3.2

Image Doubling

For image doubling operation, we follow the computational steps as depicted in Figure 5.7. In this case, an 8 × 8 DCT block (say X) is decomposed into four 4 × 4 DCT blocks in the following way: d d Y00 Y01 T (5.36) d d = A(2,4) XA(2,4) . Y10 Y11

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

180

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

4x4 4x4

4x4

4x4

4x4

8x8

Zeroes 4x4 Zeroes

4x4 Zeroes 4x4 Zeroes

Figure 5.7: Image doubling [36]: an 8 × 8 DCT block is decomposed into four 4 × 4 DCT blocks, each of which is approximated to an 8 × 8 DCT block with zero-padding. Each of the 4×4 blocks are then approximated to an 8×8 block by proper scald ing (multiplying by 2) and zero-padding. For example, from Y00 the following upsampled block Y00 is generated: d Y00 04 . (5.37) Y00 = 2 04 04 As the above technique performs decomposition before the subband approximation, it is referred to as Image Doubling through Decomposition followed by Approximation (IDDA) [103]. In [36], similar to downsampling, the above computation is performed efficiently with the help of Rd and Sd (refer to Eq. (5.33)) with 1.25 multiplications and 1.25 additions per-pixel of the upsampled image. In another approach [106], at first, subband approximation is carried out to an 8 × 8 block for converting it into a 16 × 16 block. Then the larger block is decomposed into four adjacent 8 × 8 blocks (refer to Figure 5.8). This technique is referred to as Image Doubling through Approximation followed by Decomposition (IDAD). It has been reported in [106] that this approach provides better quality of results than the former technique. However, the former approach is more computationally efficient. In [106], how the latter approach (that is, IDAD) could be efficiently implemented for the image doubling operation is discussed. Let B be a block of ˜ be the approximated 16 × 16 DCT coefficients in the original image. Let B DCT coefficients obtained from B as ˆ ˜ = B 08 . B (5.38) 08 08 ˆ is obtained from B according to Eq. (2.165) or Eq. (2.166) In Eq. (5.38), B of Chapter 2. As before, we denote C16 and C8 as 16 × 16 and 8 × 8 DCT matrices, respectively. Let us also represent the C16 matrix by its four 8 × 8

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

181

Image Resizing

8x8

8x8

8x8

8x8

8x8

8x8 Zeroes

Figure 5.8: Image doubling [106]: an 8 × 8 DCT block is approximated to a 16 × 16 DCT block with zero-padding, which is subsequently decomposed into four 8 × 8 DCT blocks. submatrices as follows: C16 =

TLL THL

TLH THH .

.

(5.39)

Hence, the four 8 × 8 DCT blocks, Bij , 0 ≤ i, j ≤ 1, could be computed by the following set of equations: B00 B12 B21 B22

= = = =

ˆ uT , PuT BP T ˆ T Pu BQu , ˆ uT , RuT BP ˆ T. RuT BQ u

(5.40)

where Pu = TLLC8T , Qu = TLH C8T , and Ru = THL C8T . We observe that the conversion matrices, Pu , Qu , and Ru , are all 8 × 8 matrices, and they are sparse. Computations could be further reduced by considering Pu = E + F and Qu = E − F , where E and F are defined as

2 E=

6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 4

.7071 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 .2986 0 .5446 0 −.2219 0 .1509

0 0 0 0 .7071 0 0 0

and

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

0 0.0241 0 −.0951 0 .4008 0 .4971

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0.0071 0 −0.0235 0 .0493 0 −.1078

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0.0018 0 −0.0057 0 0.011 0 −0.0196

3

7 7 7 7 7 7, 7 7 7 7 5

(5.41)

182

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

Figure 5.9: Image doubling through IDDA (JPQM = 5.26).

2 F =

6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 4

0 .6376 0 −.2153 0 .1326 0 −.0985

0 0 .7071 0 0 0 0 0

0 −.0585 0 .3812 0 .5081 0 −.2024

0 0 0 0 0 0 16 0

0 −.0125 0 .0436 0 −.1061 0 .4065

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 −.0039 0 0.0128 0 −.0253 0 .0476

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

3

7 7 7 7 7 7. 7 7 7 7 5

(5.42)

In [106] it is shown that these computations are carried out with 4 multiplications and 3.375 additions per pixel of the upsampled image. In this approach, high-frequency components in the upsampled blocks are not exactly zeroes as opposed to the previous one [36]. This makes marginal improvement in the quality of resized images.

5.1.4

Performance Analysis

Apart from computational costs, there are other performance measures for comparing the different techniques discussed above. One way of measuring the performance of both the image halving and image doubling techniques in tandem is to get the output generated by them when they are applied one after another to an input image. Then the result is compared with the

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

183

Image Resizing

Figure 5.10: Image doubling through IDAD ( JPQM = 6.88). Table 5.1: (PSNR in DB, JPQM) values after halving and doubling a greylevel image Images Lena Watch Cap F-16

IHCMP-IDCMP (35.36 , 8.67) (30.05, 7.5) (34.75 , 8.79) (33.22 , 8.76)

IHAC-IDDA (34.7, 7.36) (29.21 , 6.2) (34.41 , 7.1 ) (32.48 , 7.32)

IHAC-IDAD (35.02 , 8.86) (29.68 , 7.77) (34.44 , 8.9 ) (32.86 , 9.0)

IHCA-IDDA (34.41 , 6.82) (28.9 , 5.62) (34.11 , 6.79) ( 32.16 , 6.74)

IHCA-IDAD (35.36 , 8.67) (30.05 , 7.5) (34.75 , 8.79) (33.22 , 8.76)

original image. In this case, the PSNR measure is chosen to study the faithful reconstruction at the end. In the block DCT space, JPQM is also used to observe the quality of images in terms of occurrences of blocking artifacts in the resulting image. In Table 5.1 we present these measures when a pair of image halving and image doubling techniques are applied to a set of images.1 Note that the IHCMP-IDCMP techniques and IHCA-IDAD provide identical performance measures for all these images.

1 Obtained

from http://vision.ai.uiuc.edu/∼dugad/draft/dct.html

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

184

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

5.2

Resizing with Integral Factors

The techniques for image halving and doubling are extended also for downsampling or upsampling an image with integral factors. For example, an L×M h downsampling operation reduces the height (h) and width (w) of an image to L w and M , respectively. Similarly the upsampling operation converts to an image of size hL × wM . In [62], using the similar application of the multiplication– convolution property, resizing with integral factors has been demonstrated for L = M = 3. However, the technique is limited by the fact that both the integral factors are required to be the same (i.e., L = M ) along the horizontal and vertical directions. Forms and expressions of convolution matrices (see Eqs. (5.18) and (5.24)) also vary widely depending upon the factor L. In [103], however, the same computational steps for image halving and doubling are adapted conveniently under a general framework. In these techniques the factors need not be the same for both the directions. In the following subsection, these concepts are elaborated.

5.2.1

L × M Downsampling Algorithm (LMDS)

The LMDS algorithm is based on the strategy of block composition followed by subband approximation similar to the IHCA. In this case, L×M numbers of N × N DCT blocks are converted into a block of LN × M N -DCT. Then, from this composed one, the N × N DCT coefficients of the downsampled block are obtained using the subband relationship. The subband approximation used here is extended from Eq. (2.166) of Chapter 2. This is stated below. Theorem 5.1 Let XLL (k, l), 0 ≤ k ≤ N − 1, 0 ≤ l ≤ N − 1, be the DCT coefficients of an N × N block of the downsampled image. Then the DCT coefficients of an LN × M N block are approximated by the following: √ LM XLL (k, l), k, l = 0, 1, . . . , N − 1, X(k, l) = 0, otherwise.

(5.43)

The algorithm for downsampling of images by L × M is described below. Algorithm L × M Downsampling(LMDS) For every adjacent L × M block, { Xi,j , 0 ≤ i ≤ L − 1, 0 ≤ j ≤ M − 1}, of the input image, perform the following computations: {

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

Image Resizing

185

(a) Compose an LN × M N DCT block Z as follows:   X0,0 X0,1 ··· X0,(M−1)  X1,0 X1,1 ··· X1,(M−1)   AT Z = A(L,N )    (M,N ) . . . ··· . X(L−1),0 X(L−1),1 · · · X(L−1),(M−1) (5.44) (b) Get the resulting N × N -DCT coefficients of the downsampled image ( Y ) from Eq. (5.43). r 1 Y = [Z(k, l)]0≤k,l≤N −1 . (5.45) LM } End L × M Downsampling(LMDS) For efficient computation, we may not compute the full Z matrix in the above algorithm. It is sufficient to compute only the topmost and leftmost N ×N submatrix of Z. Hence, Y could be computed effectively by the following expression: r

1 (L,N ) (M,N ) T (M,N ) T (L,N ) (M,N ) T (M,N ) T (B00 (A00 ) +B01 (A01 ) )+A01 (B10 (A00 ) +B11 (A01 ) )), (A00 LM (5.46) (L,N ) (L,N ) where A00 (of size N ×N ) and A01 (of size N ×(L−1)N ) are submatrices (M,N ) (M,N ) of A(L,N ) . Similarly, A00 (of size N ×N ) and A01 (of size N ×(M −1)N ) are submatrices of A(M,N ) . Again B00 , B01 , B10 , and B11 are submatrices of Y =

the L × M DCT blocks, and their sizes are N × N , N × (M − 1)N , (L − 1)N × N , and (L − 1)N × (M − 1)N , respectively. Hence following the general computational complexity model of matrix multiplication (GCCMMM) (refer (LMDS) to Section 1.7.1 of Chapter 1) the total numbers of multiplications (nm ) (LMDS) and additions (na ) for the LMDS algorithm are given by DS) n(LM m

(M,N )

= + + +

DS) n(LM a

(M,N )

= + + +

(M,N )

nm (A00 ; N, N, N ) + nm (A00 ; N, N, (L − 1)N ) (M,N ) (M,N ) nm (A01 ; N, (M − 1)N, N ) + nm (A01 ; N, (M − 1)N, (L − 1)N ) (L,N ) (L,N ) nm (A00 ; N, N, N ) + nm (A01 ; N, (L − 1)N, N ) N 2. (5.47) (M,N )

na (A00 ; N, N, N ) + na (A00 ; N, N, (L − 1)N ) (M,N ) (M,N ) na (A01 ; N, (M − 1)N, N ) + na (A01 ; N, (M − 1)N, (L − 1)N ) (L,N ) (L,N ) na (A00 ; N, N, N ) + na (A01 ; N, (L − 1)N, N ) 3N 2 . (5.48) 2

In this computation, N multiplications are required for subband approximation for deriving the subsampled DCT coefficients (refer to Eq. (5.43)). In Eq. (5.47), this is also taken care of. In Table 5.2, the computational cost for the LMDS with different values of L and M are provided [103]. In this table, nm and na denote, respectively, the number of multiplications and additions required for processing a pixel of the original image.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

186

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

Table 5.2: Per-pixel (of the original image) computational cost of LMDS L×M 1×2 1×3 2×3 2×5 2×7 3×4 3×5

5.2.2

LMDS (nm , na ) (5.5,4.5) (5.08,4.54) (6.08,5.54) (5.3,6.25) (4.57,6.25) (5.31,6.97) (5.25,6.23)

L×M 2×2 3×3 4×4 5×5 6×6 7×7 8×8

LMDS (nm , na ) (7,6) (6,5.5) (5.22,7.38) (5.2,6.42) (3.82,6.60) (4.43,6.39) (3.95,7.78)

L × M upsampling Algorithm (LMUS)

The LMUS technique is an extension of the IDAD algorithm (refer to Section 5.1.3.2), where subband approximation is followed by block decomposition. Here, the approximation is carried out using the same Eq. (5.43). Hence, an N × N DCT block B of an image is converted into an LN × M N DCT block ˆ of the upsampled image as follows: B √ LM B 0(N,(M−1)N ) ˆ , (5.49) B= 0((L−1)N,N ) 0((L−1)N,(M−1)N ) where 0(a,b) denotes a matrix of a × b zero elements. After conversion, DCTblock decomposition is used to obtain L × M numbers of N × N -DCT blocks in the upsampled image. This algorithm is referred to as L × M -UpSampling (LMUS). In the LMUS, for efficient computation, full decomposition is not carried −1 out. Consider that IA(L,N ) and IA(M,N ) represent A−1 (L,N ) and A(M,N ) , respectively. Their submatrices are also defined in the same way that submatrices of A(L,N ) (or A(M,N ) ) are defined in the computation of the LMDS (see the previous section). The resulting decomposition operation is factored into the following forms: "

(L,N )

IA00 (L,N ) IA10

#» –" (L,N ) (M,N ) T ˆ IA01 (IA00 ) B 0(N,(M −1)N ) (L,N ) (M,N ) T 0 0 IA11 ((L−1)N,N ) ((L−1)N,(M −1).N ) (IA 01 " # ) (L,N ) ˆ (M,N ) T (L,N ) ˆ (M,N ) T IA00 B(IA00 ) IA00 B(IA10 ) = . (L,N ) ˆ (M,N ) T (L,N ) ˆ (M,N ) T IA01 B(IA00 ) IA10 B(IA10 )

(M,N )

(IA10 )T (M,N ) T (IA11 )

(5.50)

The numbers of multiplications and additions are given by the following equations: U S) n(LM m

(L,N )

= + + +

(L,N )

nm (IA00 ; N, N, N ) + nm (IA10 ; (L − 1)N, N, N ) (M,N ) (M,N ) nm (IA00 ; N, N, N ) + nm (IA10 ; N, (M − 1)N, N ) (M,N ) (M,N ) ; (M − 1)N, N, (L − 1)N ) nm (IA00 ; N, N, (L − 1)N ) + nm (IA10 N 2, (5.51)

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

#

187

Image Resizing

Table 5.3: Per-pixel computational cost (of the upsampled image) of LMUS L×M 1×2 1×3 2×3 2×5 2×7 3×4 3×5

U S) n(LM a

(L,N )

= + +

LMUS (nm , na ) (5.5,3.5) (5.2,3.54) (6.21,4.71) (6.65,5.35) (6.5,5.32) (7.47,6.14) (6.63,5.36)

L×M 2×2 3×3 4×4 5×5 6×6 7×7 8×8

LMUS (nm , na ) (7,5.25) (6.16,4.72) (7.88,6.56) (6.82,5.58) (6.93,5.74) (6.63,5.51) (7.93,6.89)

(L,N )

na (IA00 ; N, N, N ) + na (IA10 ; (L − 1)N, N, N ) (M,N ) (M,N ) na (IA00 ; N, N, N ) + na (IA10 ; N, (M − 1)N, N ) (M,N ) (M,N ) na (IA00 ; N, N, (L − 1)N ) + na (IA10 ; (M − 1)N, N, (L − 1)N ). (5.52)

The cost of computing a pixel of the upsampled image is shown in Table 5.3 [103]. Typical examples of image downsampling and upsampling operations with a factor of 3 × 2 are shown in Figure 5.11 (a) and (b), respectively.

5.3

Resizing with Arbitrary Factors

In [134], a downsampling algorithm for resizing with any arbitrary factor Rh × Rw is presented, where for every 8 × 8 block of the downsampled image, its corresponding area of influence in the original image is considered. Pixels related to that area of influence lie in a set of adjacent blocks. They are extracted to form the block of size 8Rh × 8Rw . Finally, the DCT of this block is approximated to the 8 × 8 one. All these operations are carried out in the transform domain using the linear and distributive property of DCT, and the computation is aided by using a lookup table for extraction of pixels under different overlapping conditions of the area of influence with an 8 × 8 block in the original image. Later, in [112] the concept is extended to take care of upsampling also. Though these techniques are applicable for any arbitrary factor, computation of area of influence and subsequent extraction of pixels in overlapping zones in a block varies significantly depending on the values of resizing factors. In some other approaches, downsampling and upsampling of images with integral factors are used in tandem to perform resizing with any arbitrary

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

188

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

(a)

(b)

Figure 5.11: Image resizing by a factor of 3 × 2: (a) downsampled image (JPQM = 9.19) and (b) upsampled image (JPQM = 5.86).

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

Image Resizing

189

R rational factors in the form of P Q × S , where P , Q, R, and S are positive P P integers. In [62], resizing by Q × Q is performed by first performing upsampling with P × P and then by downsampling the upsampled image by Q × Q. These two cascading tasks may be interchanged also to provide the resized image with the same factor. Though the computation in the latter approach is significantly less compared to the former one, the quality of resized images greatly suffers in this case.

In the same way, the LMDS and the LMUS algorithms operate in tandem to perform resizing with factors of rational numbers. In this case, the resizing factors along two different directions need not be same. If the LMUS is followed by the LMDS, upsampling is first carried out on the image with the integral factor of P × R, and then the downsampling operation with the factor of Q × S is applied. Alternatively, the downsampling operation (by a factor of Q × S) may be applied before upsampling (with P × R factor). The former approach is referred here as UD-Resizing Algorithm (UDRA), and the latter is called DU-Resizing Algorithm (DURA). The latter approach speeds up the computation. In Figure 5.12, a typical example of conversion of an HDTV frame (of size 1080 × 1920) to an NTSC one (of size 480 × 640) is shown [103]. For this conversion, the DURA takes 6.76M + 0.77A operations per-pixel (of the original image), whereas the UDRA takes 182.625M +21A operations perpixel (of the original image). Though the latter task involves a significantly higher number of operations, the quality of resized images is much improved. An almost similar strategy is followed in [125]. However, instead of identifying the steps as downsampling or upsampling, in this case, an 8 × 8 block of the image is resized to a block of size P × P by applying P -point IDCT over the approximated coefficients, where P may be greater or less than 8. When P is greater than 8, the DCT block is zero-padded, otherwise it is truncated. In both cases, appropriate scaling of the coefficients is carried out as it is done for subband approximation. This scales the image by the factor of P8 × P8 . In the next stage, Q-point DCT is applied to the intermediate image and converts each Q × Q DCT block to an 8 × 8 one using subband approximation. This is 8 8 achieved by scaling the intermediate image by the factor of Q ×Q . Hence, the P P effective resizing factor becomes Q × Q . The computation depends upon the P values of P and Q. By keeping Q constant, we may vary the values of P and Q to achieve scalable performance of resizing leading to a trade-off between the computational cost and quality of resized image. The technique presented in [125] is, however, limited by the fact that it is applicable for uniform resizing factors along both directions. However, a little modification of this technique will make it work with nonuniform factors. Moreover, in the same computational stage, rational resizing takes place. This makes the basic resizing operation more general, other than the conventional downsampling and upsampling operations. For example, for resizing with a P P R factor Q × R S , if Q > 1 and S < 1, we cannot refer to this operation as

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

190

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

(a)

(b)

(c)

(d)

Figure 5.12: Conversion of an HDTV frame (1080× 1920) to an NTSC frame (480 × 640): (a) HDTV, (b) NTSC by UDRA (JPQM = 10.21), (c) NTSC by DURA (JPQM = 8.35), and (d) NTSC by HRA (JPQM = 9.92).

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

Image Resizing

191

downsampling or upsampling. In that case, we refer to this operation as hybrid resizing. In the next section, we elaborate on this concept.

5.4

Hybrid Resizing

The hybrid resizing algorithm (HRA) follows the similar computational sequence of block composition, subband approximation and block decomposition. However, it distinctly differs in the way subband approximation is carried out. In this case, the subband approximation relationship is put into a more general form as given below. Let X be a DCT block of size QN × SN . The subband approximated DCT block Y of size P N × RN is given by the following expression. s PR ˆ Y= X, (5.53) QS ˆ are obtained by truncating or zero-padding of the coefficients of X in where X the respective dimensions depending upon the ordered relationship between P and Q, and R and S, as elaborated later. Using the above relationship, in the HRA technique, Q × S adjacent DCT blocks are converted to P ×R DCT blocks. The algorithm for this computation is described below. Algorithm Hybrid Resizing Algorithm (HRA) Input: Q × S adjacent DCT blocks, each of size N × N . Output: P × R adjacent DCT blocks, each of size N × N . 1. Block composition: In this step, Q × S input blocks are composed into a block of size QN × SN . 2. Subband approximation: Let Y denote the P N × RN subband approximated block obtained from the input block X of size QN × SN . Then the relationship between Y and X is expressed in the following equation: q PR Y= P ≤ Q, R ≤ S, QS [X]0≤i

Q, R ≤ S, QS 0 (P −Q)N ×RN q P R [X] 0P N ×(R−S)N , = P ≤ Q, R > S, QS 0≤i

Q, R > S. QS 0(P −Q)N ×SN 0(P −Q)N ×(R−S)N (5.54)

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

192

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

Table 5.4: JPQM values of resized images of Watch Resizing factor 2 3 3 2 2 3 3 2

× × × ×

4 5 5 4 3 2 2 3

JPQM HRA DURA UDRA 9.01 6.58 9.37 8.74 6.15 8.86 8.55 6.90 8.90 8.80 7.12 9.12

3. Block decomposition: In this step, Y is decomposed into P ×R blocks, each of size N × N . End Hybrid Resizing Algorithm We demonstrate here typical cases of different types of resizing for the image Watch in Figure 5.13. In Table 5.4, we provide JPQM values for different techniques.

5.4.1

Computational Cost

As the subband approximation is carried out in a more general framework, it is difficult to design efficient techniques by computing only the relevant coefficients of the resulting DCT blocks. In this case, full composition and decomposition are carried out. However, exploiting the relationships among the elements of the composition matrix and using its sparsity, the computational cost is significantly reduced (refer to properties of block composition matrices and number of operations required to perform composition and decomposition in Section 2.2.4.5 of Chapter 2). In Table 5.5, we provide the computational costs for HRA, DURA, and UDRA. All these costs are expressed as the numbers of multiplications (nm ) and additions (na ) per-pixel of the original image. The usefulness of the HRA lies in the fact that it significantly reduces the number of multiplications compared to the UDRA, though the quality of the resized image (refer to Table 5.4) is almost at par with those obtained from the latter. This is demonstrated also by using the HRA to convert the HDTV frame to the NTSC frame as shown in Figure 5.12(d). The JPQM value of the resized image is quite close to the one obtained by the UDRA. In this case, the HRA takes 42.5 multiplications and 75.15 additions for processing a pixel of the original image. The cost is significantly reduced compared to the UDRA. The DURA is the fastest, though images resized by this technique suffer heavily from the appearance of blocking artifacts (see Figure 5.12(c)). This fact is also supported by low JPQM values in Table 5.5.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

Image Resizing

193

Table 5.5: Per-pixel computational cost of arbitrary resizing algorithms Resizing factor 2 3 3 2 2 3 3 2

5.5

× × × ×

4 5 5 4 3 2 2 3

(nm , na ) HRA DURA UDRA (33.6, 53.47) (9.25, 3.27) (138.75, 49) (67.15, 91) (17.8, 10.05) (142.38, 80.38) (27.58, 40.17) (13.08, 4.71) (78.5, 28.25) (27.58, 40.17) (13.02, 5.27) (78.13, 31.63)

Summary

Image resizing in the compressed domain has drawn considerable attention from researchers in recent years. Initially, efforts were mostly concentrated on development of algorithms for image halving and doubling techniques. Later, those approaches are extended for resizing with arbitrary factors. In one such computational approach, the resizing operation is performed as a combination of block composition (or decomposition) and subband approximation of DCT coefficients. Resizing with rational factors is usually performed in a cascading combination of downsampling and upsampling or the reverse. However, using a more general form of subband approximation, we perform this operation in a single step. This type of resizing is referred to here as hybrid resizing as in this case image dimensions are independently up-sized or down-sized.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

194

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

(a)

(b)

(c) Figure 5.13: Hybrid resizing: (a)by (d) by 23 × 23 .

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

(d) 2 3

× 45 , (b) by

3 2

×

5 4

(c) by

2 3

× 32 , and

Chapter 6 Transcoding

6.1

6.2

6.3

6.4 6.5

6.6 6.7

Intertransforms Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1.1 DWT to DCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1.1.1 Inserting Zeroes in DWT Coeffcients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1.1.2 DCT Domain Upsampling in 2D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1.1.3 Upsampling the DCT for Multilevel DWT . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1.1.4 Wavelet Synthesis in the Compressed Domain . . . . . . . . 6.1.1.5 Transcoding in 2-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1.2 DCT to DWT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1.2.1 Even and Odd Downsampling of DCT Blocks . . . . . . . . 6.1.2.2 Even and Odd Downsampling in 2-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1.2.3 Wavelet Analysis in the DCT Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1.3 DCT to ICT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1.4 ICT to DCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Image Transcoding: JPEG2000 to JPEG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2.1 Transcoding with WBDT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2.2 Transcoding with Wavelet Doubling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2.3 Transcoding with DCT Domain Doubling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2.4 Performance Metrics for Transcoding Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Video Downscaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3.1 Inverse Motion Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3.1.1 Single Blockwise Inverse Motion Compensation . . . . . . 6.3.1.2 Macroblockwise Inverse Motion Compensation . . . . . . . 6.3.1.3 Video Downscaling and IMC: Integrated Scheme . . . . . 6.3.2 Motion Vector Refinement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3.2.1 Adaptive Motion Vector Resampling (AMVR) . . . . . . . 6.3.2.2 Median Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3.2.3 Nonlinear Motion Vector Resampling (NLMR) Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3.3 Macroblock Type Declaration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3.4 Downsizing MPEG2 Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3.5 Arbitrary Video Downsizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frame Skipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Video Transcoding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.1 H.264 to MPEG-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.1.1 Motion Estimation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.1.2 Skip Macroblock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.1.3 Intramacroblock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.1.4 Advantage of the Hybrid Approach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.2 MPEG-2 to H.264 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Error Resilient Transcoding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

196 197 197 199 200 200 203 204 204 206 206 207 208 208 209 209 209 210 211 215 215 217 218 220 220 221 221 222 222 224 225 227 228 230 230 230 231 231 231 234

195

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

196

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

Transcoding of images and videos accomplishes the task of converting them from one format to another. For an image encoded and compressed in a format, the conversion may involve repackaging it into a different compression standard. Image resizing, discussed in the previous chapter, is also a transcoding operation. For a video, there could be various types of transcoding operations, such as transforming it into a different compression standard. Even within the same standard, alteration of its bit rate, frame rate, frame size, etc., are considered transcoding operations. Transcoding is required for different multimedia applications involving their presentation and communication over heterogeneous devices and networks. For example, the resolution of a display device may vary from 240×160 of a palmtop to as high as 3280×2048 of an advanced monitor for medical diagnostics. To adapt the display of an image or video of a given resolution, we require to bring it within the permissible display resolution of the device. In most applications, services available for display and communication of video and images are restricted by their adherence to a few selected standards. Hence, transcoding provides an interface for accommodating other representations, not supported by those services. Consider a scenario, in which images are saved in a server in the JPEG2000 format, as it is usually more efficient than the JPEG standard in storage requirement. However, even today, JPEG is the standard of image representation widely supported by various applications for the purpose of display and processing. Many of them may not support JPEG2000. In this case, we have to transcode a JPEG2000 image into a JPEG standard, before feeding it to such an application. In this chapter, we discuss various issues of transcoding. As most of the image and video standards use the DCT, ICT, or DWT for their representations, first we review techniques for intertransform conversion, directly in their domains. Next we discuss a few specific cases of transcoding. Image resizing was discussed in the previous chapter. In this chapter, we also consider the video resizing problem.

6.1

Intertransforms Conversion

As in image compression standards such as JPEG and JPEG2000, the DCT and DWT are used, in transcoding operations for converting one form to the other, intertransform exchange between these two is needed. Similarly, for videos, the DCT and ICT are common transforms used in compression standards such as MPEG-2 and H.264, respectively. In this case, conversion between DCT and ICT is required during transcoding of a video. In this section, we discuss the techniques for performing these operations in the transform domain.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

197

Transcoding

6.1.1

DWT to DCT

The DWT is discussed in Chapter 2. However, for the convenience of the reader, the block diagram of the DWT and its inverse is reillustrated in Figure 6.1. From the diagram, we observe that transcoding the DWT coefficients into DCTs involves synthesis of these coefficients. Hence, the computation requires two basic operations, namely: 1. Upsampling of DWT coefficients by inserting zeroes appropriately. 2. Filtering with synthesis filters (say, h′ (n) and g ′ (n) of Figure 6.1). In the following subsections, we discuss how the above computations are performed efficiently and directly in the transform domain. For the convenience of discussion, initially we restrict ourselves to the 1-D. h (n )

2

a1 ( n )

2

h '(n)

2

g '(n)

x 0 (n ) g (n )

2

d 1( n )

~x ( n ) 0

Figure 6.1: Forward and inverse DWT in 1-D. (From [147] with permission from the author.)

6.1.1.1

Inserting Zeroes in DWT Coeffcients

Following theorems state how the DCTs of zero-inserted sample values are computed. Zeroes are inserted in alternate sample positions of a1 (n) and d1 (n) (refer to Figure 6.1). When zeroes are inserted in odd sample locations of the upsampled sequence (refer to Eq. (2.146) of Chapter 2), the upsampling is referred to as even upsampling. As shown in Figure 6.1, a1 (n) goes through even upsampling. On the other hand, for d1 (n), zeroes are inserted before every sample location so that every even location of the upsampled sequence has a zero (refer to Eq. (2.147) of Chapter 2). The latter is referred to as odd upsampling. Theorem 6.1 Let xue (m), m = 0, 1, 2, ..., 2N − 1 be obtained from x(n), n = 0, 1, 2, ..., N − 1 by inserting zeroes after every sample (refer to Eq. (2.146) of chapter 2). The DCT of xue (m), is given by the following expression: r N −1 X π(n + 14 )k 1 Xue (k) = α(k) x(n) cos , 0 ≤ k ≤ 2N − 1. (6.1) N N n=0 where α(k) is defined in Eq. (2.89) in Chapter 2.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

198

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

Proof: The DCT of xˇue (m) is defined as given below (refer Eq. (2.75) of Chapter 2). C2e {xue (m)} =

r

2N −1 X π(m + 21 )k 2 α(k) xue (m) cos , 0 ≤ k ≤ 2N − 1. 2N 2N m=0

By replacing the variable m with 2n in the above equation, the resulting expression becomes r 2N −1 X π(2n + 12 )k 1 Xue (k) = α(k) x(2n) cos , 0 ≤ k ≤ 2N − 1. N 2N 2n=0 From the above, we obtain the expression as stated in the theorem: r N −1 X π(n + 41 )k 1 Xue (k) = α(k) x(n) cos , 0 ≤ k ≤ 2N − 1. N N n=0 Theorem 6.2 Let xuo (m), m = 0, 1, 2, ..., 2N − 1 be obtained by inserting zeroes before every sample of x(n), n = 0, 1, 2, ..., N − 1 (refer to Eq. (2.147) of chapter 2). The DCT of xuo (m) is given by the following expression: Xuo (k) =

r

N −1 X π(n + 43 )k 1 α(k) x(n) cos , 0 ≤ k ≤ 2N − 1. N N n=0

(6.2)

where α(k) is defined in Eq. (2.89) in Chapter 2. Proof: The DCT of xuo (m) is computed by the following expression (refer to Eq. (2.75) of Chapter 2): C2e {xuo (m)} =

r

2N −1 X π(m + 12 )k 2 α(k) xuo (m) cos , 0 ≤ k ≤ 2N − 1. 2N 2N m=0

Let us replace the variable m with 2n + 1 in the above expression and obtain the following. r N −1 X π(2n + 1 + 12 )k 1 Xuo (k) = α(k) x(2n + 1) cos , 0 ≤ k ≤ 2N − 1. N 2N n=0 From the above, the expression is given as r N −1 X π(n + 34 )k 1 Xuo (k) = α(k) x(n) cos , 0 ≤ k ≤ 2N − 1. N N n=0

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

199

Transcoding

Let us denote the upsampled DCT basis matrices in Eqs. (6.1) and (6.2) as (2N,N ) (2N,N ) Bue and Buo , respectively. Let C2N be the 2N -point DCT matrix. We observe that the columns of basis matrices Bue and Buo are the even indexed and odd indexed columns of the 2N -point DCT matrix C2N , respectively. For example, to compute 8-point upsampled DCT block from an input sequence (8,4) (8,4) of length 4 , we use the conversion matrices Bue and Buo (Eqs. (6.1) and (6.2)), which are given as follows: 

(8,4) Bue

     =      

(8,4) Buo

     =     

0.3536 0.3536 0.3536 0.3536 0.4904 0.2778 −0.0975 −0.4157 0.4619 −0.1913 −0.4619 0.1913 0.4157 −0.4904 0.2778 0.0975 0.3536 −0.3536 0.3536 −0.3536 0.2778 0.0975 −0.4157 0.4904 0.1913 0.4619 −0.1913 −0.4619 0.0975 0.4157 0.4904 0.2778 0.3536 0.4157 0.1913 −0.0975 −0.3536 −0.4904 −0.4619 −0.2778

0.3536 0.0975 −0.4619 −0.2778 0.3536 0.4157 −0.1913 −0.4904

0.3536 −0.2778 −0.1913 0.4904 −0.3536 −0.0975 0.4619 −0.4157

0.3536 −0.4904 0.4619 −0.4157 0.3536 −0.2778 0.1913 −0.0975



     ,     

(6.3)



     .     

(6.4)

Given the input as a column vector x of length 4, the corresponding even upsampled and odd upsampled DCTs, are given by Eqs. (6.5) and (6.6) respectively. (8,4) Xue = Bue x, (6.5) (8,4) Xuo = Buo x,

(6.6)

As the upsampled block DCT is computed directly from the wavelet subbands using Eqs. (6.5) and (6.6), it requires fewer operations. These blocks become the input to the synthesis filters, which perform the computation in the transform domain as discussed in Chapter 3. Let us refer to this kind of upsampling with zero insertion in the DCT domain as the DCT domain upsampling, and also the DCT obtained by this process as the upsampled DCT. 6.1.1.2

DCT Domain Upsampling in 2D

In 2-D, the above operations for upsampling (refer to Eqs. (6.5) and (6.6)) are performed on input columns and then on rows of the resulting blocks. Consider w to be a 4 × 4 wavelet coefficient block. Its upsampled DCT block,

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

200

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

Wee (k, l), 0 ≤ k, l ≤ 7 (represented as Wee in matrix form) for LL subband synthesis is computed as T

(8,4) (8,4) Wee = Bue wBue .

(6.7)

Similarly, Woo (k, l), 0 ≤ k, l ≤ 7 for HH subband synthesis is computed as T

(8,4) (8,4) Woo = Buo wBuo .

6.1.1.3

(6.8)

Upsampling the DCT for Multilevel DWT

By using the N -point DCT matrix CN , we also compute the upsampled DCT directly from the DCT coefficients of the input. In this case, the composite (2N,N ) matrix (Buc ) has the following form: (2N,N ) (2N,N ) T Buc = Bue CN .

An example of this matrix for N = 4 is given below.  0.7071 0 0 0  0.1274 0.6935 −0.0528 0   0 0.2500 0.6533 −0.1036   0.1503 0 0.3629 0.5879 (8,4) Buc =  0 0.2706 0 0.6533   0.2250 0 0.5432 −0.3928   0 0.6036 −0.2706 −0.2500 0.6407 −0.1379 −0.2654 0 (2N,N )

(6.9) 

     .     

(6.10)

We find that the composite conversion matrix Buc is sparse. Hence, the upsampling operation saves computation by exploiting this fact. In the above computation, Eq. (6.9) computes even upsampling only (refer to Eq. (6.1)). In multilevel transcoding, processing of subbands into DCT blocks may proceed from the lowest level of resolution following the stages of dyadic decomposition. In that case, for obtaining the next higher-level description in the block DCT space, this composite conversion is required. There only the even upsampling in the DCT space is used, as the synthesis for the next stage takes the output from the previous level as its LL subband coefficients. However, the computation is more efficient than the spatial domain approach, if the block size is kept small. As the block size increases, the upsampled DCT computation becomes expensive due to the increase in the size of the conversion matrix. In this case, the upsampled DCT is computed through spatial domain operations. 6.1.1.4

Wavelet Synthesis in the Compressed Domain

In Chapter 3, we discussed how filtering, in particular with symmetric FIR, is performed efficiently in the block DCT domain. The same method is extended

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

201

Transcoding

Table 6.1: Daubechies 9/7 analysis and synthesis filter banks for lossy compression n 0 ±1 ±2 ±3 ±4

Analysis Filter Bank h(n) g(n − 1) 0.603 1.115 0.267 −0.591 −0.078 −0.058 −0.017 0.091 0.027

Synthesis Filter Bank h′ (n) g ′ (n + 1) 1.115 0.603 0.591 −0.267 -0.058 −0.078 −0.091 0.017 0.027

to wavelet synthesis from the upsampled DCT blocks. This method is referred to as the wavelet to block transcoding (WBDT) [148] technique. We highlight only the specific features of this computation under this context. For the sake of brevity and convenience, initially let us keep our discussion restricted to the 1-D with reference to the Daubechies 9/7 filter bank. The Corresponding impulse responses of analysis and synthesis filters of the 9/7 filter bank are shown in Table 6.1 (reproduced from Table 2.7 of Chapter 2). The computation (i) in the DCT domain is carried out as discussed in Chapter 3. Consider Xae and (i) Xdo are the upsampled DCT coefficients (of length 2N ) from the ith input (i) (i) blocks of analysis and detail coefficients xa and xd , respectively (each of length N ). The synthesis of these coefficients in the DCT domain takes place by exploiting the convolution-multiplication properties of the block DCT (refer to Chapter 3). As lengths of right halves of both the symmetric filters are less than 8 (for 9/7 filter bank), we take care of the boundary effect of the convolution operation, by composing three adjacent upsampled DCT blocks into one larger type-II DCT block. The coefficients are then multiplied with the type-I DCT of the respective right half of the filter response. Consider HI′ as the diagonal matrix whose elements are type-I 6N -point DCT coefficients of right halves of h′ (n) (extended by padding with zeroes). Using the notation of the Chapter 3, we write it as √ −1 HI′ = 12ND({C1e (h′+ }6N ). (6.11) 0 Similarly, for the high-pass synthesis filter, we write it as √ −1 G′I = 12N D({C1e (g′+ }6N ). 0

(6.12)

In that case, the synthesized DCT coefficients are given by  (i−1)  xa   i YL = P SL  x(i) a , (i+1) xa

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

(6.13)

202

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

and,



i YH

and, where P = 08

18

 (i−1) xd   = P SH  x(i) . d  (i+1) xd

i i Yi = YL + YH ,

(6.15)

08 . SH and SL are given by the following expression: 

(2N,N )

Bue  SL = AT(3,2N ) HI′ A(3,2N )  02N ×N 02N ×N

SH

(6.14)



(2N,N )

Buo  = AT(3,2N ) G′I A(3,2N )  02N ×N 02N ×N

02N ×N (2N,N ) Bue 02N ×N

 02N ×N  02N ×N  , (2N,N ) Bue

(6.16)

02N ×N (2N,N ) Buo 02N ×N

 02 N × N  02N ×N  , (2N,N ) Buo

(6.17)

where 02N ×N is the zero matrix of size 2N × N . The matrices SL and SH are of size 6N × 3N . Finally, as the central DCT block is to be retained as output, the cost of computation may be reduced by considering only the submatrix (2N,6N ) (2N,6N ) (2N,6N ) of AT . Let b0 , b1 , and b2 be submatrices of AT(3,2N ) , each of size 2N × 6N as shown in the following:  (2N,6N )  b  0 )  (6.18) AT(3,2N ) =  b(2N,6N . 1 (2N,6N )

b2

(2N,6N )

The central output DCT block is computed using only the b1 submatrix. Hence, the DCT domain filtering matrices, Eqs. (6.16) and (6.17), are modified as  (2N,N )  Bue 02N ×N 02N ×N   (2N,3N ) (2N,6N ) ′ (2N,N ) SL = b1 HI A(3,2N )  02N ×N Bue 02N ×N  , (6.19) (2N,N ) 02N ×N 02N ×N Bue (2N,3N )

SH



(2N,N )

Buo  (2N,6N ) ′ = b1 GI A(3,2N )  02N ×N 02N ×N (2N,3N )

(2N,3N )

02N ×N (2N,N ) Buo 02N ×N

 02 N × N  02N ×N  , (2N,N ) Buo

(6.20)

where matrices SL and SH are of size 2N ×3N . For a given synthe(2N,3N ) (2N,3N ) sis filter bank (h′ (n) and g ′ (n)), the filtering matrices SL and SH

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

203

Transcoding (8,12)

are usually precomputed. Typical examples of SL filters are shown in Eqs. (6.21) and (6.22). 1 (8,12)

SL 2 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 4

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

(8,12)

S 2H 0 6 0 6 6 0 6 6 0 6 0 6 6 0 6 4 0 0

= 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

= 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

−.0022 −.0028 −.0019 −.0006 .0005 .0012 .0013 .0008

6.1.1.5

−.0076 −.0095 −.0064 −.0022 .0017 .0042 .0045 .0029

.0795 .1108 .0984 .0663 .0250 −.0034 −.0099 −.0050

.0154 .0225 .0222 .0172 .0091 .0033 .0018 .0015

.1067 .0889 −.0514 −.1232 −.0581 .0118 .0125 .0020

−.0018 −.0042 −.0096 0 .0353 .0632 .0619 .0388

.1021 −.0290 −.1387 .0729 .0628 −.0345 −.0041 .0008

.0014 .0017 .0117 .0208 −.0401 −.0559 .0270 .0692

.1097 −.1330 .0638 .0234 −.0645 .0449 −.0145 .0033

.0022 −.0023 .0060 −.0345 .0410 .0146 −.0647 .0592

(8,12)

and SH

.0226 −.0347 .0404 −.0428 .0378 −.0265 .0141 −.0052

−.0154 .0234 −.0321 .0459 −.0506 .0414 −.0280 .0152

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

3 0 0 7 7 0 7 7 0 7 , 0 7 7 0 7 7 0 5 0 (6.21)

−.0014 .0019 −.0018 .0016 −.0014 .0011 −.0007 .0004

3 0 0 7 7 0 7 7 0 7 . 0 7 7 0 7 7 0 5 0 (6.22)

−.0047 .0065 −.0061 .0055 −.0047 .0037 −.0025 .0013

.0018 −.0035 .0055 −.0068 .0062 −.0040 .0015 −.0002

using 9/7

Transcoding in 2-D

In 2-D, as the FIR responses are separable, the above operations are performed in two stages, first by applying 1-D transcoding to the input wavelet block columns and then to rows of the resulting blocks. Let us consider the LL subband and represent the (i, j)th N × N block of wavelet coefficients in this (i,j) (i,j) band as wLL (and its matrix form as wLL ). Hence, the computational steps for obtaining the 2N × 2N synthesized DCT blocks in 2-D are shown below.   (i−1,j) w(LL)  (i,j) (2N,3N )   w(i,j)  , (6.23) ZLL = SL (LL)   (i+1,j) w(LL) (i,j)

YLL = (i,j)

h

(i,j−1)

ZLL

(i,j)

ZLL

(i,j+1)

ZLL

i

(2N,3N ) T

SL

.

(6.24)

where YLL is the transcoded synthesized block corresponding to the LL band. In the same way, synthesis of other three subbands, namely, LH, HL, and (2N,3N ) (2N,3N ) HH, are carried out using the transcoding matrices SL and SH . Finally, all these synthesized subband blocks are summed up to form the final synthesized output block. In the context of transcoding of a JPEG2000 image to JPEG, the value of N is 4. It has been reported in [148] that the computational cost per pixel of the transcoded block of size 8 × 8 is 7.5M + 6.5A, which provides around 7.61% savings in the computation compared to the spatial domain operations using the lifting-based wavelet synthesis. 1 The

elements in these matrices are to be scaled by

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

√ 48.

204

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

The above scheme is extended also for transcoding multi-level wavelet decomposed images. There the upsampled DCT of the LL band at any level is formed from its next higher level subbands as discussed previously. It is observed that this scheme is not efficient compared to the spatial domain operations using lifting-based wavelet synthesis. However, if we use a hybrid of lifting based IDWT and DCT-based filtering there is marginal reduction in the computation compared to the spatial domain approach [148].

6.1.2

DCT to DWT

For transcoding DCT to DWT, we need to carry out analysis of DCT blocks with a wavelet filter bank for obtaining respective wavelet coefficients in different subbands. As shown in Figure 6.1, the transcoding operations involve the following: 1. Filtering with DCT blocks using respective analysis filters (h(n) and g(n)). 2. A filtered DCT block should be split into two halves, one with the even downsampling and the other with the odd downsampling (refer to Section 2.2.6.5 of Chapter 2). In the next section, we first discuss how the splitting and downsampling could be performed on a DCT block to provide the result in the spatial domain. 6.1.2.1

Even and Odd Downsampling of DCT Blocks

The following two theorems state how the downsampling operation could be performed with a DCT block to provide the result in the spatial domain. For simplicity, we first consider the problem in 1-D. Later, the concepts are extended to 2-D. Theorem 6.3 Let xde (m), m = 0, 1, 2, . . . , N/2 − 1, (refer to Eq. (2.144) in Section 2.2.6.5 of Chapter 2) be the downsampled sequence formed by even indexed samples of x(n), n = 0, 1, . . . , N − 1 whose DCT is given by X(k), k = 0, 1, . . . , N − 1. Then xde (m) could be obtained from X(k) using the following expression:

xde (m) =

r

N −1 X 2 α(k) X (N ) (k) cos N k=0

(m + 14 )πk N 2

where α(k) is defined in Eq. (2.89) in Chapter 2.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

!

,0≤m≤

N − 1. 2 (6.25)

205

Transcoding

Proof: For the sake of completeness the expression of IDCT of X(k) is shown below. −1 C2e {X(k)} =

x(n) =

r

N −1 X 2 (2n + 1)πk α(k) X(k) cos , 0≤n≤N −1 N 2N k=0

(6.26)

q

where α(k) in Eq. (6.26) is 12 for k =0, otherwise its value is 1. Substituting n with 2n in the above expression of IDCT, we obtain the following: r N −1 X 2 (2.2n + 1)πk x(2n) = α(k) X(k) cos , 0 ≤ 2n ≤ N − 1. N 2N k=0

From the above, renaming the variable n as m, the following expression is obtained: ! r N −1 X π(m + 41 )k 2 N ,0≤m≤ xde (m) = α(k) X(k) cos − 1. N N 2 2 k=0

Theorem 6.4 Let xdo (m), m = 0, 1, 2, . . . , N/2 − 1, (refer to Eq. (2.145) in Section 2.2.6.5 of Chapter 2) be the downsampled sequence formed by odd indexed samples of x(n), n = 0, 1, . . . , N − 1 whose DCT is given by X(k), k = 0, 1, . . . , N − 1. Then xdo (m) could be obtained from X(k) using the following expression: ! r N −1 X (m + 34 )πk 2 N xdo (m) = ,0≤m≤ α(k) X(k) cos − 1. (6.27) N N 2 2 k=0

where α(k) is defined in Eq. (2.89) in Chapter 2. Proof: In this case substituting n with 2n + 1 in Eq. (6.26), we obtain the following expression: x(2n + 1) =

q

2 N α(k)

N −1 X k=0

(2(2n + 1) + 1)πk X(k) cos , 2N 0 ≤ (2n + 1) ≤ N − 1.

From the above, let us rename the term n as m. Hence, r N −1 X (m + 34 )πk 2 N α(k) X(k) cos ,0≤m≤ − 1. xdo (m) = N N/2 2 k=0

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

206

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

The above theorems provide downsampled sequences, each of length N2 , from N -point type-II DCT block directly in the spatial domain. This reduces the computation for obtaining these sequences from a DCT block. Typically, for N = 8, conversion matrices for computing a downsampled block of length (4,8) (4,8) 4, are shown in Eqs. (6.28) and (6.29). They are denoted as Bde and Bdo , respectively. (4,8) Bde

(4,8) Bdo

2

0.3536 6 0.3536 =4 0.3536 0.3536

0.4904 0.2778 −0.0975 −0.4157

0.4619 −0.1913 −0.4619 0.1913

0.4157 −0.4904 0.2778 0.0975

0.3536 −0.3536 0.3536 −0.3536

0.2778 0.0975 −0.4157 0.4904

0.1913 0.4619 −0.1913 −0.4619

0.3536 6 0.3536 =4 0.3536 0.3536

0.4157 0.0975 −0.2778 −0.4904

0.1913 −0.4619 −0.1913 0.4619

−0.0975 −0.2778 0.4904 −0.4157

−0.3536 0.3536 −0.3536 0.3536

−0.4904 0.4157 −0.0975 −0.2778

−0.4619 −0.1913 0.4619 0.1913

2

3 0.0975 0.4157 7 , 0.4904 5 0.2778 (6.28) 3 −0.2778 −0.4904 7 . −0.4157 5 −0.0975 (6.29)

Hence, even and odd downsampled blocks from the DCT block X are obtained as follows: (4,8) xde = Bde X, (6.30) (4,8) xoe = Boe X. In the above equation, xde and xdo are of length 4, while X is of length 8. 6.1.2.2

Even and Odd Downsampling in 2-D

The extension of the above concepts to 2-D is trivial. Consider X be an 8 × 8 DCT block. Its downsampled block in the LL subband, xLL of size 4 × 4 is computed as (4,8)

(4,8) T

xLL = Bde XBde

.

(6.31)

Similarly, xHH for the HH-subband is computed as (4,8)

(4,8) T

xHH = Bdo XBdo

.

(6.32)

Similarly, the other two subbands (LH and HL) are also computed. 6.1.2.3

Wavelet Analysis in the DCT Domain

For obtaining wavelet coefficients from DCT blocks, analysis filters may be applied directly in the DCT domain. While filtering DCT blocks at the boundaries, neighboring blocks outside the image are formed through symmetric extension using the flipping transformation discussed in Section 3.4.1 of Chapter 3. Otherwise, the basic filtering computation in the block DCT space remains the same. Let us briefly discuss the computation involved in this process. The diagonal matrices formed by the type-I DCTs of analysis filters, h(n) and g(n), are given below. √ −1 HI = 6N D({C1e (h+ }3N ), (6.33) 0

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

Transcoding

GI =

√ −1 6N D({C1e (g+ }3N ). 0

207

(6.34)

Let the ith N -point DCT block be denoted as X(i) . The composite transcoding operations from DCT blocks are given below.

(i)

xa

=

(i) xd

(i)

=

 (i−1)  X (N/2,3N )  RL X(i)  , (i+1) X(i−1)  X (N/2,3N )  RH X(i)  , X(i+1)

(6.35)

(i)

where xa and xd are wavelet approximation and detailed coefficients, each (N/2,3N ) (N/2,3N ) of size N2 . RL , and RH are as follows: (N/2,3N )

= Bde

(N/2,3N )

= Bdo

RL

RH

(N/2,N ) (N,3N ) b1 HI A(3,N ) ,

(6.36)

(N/2,N ) (N,3N ) b1 GI A(3,N ) .

(6.37)

(N,3N )

As before, b1 represents the submatrix of A−1 (3,2N ) (refer to Eq. (6.18)). Above computation is extended in 2-D following the similar technique discussed in the previous section on transcoding DWT to DCT coefficients. The computational cost as reported in [147] is found to be marginally more efficient than the transcoding through the spatial domain using lifting-based schemes. The composite costs for both these operations are given as 29.125 and 31.39 per pixel of the image.

6.1.3

DCT to ICT

The integer cosine transform (ICT) matrix used in H.264 video coding is of size 4 × 4 and is denoted by T4 in this text (refer to Section 2.2.4.9 of Chapter 2). For the purpose of transcoding, we need to convert a DCT block (in 1-D) to two blocks of ICT. The conversion matrix CT is given by CT =

T4 04

04 CT . T4 8

(6.38)

In the above equation, C8 is the 8-point DCT matrix in the above equation, and 08 is the 8 × 8 zero matrix. The elements of CT follow a symmetry, and

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

208

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

a few of them are zeroes as shown below.   1.414 1.281 0 −0.450 0 0.301 0 −0.255  0 0.924 2.230 1.780 0 −0.864 −0.159 0.482     0 −0.106 0 0.726 1.414 1.086 0 −0.531    0 0.117 0.159 −0.092 0 1.038 2.230 1.975   . CT =  0 0.450 0 −0.301 0 0.255  1.414 −1.281   0 0.924 −2.230 1.780 0 −0.864 0.159 0.482     0 0.106 0 −0.726 1.414 −1.086 0 0.531  0 0.117 −0.159 −0.092 0 1.038 −2.230 1.975 (6.39) By exploiting symmetry in the occurrences of the elements, we require only 22 multiplications and 22 additions for the transcoding in 1-D. In 2-D, a DCT block X is transformed as CT XCTT with 352 multiplications and 352 additions.

6.1.4

ICT to DCT

In the same way, we obtain the transcoding matrix for converting two blocks of ICT in 1-D into one DCT block. The corresponding conversion matrix TC is given below. −1 T 04 TC = C8 4 . (6.40) 04 T4−1

Magnitudes of the elements of TC also show center-column-based symmetry.   0.354 0 0 0 0.354 0 0 0  0.320 0.092 −0.026 0.012 −0.320 0.092 0.026 0.012     0 0.223 0 0.016 0 −0.223 0 −0.016   −0.112 0.178 0.181 −0.009 0.112 0.178 −0.181 −0.009 . TC =   0 0 0.354 0 0 0 0.354 0     0.075 −0.086 0.272 0.104 −0.075 −0.086 −0.272 0.104     0 −0.016 0 0.223 0 0.016 0 −0.223 −0.064 0.048 −0.133 0.197 0.064 0.048 0.133 0.197 (6.41) In this case it is required to perform 22 multiplications and 34 additions for the conversion in 1-D. In 2-D, these numbers are 352 and 504, respectively.

6.2

Image Transcoding: JPEG2000 to JPEG

In this section, we consider a typical example of transcoding of images, namely, transcoding of a JPEG2000-encoded image into the DCT-based JPEG compression format as reported in [147]. The transcoding tasks involve the conversion of DWT coefficients into 8 × 8 blocks of DCT coefficients. However,

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

Transcoding

209

the process also requires entropy decoding and dequantization to obtain the DWT coefficients. Further, DCT coefficients are to be quantized and encoded according to the JPEG standard, as discussed in Chapter 1. In the study reported in [147], simplified implementations of JPEG and JPEG2000 coding systems as discussed in [53] were used. Using these implementations, they achieve compression ratios differing approximately by a factor of two compared to standard encoders. However, they keep the relative performance of these two schemes at par with the exact implementations of the compression schemes. Moreover, an estimate of the true compression ratio is also obtained by multiplying it by a factor of 2. In the study, images are decomposed into three levels using the 9/7 analysis filters. It achieves a compression of 0.943 bpp (for the image Lena) with the quantization steps of ten subbands as given below. △b = [16.06, 16.06, 32.13, 8.03, 8.03, 16.06, 4.02, 4.02, 8.03, 2.01].

(6.42)

During decoding, the DWT coefficients of these subbands are dequantized and subjected to the multilevel transcoding of wavelet coefficients into the 8 × 8 block DCT space. Finally, the resulting 8 × 8 DCT blocks are quantized and encoded using standard Huffman coding to obtain the transcoded image in JPEG format. The study considered also a few approaches of transcoding, including the DCT filtering based approach discussed in Section 6.1.1.4 (referred to as wavelet to block DCT transcoding (WBDT)). A brief overview of different techniques is presented below.

6.2.1

Transcoding with WBDT

The WBDT technique is discussed in Section 6.1.1.4. We also consider two variations of these approaches. If all the DWT subbands are transcoded into DCT blocks, the approach is referred to as WBDT-all. On the other hand, if only the low-frequency subband (LL) is used, it is called WBDT-LL.

6.2.2

Transcoding with Wavelet Doubling

In this technique, only the LL band is synthesized, and then it is transformed into the block DCT space. This transcoding technique requires only LL subband reconstruction and is referred to as J2K-LL.

6.2.3

Transcoding with DCT Domain Doubling

In this approach, an efficient DCT domain doubling algorithm [36] is used for doubling the LL band, First, the LL band is transformed into 4×4 block DCT space. Next, each of these blocks is converted into an 8×8 block using subband approximation. This transcoding technique is called doubling algorithm for transcoding (DAT). Apart from the above, we also refer to the spatial domain transcoding

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

210

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

Table 6.2: Per-pixel computational cost of different transcoding approaches. No. of subbands One (LL) Four (LL, HL, LH, HH)

Method J2K-LL (FB) J2K-LL (LS) WBDT-LL DAT ST-FB ST-LS WBDT-all

No. of operations M A 8.375 13.28 5.875 11.78 7.00 6.00 0.25 1.15 25.12 39.84 17.62 35.34 21.00 18.00

CC 38.40 29.40 27.00 1.90 115.20 88.21 81.00

Source: From [147] with permission from the author.

technique as ST, which has two implementations. The one using filter banks is referred to as ST-FB. The other implementation is by the lifting scheme (referred to as ST-LS). The computational costs for different techniques as reported in [147] are shown in Table 6.2. We observe that the DAT algorithm is computationally most efficient among the transcoding techniques with single subband considered in the study. The WBDT-LL transcoding and WBDT-all are also computationally efficient compared to the corresponding spatial domain techniques (ST). It is of interest to know the performance in terms of quality of transcoded images from these different approaches. Let us consider a few performance metrics as proposed in [147] for this purpose.

6.2.4

Performance Metrics for Transcoding Schemes

In [147] three performance metrics are defined with respect to the rate distortion curve obtained from a transcoding scheme. In Figure 6.2(a), a typical rate distortion curve for transcoding a JPEG2000 image (Lena compressed at 0.55 bpp) into JPEG encoding using the WBDT algorithm is shown. In this study, the JPEG2000 decoded image acts as the reference image. With respect to this curve, the transcoding measures are defined below. 1. Guaranteed PSNR (MG ): It is the minimum PSNR value with respect to the JPEG2000 decoded image to be achieved by the transcoder. This is specified per the user’s requirement. 2. Equivalent rate (ρeq ): It is the minimum compression rate of the transcoded JPEG image providing at least the specified guaranteed PSNR with respect to the JPEG2000 decoded image. 3. Equivalent PSNR (Meq ): It is the PSNR with respect to the original image at the equivalent rate (given a guaranteed PSNR level).

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

Transcoding

211

The above measures are illustrated with the help of plots as shown in Figure 6.2 (see color insert). According to the plot in Figure 6.2(a), given the guaranteed PSNR, MG as 40 dB, the equivalent rate is obtained as 1.25 bpp in the transcoder. The equivalent rates for the transcoded JPEG image at different JPEG2000 compression levels are shown in Figure 6.2(b). The performance curve varies with different values of guaranteed PSNR. For MG at guaranteed 40 dB, the variation of equivalent PSNR and equivalent rates is shown in Figure 6.2(c). At the PSNR of 32 dB, the transcoder performance becomes almost the same as the JPEG2000 performance. For other schemes, we also observe their performances against these metrics. For example, for the transcoding scheme DAT, the equivalent rate becomes almost the same as the original compression rate (refer to Figure 6.2(b)) at a guaranteed PSNR of 30 dB, which is kept at a lower value as the reconstruction is possible only from the LL band. It is observed that performance curves of the spatial domain transcoding ( ST) and the transform domain technique (WBDT-all) are almost identical, though the latter runs much faster than the former. Another useful feature of these schemes is to observe the maximum PSNR value that could be achieved from the transcoded image with respect to the original image. This value is less than the original PSNR value of the encoded image (with JPEG2000 in this case). In Figure 6.3 (see color insert), maximum PSNR values obtained at varying level of compression are shown for different images. As typical examples, transcoded images of Lena and their maximum PSNR values obtained by different transcoding schemes are shown in Figure 6.4. It is reported that at higher bpp, the maximum PSNR values obtained by the DAT are 3–4 dB less compared to the WBDT-LL and 4–6 dB less compared to the spatial transcoding (ST).

6.3

Video Downscaling

In different applications such as video browsing, picture in picture, video conferencing, etc., the video is required to be transcoded at lower bit rates and reduced frame size. This task is known as video downscaling. The brute force approach to performing this operation is to decode each frame of the input video, downscale each of them spatially and, finally, re-encode the whole downscaled raw video at a lower bit rate. This technique is the spatial domain downscaling. However, it is very time consuming and computationally inefficient to meet the requirements of real-time applications. In addition to the DCT/IDCT operations, motion estimation during re-encoding of downscaled video puts a heavy burden in the computation. In this section, we discuss how compressed domain operations could greatly reduce the computational cost to this end. In our discussion, we mostly restrict ourselves to the downscaling of an MPEG video stream. From an MPEG video, using Huffman decoding

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

212

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain 50 WBDT−all

45

PSNR (dB)

Guaranteed PSNR 40

35

30 Equivalent rate 25

0

0.5

1

1.5

2

2.5

rate (bpp)

(a) 2 DAT WBDT−all ST

1.8

Equivalent rate (bpp)

1.6 1.4

WBDT−all at 40 dB Guaranteed PSNR

1.25

1.2 1 0.8

DAT at 30 dB Guaranteed PSNR

0.6 0.4 0.55 0.2

0.2

0.4 0.6 0.8 JPEG2000 compression rate (bpp)

1

1.2

(b) 45 JPEG2000 ST WBDT−all DAT

Equivalent PSNR (dB)

40

At 40 dB Guaranteed PSNR

35

30 At 30 dB Guaranteed PSNR 25

20

0

0.5

1 1.5 Equivalent rate (bpp)

2

2.5

(c) Figure 6.2: JPEG2000 to JPEG transcoding for Lena image using the WBDT technique: (a) rate distortion for transcoded image with respect to the JPEG2000 decoded image (for 0.55 bpp encoded Lena image), (b)equivalent rate of the transcoder versus JPEG2000 compression rate, and (c)equivalent PSNR versus equivalent rate. (From [147] with permission from the author.)

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

213

Transcoding 40

35

PSNR dB

30

WBDT−all J2K−LL DAT WBDT−LL ST

25

20

15

10

0

0.1

0.2

0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 JPEG2000 compression (bpp)

0.7

0.8

(a)

35

PSNR dB

30

25

WBDT−all J2K−LL DAT ST WBDT−LL

20

15

10

0

0.1

0.2

0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 JPEG2000 compression (bpp)

0.7

0.8

(b)

40

35

PSNR dB

30

WBDT−all J2K−LL DAT WBDT−LL ST

25

20

15

10

0

0.1

0.2

0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 JPEG2000 compression (bpp)

0.7

0.8

(c)

40 J2K−LL WBDT−all DAT WBDT−LL ST

35 30

PSNR dB

25 20 15 10 5 0

0

0.1

0.2

0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 JPEG2000 compression (bpp)

0.7

0.8

0.9

(d)

Figure 6.3: Maximum PSNR values versus compression ratio:(a) Lena, (b) Peppers, (c) Girl, and (d) Baboon. (With permission from [147].)

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

214

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

(a)

(b)

(c)

(d)

Figure 6.4: Results for the JPEG2000 encoded Lena image:(a) JPEG2000 encoded image at bpp = 0.7062, PSNR = 38.47 dB, (b) JPEG encoded by WBDT-all maximum PSNR = 35.21 dB (at bpp = 0.9 or higher), (c) JPEG encoded image by WBDT-LL maximum PSNR = 33.94 dB (at bpp = 0.666 or higher), and (d) JPEG encoded image by DAT maximum PSNR = 29.95 dB (at bpp = 0.784 or higher). (With permission from [147].)

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

Transcoding

215

and dequantization of DCT coefficients, we finally obtain a set of 8 × 8 DCT blocks for each of its frames. These DCT blocks are operated in the process of downscaling of video frames. It is known that an MPEG video has two types of frames, namely, the intraframe and interframe. Intraframes are the same as, those specified in the JPEG compression standard. Hence, all the techniques of image downsizing are suitable for the purpose of downsampling. However the inter frames are motion-compensated for obtaining a higher degree of compression. Hence, we have to reconstruct these motion-compensated frames using inverse motion compensation (IMC) techniques before downscaling. Subsequently, for efficient encoding of the sequence of downscaled frames with motion compensation, we use the motion vectors for each macroblock of the interframe. This task is known as refinement of motion vectors. In the following subsections, we first discuss how these two tasks are performed efficiently in the block DCT space. Next, we discuss the overall video downscaling technique in the block DCT space.

6.3.1

Inverse Motion Compensation

Inverse motion compensation is the process by which a predictive frame in a video stream is converted into an intra (or I) frame. In our discussion, we restrict ourselves to forward predictive frames only, which are also known as P frames. In the MPEG standard, motion estimation and compensation are carried out over a group of four adjacent 8 × 8 DCT blocks, which is called a macroblock. In this computation, a prediction M ′ of each macroblock M in the current frame is made from the previous encoded frame. It is the prediction error E = M − M ′ , which is encoded in the video stream. Though the prediction is carried out for a 16 × 16 macroblock, errors are encoded by applying 8 × 8 DCT to each of its component blocks. The computational challenge in the block DCT space, is to extract the DCT of the corresponding component block of M ′ in the previous frame, so that it could be added to the DCT encoded error, resulting in recovery of transform coefficients of sample values. In that case, the block turns into an intrablock. This is the principle of inverse motion compensation (IMC). In the following, we review two approaches of the IMC. In one [99], a single 8 × 8 block is subjected to the IMC, whereas in the other approach [117], this is carried out for the whole macroblock at a time. 6.3.1.1

Single Blockwise Inverse Motion Compensation

In this technique [20, 99] the IMC is performed on an 8 × 8 DCT block. As the computation is carried out for a single 8 × 8 block of the P frame, we refer to this technique as single blockwise motion compensation (SBIMC). Let us assume that the intrablock coding is available for the previous frame, which acts as the reference for recovery of the true sample values. Given the motion

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

216

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain X1

X2

w h X'

X3

X4 E Intra Frame Inter Frame

Figure 6.5: Single blockwise inverse motion compensation (SBIMC). vector of this block, a possible configuration of its predicted 8 × 8 block with respect to the intrablocks in the previous frame is shown in Figure 6.5. In general, the predicted block X ′ may not align itself with any one of the 8 × 8 intra DCT blocks (that is, X1 , X2 , X3 , and X4 ) in the reference frame as it may intersect with four 8 × 8 DCT blocks as shown in Figure 6.5. In the figure the h and w are vertical and horizontal components of the motion vector, respectively. Let x1 , x2 , x3 , and x4 denote the corresponding blocks in the spatial domain. In that case, the overlapped 8 × 8 block x′ corresponding to the motion vector is formed by Eq. (6.43) [99].

x′

=

4 X

ci1 xi ci2

(6.43)

i=1

=

Uh x1 Lw + Uh x2 U8−w + L8−h x3 Lw + L8−h x4 U8−w .

In the above equations, cij ’s are defined by matrices Un or Ln . Un and Ln for n = 1, 2, ...8 are defined below. 0n×(8−n) In Un = , 08−n 0(8−n)×n (6.44) 0(8−n)×n 08−n Ln = . In 0n×(8−n) The DCT of the predicted block x′ is obtained from Eq. (6.43) in the following form: ! 4 X ′ T T X = C8 ci1 C8 C8 xi C8 C8 ci2 C8T . (6.45) i=1

We use the factorization of the 8 × 8 DCT matrix (C8 ) for efficiently computing the above. From Section 2.2.4.8 of Chapter 2, the factorization of C8 is given in the following form:

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

Transcoding

C8 = DP B1 B2 M A1 A2 A3 .

217 (6.46)

Definitions of different factoring matrices are also given in that section. Hence, Eq. (6.45) is rewritten as T X′ = C8 [Jh B2T B1T P T D(X1 DP B1 B2 JwT + X2 DP B1 B2 K8−w ) T + K8−h B2T B1T P T D(X3 DP B1 B2 JwT + X4 DP B1 B2 K8−h )]C8T ,

(6.47)

where Ji = Ui (M A1 A2 A3 )T , i = 1, 2, 3, ..8, and, Ki = Li (M A1 A2 A3 )T , i = 1, 2, 3, ..8. The above computations are carried out very efficiently by adopting the following: 1. Multiplications by elements of the diagonal matrix D are absorbed in the MPEG quantization steps. Hence these multiplications are ignored. 2. As P and P T are permutation matrices, there is no requirement for actual multiplication and addition operations. Multiplication with these matrices causes only changes in the order of the elements of the multiplicant. In this computation, the total number of operations gets maximized for h = w = 4 as reported in [99], and it is found to be 320M + 1760A. This implies that the computational cost of SBIMC is at most 5M + 27.5A operations per pixel of the input video frame. 6.3.1.2

Macroblockwise Inverse Motion Compensation

In [117] a modification of the above scheme is presented, which considers performing the computation over a macroblock. In an MPEG video stream, a macroblock contains four 8 × 8 blocks and motion vectors, and prediction errors are estimated for a 16 × 16 macroblock. The technique exploits this fact to reduce the overall computation for the four blocks. In Figure 6.6, it is shown how the predicted 16 × 16 block (also called macroblock due to its size of 16 × 16) overlaps with the DCT blocks in the reference frame. Let M ′ be the predicted macroblock in the reference frame, at a location (r, c) as shown in the figure. Under this scenario, M ′ is computed from the nine 8 × 8 DCT blocks. Let xi , 1 ≤ i ≤ 9, be the adjacent blocks in the spatial domain as shown in Figure 6.6. In this case, we need to extract a 16 × 16 block from them. The relationship between the 9 DCT blocks and M ′ is expressed in the following form:   x1 x2 x3 m′ = cr  x4 x5 x6  cTc , (6.48) x7 x8 x9

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

218

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

X1 X2 r c M'

X3 X6

X7

X9

X8

Intra Frame

E

Inter Frame

Figure 6.6: Macroblockwise inverse motion compensation (MBIMC). where m′ is the predicted macroblock in spatial domain and ci is a 16 × 24 matrix as defined below. I16 016×(8−i) . ci = 016×i (6.49) Note that there are 8 different ci ’s as i varies from 0 to 7. In the DCT domain, the above relationship (Eq. (6.48)) is expressed as M′ = „ C8 08

8 «> <

08 C8

> :

2

6 cr 4

T C8 08 08

08 T C8 08

08 08 T C8

32

X1 74 X4 5 X7

X2 X5 X8

X3 X6 X9

32 54

C8 08 08

08 C8 08

08 08 C8

3

5 cc

9 > = > ;

T C8 08

08 T C8

!

.

(6.50) By using the factorization of DCT in a similar manner (as is done for the SBIMC technique), it has been shown [116] that the MBIMC requires at the most 3.43M + 20.5A operations per pixel of the frame. Assuming cost of three additions are equivalent to one multiplication there is 27% reduction of the computational cost with respect to the SBIMC scheme. 6.3.1.3

Video Downscaling and IMC: Integrated Scheme

In [117] the MBIMC technique is integrated with the downsampling operation to provide the downsampled inverse motion compensated block as a result of this composite operation. Let the downsampling matrix operator be denoted as D8×16 following the same notation used in Section 5.1.1 of Chapter 5. The matrix D8×16 is given below. D 2 8×16 = 0.5 0.5 6 0 0 6 6 0 0 6 0 6 0 6 0 0 6 6 0 0 6 4 0 0 0 0

0 0.5 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0.5 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0.5 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0.5 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0.5 0 0 0 0

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

0 0 0 0.5 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0.5 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0.5 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0.5 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0.5 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0.5 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0.5 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.5

3 0 7 0 7 7 0 7 0 7 7. 0 7 7 0 7 5 0 0.5 (6.51)

219

Transcoding

DCT Upsampling

F' n-1

F"n-1

IMC and Downscaling (Integrated)

Fn

F' n

Motion Vector

Figure 6.7: An integrated scheme for downscaling and inverse motion compensation.

From Eq. (6.50) we get the following expression for computing the downsampled block: M′d = 8 2 > < 6 C8 D8×16 cr 4 > :

T C8 08 08

08 T C8 08

08 08 T C8

32

X1 74 X4 5 X7

X2 X5 X8

X3 X6 X9

32 54

C8 08 08

08 C8 08

08 08 C8

9 > = T. 5 cc D T C8 8×16 > ; 3

(6.52) As the IMC operation provides the downsampled intraframe in the block DCT space, for performing IMC of the next frame, we need to upsample it as shown ′ in Figure 6.7. In this figure, Fn−1 is the (n − 1)th downscaled reference frame, and Fn is the next interframe of the input video. For performing this operation, ′ first the downsampled reference frame (Fn−1 ) is upsampled by a factor of ′′ ′′ two to form the (n − 1)th upsampled reference Fn−1 . Next, Fn−1 is used as a reference to the integrated computation providing the donsampled frame Fn′ . For converting an interframe immediately after an intraframe (I), this upsampling operation is not necessary. In the previous chapter, various such upsampling strategies were discussed including the efficient one [36] requiring 1.25M + 1.25A per pixel of the upsampled image. In [117], it is shown that this computation could be efficiently carried out with a computational cost of at the most 3.34M + 13.65A per pixel of the interframe.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

220

6.3.2

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

Motion Vector Refinement

Motion vectors are computed for each macroblock as offsets of the predicted blocks with respect to their locations in the current frame. Using these motion vectors, prediction errors are obtained at the encoder, and motion compensation is carried out in the decoder. For higher compression in the downsampled video, we should carry out a similar computation. As recomputation of motion vectors is quite expensive, we may predict a motion vector of the downscaled video using the motion vectors of the original compressed video stream. This task is referred here as the motion vector refinement. Four adjacent macroblocks in the full-scale video are mapped into one macroblock in its downscaled version. Hence, in various approaches [57, 66, 129, 162], the refined motion vector in the downscaled block is computed from those four vectors of adjacent macroblocks of the original video (compressed with the MPEG video compression standard). Some of these approaches are discussed in the following subsections. 6.3.2.1

Adaptive Motion Vector Resampling (AMVR)

In the AMVR technique [129] the motion vector for the downsampled block − −→ is computed as a weighted average of the four motion vectors of the mv d corresponding macroblocks of the original video. Let us denote the motion −→, 1 ≤ i ≤ 4. Then − −→ is given by the vectors of those macroblocks as − mv mv i d following relationship: P4 −−→ − −→ = 1 i=1 mvi Wi , mv (6.53) P4 d 2 i=1 Wi

where Wi is the weight of the motion vector for the ith vector. In the above computation, weights are adaptively determined from the residual errors of the respective blocks. Ideally, the refined motion vector should be one, which minimizes (at least locally) the residual error of prediction in the downsampled sequence. The weights are chosen in such a way that the performance of the resulting vector is close to it. In [129], several heuristics have been explored to this end. For example, when all the weights are equal, the AMVR computation turns out to be a simple case of averaging, which is referred to as align-to-average weighting (AAW). However, it is found that in most cases there are better approximations than this. Another policy −→’s. For example, we is choosing the refined motion vector from one of the − mv i choose the ith block, which has maximum or minimum residual error among these four. These strategies are known as align-to-the-worst weighting (AWW) or align-to-the-best weighting (ABW), respectively. Experimentally, it is observed that the AWW approach gives the best performance (reportedly on an average of a 0.5 dB improvement from others) in most cases out of the above three. However, there are other ways to determine the weights from the residual errors. For example, they may be made proportional to the number of nonzero quantized AC coefficients.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

221

Transcoding

6.3.2.2

Median Method

In this approach [127], a motion vector corresponding to one of four macroblocks in the full-scale video is chosen for the refinement operation. The criterion for the selection is that it should be the median vector among them. A median of a set of vectors is defined in the following. In this definition, let us restrict ourselves to the set of four vectors. However, the same concept is applicable to any number of vectors in the set. → → → → Let V = {− v1 , − v2 , − v3 , − v4 } form the set of motion vectors for adjacent blocks → in the full-scale video. The distance between a vector − vi ∈ V and V is defined as follows: → d(− vi , V ) =

4 X

j=1(j6=i)

→ → k− vi − − vj k,

(6.54)

→ → where k − u k is the Euclidean norm of the vector − u. − → The median vector vm is defined as one of these vectors that has the least distance from V , that is, − → v→ min {d(− vi , V )}. m = arg → − vi ∈V

−→ in the downsampled frame is computed as Finally, the motion vector − mv d 6.3.2.3

− v→ m 2 .

Nonlinear Motion Vector Resampling (NLMR) Method

In this approach [66], a likelihood measure for each candidate motion vector to be the representative of the set is estimated, and then the vector with the best likelihood score is chosen for the refinement operation. To perform this task, initially clusters of aligned motion vectors are computed. A pair of motion vectors belong to the same cluster if the cityblock [52] distance d between them is less than 1. Let those vectors be represented as (vx1 , vy1 ) and (vx2 , vy2 ). The cityblock distance d between them is computed as d =| vx1 − vx2 | + | vy1 − vy2 | .

(6.55)

In this method, finally each motion vector is associated with a set of four features, namely, the activity of macroblock (A), quantization step size (Q), size of the cluster to which it belongs (C), and the magnitude of motion vector (M ). A likelihood score Li (initial value being set at zero) is computed for each ith motion vector according to the following rule: The Li is incremented whenever the i-th parameter A, Q, C is highest or the i-th parameter M is the lowest among the macroblocks. The motion vector corresponding to the highest likelihood score is chosen for the downscaled macroblock. However, if there is more than one motion vector with the same likelihood score, their weighted average provides the representative vector. It has been reported in [116] that the performance of

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

222

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

all the three techniques mentioned before are more or less the same. However, the NLMR technique provides marginal improvement, when it is used for fastmoving videos.

6.3.3

Macroblock Type Declaration

Deciding the type of the macroblock in the downscaled video is also a task to be accomplished in the process of downsizing. In [56], a simple approach to selecting the type of a macroblock is presented. In this scheme, a downscaled macroblock is intra-coded if the number of intracoded macroblocks in the full-scale video is greater than 2. Moreover, in B frames, we should specify whether the downscaled macroblock is predicted from its previous or next frame. It may be bidirectional also. According to the scheme reported in [56], a downscaled macroblock is forward (backward) predicted if three or more of the four original macroblocks have forward (backward) prediction. Otherwise, it is bidirectionally predicted.

6.3.4

Downsizing MPEG2 Video

In [116] a DCT-based video downscaling system is presented. In Figure 6.8, the block diagram of the video downscaling system is shown. In this approach, the input video is VLC-decoded and inverse-quantized to get the DCT blocks. The interblocks are converted to intrablocks using the MBIMC scheme, and subsequently all the intrablocks are downscaled using a DCT domain image halving algorithm [36]. The AMVR technique [129] is used to compute the new motion vector for the downscaled video stream. Using this motion vector, residual errors for the downscaled video are computed in the DCT domain. For computing these errors, the predicted block is first formed using the MBIMC technique. Next, the type of the macroblock is determined using the technique (referred to as the MTSS in the block diagram) reported in [56]. Finally, from the inverse motion compensated macroblock, the corresponding predicted block is subtracted to provide the residual errors in the DCT domain. These DCT error blocks are further quantized and VLC encoded. If the type of downscaled macroblock is declared as intra, residual errors are not computed. For having control over the bit rate of the downscaled video, a scaling factor on quantization steps is also used. In [129] a hybrid video downscaling system is proposed which performs a few operations in the spatial domain and others in the DCT domain. In this method, the input video is decoded completely and then downscaled in the spatial domain. However, the motion vector is derived from the motion vectors of the input video. To this end, the AMVR technique [129] is used. Using the derived motion vector, motion compensation for the downscaled video is performed in the spatial domain. Finally, the residual errors are encoded per MPEG standards. A hybrid approach to video downscaling reduces the

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

223

Transcoding

Input Video

VLC Decoder

Buffer

AMVR

Q -1

motion vector

+

DCT Frame

MBIMC

Intra DCT Blocks

DCT Downscaling

Q Step Size DCT Frame

+

Q

VLC Encoder

Q -1

Buffer

-

Down-scaled Video +

MTSS

DCT Based Motion Compensation

DCT Frame

Figure 6.8: DCT domain based video downscaling system.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

224

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

computation cost by a significant amount. However, as reported in [116], the pure DCT-based scheme provides better quality of downscaled video.

6.3.5

Arbitrary Video Downsizing

In [86], a hybrid scheme for arbitrary video downsizing is presented. Following the same approach of [129], in this case, motion vectors for downsized macroblocks are derived from the motion vectors of the full-scale video. Other operations related to downscaling are performed in the spatial domain. As the downsizing factor may not be an integer, motion vectors in the support area of the downsized macroblock are considered in the estimation. From the weighted average of these motion vectors, the downscaled motion vector is computed. In this case, the weights are not only computed from the activity of the corresponding macroblock, but also from its area of intersection with the support. Let hi × wi be the number of pixels in the area of the support −→. If the area of supwithin the ith macroblock with its motion vector as − mv i −→ is port consists of n such macroblocks, the downscaled motion vector − mv d estimated as follows:

− −→ = mv d

1 sv

0

0 1 sh

n X

− −→A B mv i i i

i=1 n X

,

(6.56)

Ai Bi

i=1

where sh and sv are arbitrary downscaling factors in the horizontal and vertical directions. Ai is the spatial activity of the ith macroblock, computed from its residual error and Bi = hi × wi . In [86], the same technique is applied to the H.263 encoded videos, and it is reported that introduction of weighting factors Bi ’s improves the PSNRs of the downscaled video by around 2 dB compared to the scheme using the AMVR technique with its adaptation to the arbitrary downsizing. Another example of a hybrid scheme for downscaling the HDTV video (of frame size 1920 × 1024) to the SDTV video (of frame size 720 × 384) is reported in [160]. In this case, both the television standards use MPEG-2 video compression, and motion vectors in the downscaled SDTV video are estimated from motion vectors of the corresponding macro blocks in the HDTV stream. The basic rate conversion is performed in the spatial domain. In this specific case, the area of support for the downscaled macroblock is found to be overlapping with an area of 4 × 4 adjacent macroblocks. Hence, the downscaled −→ is estimated from a set of sixteen motion vectors, − −→, motion vector − mv mv d i − − → 1 ≤ i ≤ 16. In this scheme, mvd is given by the following expression: 1 0 − − → −→}), 8 mvd = W M ({− mv (6.57) i 0 13 −→}) is the weighted median of the set of motion vectors. Given where W M ({− mv i

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

Transcoding

225

the corresponding set of weights Wi , 1 ≤ i ≤ n, the weighted median vector − −− → is computed as follows: mv m   n   X − −− → = arg min − −→ − − −→ k . mv W k mv mv m i i j − −→∈V   mv i j=1(j6=i)

6.4

Frame Skipping

Sometimes it is required to reduce the frame rate by dropping frames, resulting in lowering of the required bit rate of video transmission. Frame skipping may happen on the fly during the transmission. It may also be planned before transmission by judging the constraint imposed in a changing scenario. When a frame is dropped, reconstruction of macroblocks in subsequent frames referring to it gets affected, and it is required to compute new motion vectors for those macroblocks with respect to the nearby retained frame in the stream. Frame dropping may also occur over an interval. In that case, the cascading sequence of reconstruction needs to be taken care of. As mentioned earlier, the key concern of skipping a frame or a group of consecutive frames is to reestimate motion vectors of their adjacent frame. The computational problem is explained here with the help of an illustration in Figure 6.9. In Figure 6.9, the predicted block PB of a macroblock MB overlaps with four adjacent macroblocks numbered as 1, 2, 3, and 4 in the reference frame. Hence, the resulting motion vector of the current block should be determined by the set → → → of motion vectors of those macroblocks in the reference frame (− v1 , − v2 , − v3 , and → − v4 in Figure 6.9). There are different approaches to performing this operation. A few of them are discussed below. 1. Bilinear Interpolation [63]: In [63] a motion vector corresponding to the target macroblock in the current frame is computed through bilinear interpolation of motion vectors accumulated in a cascading fashion from its referred set of macroblocks in the reverse sequence. However, the vector thus accumulated is further refined by searching the local minima of the SAD within a small window around it. The size of this window is determined by the number of skipped frames and the accumulated magnitudes of their motion vectors. 2. Forward Dominant Vector Selection (FDVS) [166]: In this method [166], a motion vector from the set of adjacent four macroblocks in the skipped frame is chosen in such a way that the predicted block of the current macroblock has the maximum overlap with the chosen macroblock. For example in Figure 6.9, suppose the predicted block PB → has the maximum overlap with the macroblock 2. In that case, − v2 is

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

226

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

v2 v1 Non-skipped Frame (i-2)

v4 v3 1

2 P PB

3

4

v

Skipped Frame (i-1) MB

Current Frame (i)

Figure 6.9: Motion Vector propagation from skipped frame. chosen out of the four vectors and is used for determining the motion vector with respect to the (i − 2)th frame. This process is repeated for each consecutively dropped frame until it encounters a nonskipped frame. However, for an increasing number of consecutive drops, the distance between the anchor frame and the current frame increases. In the process, there may be a mismatch in corresponding macroblock types, which have to be recomputed. 3. Telescopic Vector Composition (TVC)[127]: This technique follows a simple procedure of accumulating the resultant motion vector from all the motion vectors of the corresponding macroblocks of the dropped frames. A further refinement is searching local minima of the SAD over a small window around the location of the resultant vector. In this technique also, the macroblock type requires to be computed. 4. Activity-Dominant Vector Selection (ADVS) [23]: In this approach, the dominant vector is chosen based on the activity information of the macroblock in the reference frame. The activity information of a macroblock is computed by counting the number of nonzero quantized DCT coefficients of the residual error in the corresponding macroblock. We use other statistics also, such as the sum of the absolute values of

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

227

Transcoding

Table 6.3: Distinguishing features of main profiles of MPEG-2 and H.264/AVC Features Motion estimation accuracy Motion Vectors Number of Reference Frames Macroblock partitions Intra frame spatial prediction types Transform used Entropy encoding

MPEG-2 1 2 pel

H.264/AVC 1 4 pel

Restricted by frame boundary 1 for P frames and 2 for B frames 16 × 16, 16 × 8 (interlace) None

May occur outside the frame boundary Up to 16 frames

Type-II 8 × 8 DCT VLC

4 × 4 ICT CAVLC/CABAC

16 × 16, 16 × 8, 8 × 16, 8 × 8, 8 × 4, 4 × 8, 4 × 4 9 types

DCT coefficients, etc. The advantage of this scheme compared to the FDVS is that it is faster to compute. In [2], it is observed that the FDVS and the ADVS provide almost identical results. However, the latter has slight edge over fast-moving videos. The TVC is the fastest among all the above techniques, though its picture quality is a little poorer than the others. Most of the schemes use a hybrid approach for transcoding video with skipped frames by taking into account decoded frames in the pixel domain. However, in [46], a scheme is suggested which virtually performs a cascaded inverse motion compensation through the sequence of dropped frames in the DCT domain. Hence, the resulting macroblocks in the nonskipped frame becomes an intrablock. Though it has the disadvantage of losing coding efficiency, the encoding complexity reduces to a great extent by this process. The quality of the result also improves significantly.

6.5

Video Transcoding

In this section, we discuss transcoding techniques between two different compression standards, namely, the MPEG-2 and the H.264/AVC standards. In Table 6.3, the distinguishing features of the main profiles of these two compression standards are summarized [102]. Usually, the technique used for the transcoding is cascaded pixel domain transcoding (CPDT), where decoding of the source video stream is followed by its encoding by the different standard (see Figure 6.10). However, this process is aided by exploiting the relevant information already available in the compressed stream (see Figure 6.11). The latter technique is referred to as a hybrid approach to transcoding. However, there are also efforts to perform many tasks related to transcoding in the DCT/ICT domain itself. Hence, some of the issues and techniques for resolving them in video downsizing are also ap-

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

228

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

Compressed Video (Scheme A)

Decoder (Scheme A)

Uncompr essed video

Encoder (Scheme B)

Compressed Video (Scheme B)

Figure 6.10: Cascading pixel domain transcoder. Parameter Converter

Compressed Video (Scheme A)

Decoder (Scheme A)

Uncompr essed video

Encoder (Scheme B)

Compressed Video (Scheme B)

Figure 6.11: Transcoding aided by relevant information from the compressed stream. plicable in this case. In this type of transcoding with heterogeneous standards, we need to perform inverse motion compensation (IMC), macroblock type selection, and motion vector refinement as elaborated in subsequent sections.

6.5.1

H.264 to MPEG-2

In [102], a hybrid transcoding scheme for converting an H.264 video into an MPEG-2 stream is presented. The architecture of this scheme is shown in Figure 6.12. As outlined in the hybrid transcoding approach of Figure 6.11, in this case also the H.264 video stream is decoded, and at the same time different information (or parameters) about macroblocks of inter frames is extracted and passed to the MPEG-2 encoder. The set of parameters extracted from the compressed stream includes the type of each frame, the type of each macroblock, and the set of motion vectors related to a partitioning of each macroblock. These parameters are mostly used to reduce the computation related to motion estimation in the MPEG-2 encoder (see to the MC block in the Encoder module of Figure 6.12). Besides in this approach, some of the macroblocks of intraframes are also directly converted into an intra-macroblock of the MPEG-2 stream in the transform domain following the conversion methods reported in [73]. In subsequent subsections, let us discuss a few specific issues related to the motion estimation and conversion of macroblocks of interframes and intraframes.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

229

Transcoding

H.264 Stream

Entropy Decoder

Q -1

+

T -1

Filter

Intra Pred .

MC

Decoder

Decoded Picture Buffer

Pict_type mb _type MVs Parameter Converter

Parameter Extractor

Converter

ICT /DCT

+

Picture and Buffer Control

T

Q

VLC MPEG -2 Stream

MC

Decoded Picture Buffer

+

T -1

Q -1

Encoder

Figure 6.12: Hybrid transcoder from H.264 to MPEG-2 (adapted from [102]).

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

230 6.5.1.1

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

Motion Estimation

A macroblock of an interframe of H.264 standard is partitioned in different ways (see Section 1.5.3.5 of Chapter 1 and Table 6.3). However, in MPEG-2, a macroblock has only 1 or 2 motion vectors, depending on whether it belongs to a P frame or a B frame. For estimating these motion vectors in the transcoded video, motion vectors of different partitions of the H.264 macroblock are used. In fact, if we consider that all of them refer to the previous frame, a simple method of selecting one of them is to go for the vector resulting in the least amount of residual error (from the SAD computation). However, in the H.264 standard, the reference frame may not always be the previous or the next frame of the current one. Hence, we need to rescale these vectors if they point → to a different frame (other than these two). Suppose a vector − v refers to the k → 1− backward frame. In that case, this vector is rescaled to k v to bring it within the domain of the previous frame only. To include the prediction from the next frame, we further consider the motion vector in its negative direction → (i.e., − k1 − v ). This concept is extended to handle motion vectors that point to regions outside the frame boundary. Moreover, H.264 works with quarter pixel accuracy in determining a motion vector. Hence, the corresponding vector is also scaled by 2 and rounded off to provide the motion vector with half-pixel resolution as specified in the MPEG-2 standard. By deriving a set of motion vectors using the above techniques from the H.264 macroblock, a vector is chosen for the MPEG-2 macroblock, that provides the least residual error. The SAD computation for these vectors is performed in the spatial domain as the decoded frames are available from the decoding module of the transcoder. In [102] a further search around these vectors within a small window (say, of size 3 × 3) is also carried out to improve the performance of the transcoder at the cost of marginal increase in computation. We may use the inverse motion compensation in the ICT domain for converting these macroblocks into intramodes as reported in [73]. 6.5.1.2

Skip Macroblock

In H.264, skip macroblocks are differently treated from what is done in MPEG2. For P macroblocks, the skip indicates in H.264 that either the motion vector is zero or it remains the same as the corresponding block in the previous frame. In MPEG-2, it is considered a macroblock with zero motion vector. Hence, this becomes a special case of the H.264 skip definition for P frames. However, for B macroblocks, both the cases are included in the MPEG-2 standard. Hence, no extra processing is required for their conversion. 6.5.1.3

Intramacroblock

There are nine intraprediction modes in H.264 and out of them for three modes (horizontal, vertical, and DC prediction modes), compressed domain techniques for their direct conversion from ICT domain to the DCT domain

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

Transcoding

231

are reported in [73] and [102]. These techniques also have some computational advantages with respect to spatial domain processing. However, for other modes, spatial domain processing is resorted as the equivalent computation becomes complex and inefficient in the transform domain. Moreover, with different types of partitioning in a macroblock, there could be 94 = 6561 possible permutations of these intraprediction modes. Hence, pixel domain conversion is preferred in this case. 6.5.1.4

Advantage of the Hybrid Approach

The foremost advantage of the hybrid approach is the savings in computation of motion vectors in the encoder, which usually covers 70% of its total computational cost. Hence, there is a saving of around 60% in the computation with almost no loss in the quality of transcoding with respect to the CPDT [102]. Moreover, when the estimate is further refined with a search around a small 3 × 3 window, an improvement of 0.3 dB is observed at the cost of a 5% increase in the computation cost.

6.5.2

MPEG-2 to H.264

Conversion of MPEG-2 video into an H.264 stream is simpler compared to its reverse operation, as most of the features of MPEG-2 are retained as special cases in H.264. Using the conversion from 8 × 8 DCT block to four 4 × 4 ICT blocks as discussed previously in this chapter (see Section 6.1.4), simple transcoding operations may be performed. However, as H.264 is more efficient in compressing videos, we would like to exploit its additional features in the transcoded stream. This requires different postprocessing operations even after straightforward conversion of frames. As an example, let us consider a scenario [161], where the intraframes are only transcoded from the MPEG-2 standards to the H.264 standards. An architecture of this scheme is shown in Figure 6.13. In this approach (see Figure 6.13), the mode for intrablock prediction for rate-distortion optimization (RDO) is decided in the transform domain. It has been shown in [161] that by using temporal correlation of mode decision in collocated blocks, we substantially reduce the computation with near-optimal performance of the transcoder.

6.6

Error Resilient Transcoding

Error resilience in an encoded stream is attributed to its tolerance and adaptability to the varying channel conditions of video transmission. It is difficult for an encoder to have prior knowledge about the characteristics of the communication channel, which may include multiple hops through routers and

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

232

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

MPEG -2 I-Frame Sequence

VLD

Q -1 H.264 I-Frame Sequence DCT /ICT

+

+

Entropy Encoder (H.264)

Q Q -1 + + +

Intra Prediction (ICT domain)

Inverse ICT

Pixel Buffer Mode Selection (ICT domain)

Figure 6.13: Transcoder for Intra H.264 to Intra MPEG-2 (adapted from [161]).

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

233

Transcoding Input Video

Video Encoder

Low-loss Network

Error Resilient Transcoder

High-loss Network

Video Decoder

Output Video

Figure 6.14: Error-resilient transcoding in video transmission (adapted from [145]). switches. Moreover, today’s world of network connectivity has become more heterogeneous. In particular, a range of client devices are operating over wireless channels. For delivering video content over these channels reliably, we should have error-resilient transcoding of video streams, acting as an interface between a low-loss network (such as a wired network) and a high-loss network (such as a wireless network). A schematic diagram of this interface is shown in Figure 6.14. There are different approaches to error-resilient coding. Some of them are listed below. 1. Data partitioning and inserting more synchronization markers: In [121], a scheme is proposed that modifies the encoding stream by introducing more slices and intrablocks with motion compensation in an encoded frame. The first one offers the synchronization points of spatial resiliency, and the latter provides the temporal resiliency. In [121], for reliable performance of the transcoder, the points of synchronization are adaptively chosen considering a model of error propagation in the decoder. 2. Error-resilient entropy coding (EREC): In [140], error resiliency encoding for an MPEG-2 video stream is proposed by putting variablelength code blocks (VLC) into a fixed-length frame called EREC frame. Given N code blocks of the video stream, there are N EREC frames of fixed size, which is the average of the sizes of code blocks. Hence, blocks shorter than this length are well fitted within this frame. But longer blocks need to occupy additional spaces besides its exclusive EREC frame. These spaces are made available from the empty space of frames containing shorter blocks. The decoder also works on the same principle, given the knowledge of fixed frame size of EREC frames and rules of packaging of code blocks within them. In this case, the frame size should be included in the encoded stream as an additional overhead. However, the packaging rule simply follows the fitting of an individual block in its slotted frame from the starting index. If there is any empty space, rest of codes from successive larger blocks are packed inside. Hence encoded stream does not require any explicit additional information of this ordering. The advantage of this scheme lies in the fact that fixed length EREC frames act as synchronization units. Hence a corrupted frame is

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

234

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

dropped instead of all the frames between two synchronization markers in the stream. 3. Reference frame selection (RFS): In this approach, given the knowledge of corrupted frame through a feed back channel, the transcoder adaptively shifts the reference of encoding of future frames. In that case, the error of reconstruction does not get propagated within two synchronization frames of a GOP. One simple technique for selecting the reference frame is to encode all the P frames from their nearest I frames, which are transmitted uncorrupted. However, this makes the process computationally intensive. In [19], these operations are carried out for macroblocks by updating their motion estimates and prediction errors following the similar strategy of frame skipping and inverse motion compensation. 4. Adaptive intra refresh (AIR): In this approach [35], redundant intramacroblocks are inserted in the video stream to arrest error propagation. However, this significantly increases the overhead of transmission. Hence, to regulate the bit rate, new quantization parameters are determined and used in the encoding.

6.7

Summary

Transcoding of images and videos is required due to heterogeneity of client devices and network connectivity. It also increases the interoperability of multimedia systems. A transcoder may produce the output stream in the same encoding standard of that of the input, by altering its spatial and/or temporal resolutions. This type of transcoding includes resizing of images and videos, skipping of frames of a video, etc. The other kind of transcoder is heterogeneous in character, which converts a stream from one standard to another. For example, we may transcode a JPEG2000-encoded image into a JPEG-compressed one. Similarly, we may convert an H.264 video into MPEG2. Error-resilient transcoding is another type of transcoding, which operates both on the intermediate symbols (such as DCT coefficients) and the entropyencoded code blocks. The objective of this type of transcoding is to provide a reliable and robust interface for transmission of media between a low-loss (such as wired network) and a high-loss (such as wireless network) network.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

Chapter 7 Image and Video Analysis

7.1

7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 7.6

7.7

Image and Video Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1.1 Document Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1.2 Caption Localization in a Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1.3 Shot Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Object Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Image Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Watermarking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steganography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Image and Video Indexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.6.1 Image Indexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.6.2 Video Indexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.6.2.1 Key Frame Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.6.2.2 Key Video Object Plane Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

235 236 238 239 241 243 245 246 247 247 248 248 249 250

In previous chapters, we discussed various image and video processing operations in the compressed domain such as filtering, color processing, resizing, and transcoding. These techniques and their variants are applied also in various other applications of analysis of images and videos in the compressed domain. They include video editing tasks such as document processing, caption localization, shot detection, etc. There are also different methods of indexing videos using features computed from the block DCT and the DWT space. Image and video digital watermarking and steganography in the compressed domain are also a major topic of research in the area of multimedia security. In this chapter, we review some of the representative approaches to compressed domain analysis of images and videos.

7.1

Image and Video Editing

We consider in this section different applications related to editing of images and videos in the compressed domain. To this end, let us review a few representative techniques of document processing, caption extraction, shot detection, and document merging in the transform domain. 235

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

236

7.1.1

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

Document Processing

In [33], a technique for processing JPEG compressed document images is presented. Various operations such as scaling, previewing, rotation, flipping, cropping, etc., are performed directly in the compressed domain. The interesting part of this work is that it also proposes algorithms for processing the entropyencoded JPEG stream. Toward this, a measure on the cost of encoding a DCT block is used. The encoding cost is the number of bits allocated to the block in the stream. In this way, we obtain the encoding map (ECM) of an image as the distribution of encoding costs over the blocks. Given the ECM, it is possible to parse a video stream by extracting blocks or a set of adjacent blocks without performing entropy decoding. Hence, it is suggested in [33] to include the ECM, its row-sums, and decimated DC maps as side information in the compressed stream at the cost of a marginal increase in the size of the compressed data. However, we can also derive the ECM while decoding the entropy-encoded stream. The ECM provides important clues on activities of blocks. A smooth block without much detail has a low encoding cost, while occurrence of edges leads to higher values. Using the ECM, various operations such as cropping, segmentation, etc., are performed in the compressed domain. Typically, halftone regions in documents have high values in the ECM. Again, regions with text have higher concentration around their edges. Shaded regions have the sparse distribution of significant costs, and the background has very low encoding cost. However, the ECM alone is not sufficient for providing good segmentation. We should use other information such as DC coefficient of the block in addition to it for robust segmentation of different components of the document. For example, a high DC value with low encoding cost indicates that the block most likely belongs to the background. Availability of the ECM makes recompression of the processed image easier. It involves rearrangement and modification of entropy-encoded stream of blocks by readjustment of their DC offsets and end of block markers. In [33], apart from the ECM, DCT coefficients are also used in the processing. For example, decimation and interpolation operations on images are carried out through block truncation and zero padding, respectively, as discussed in Chapter 5 on image resizing. DCT coefficients are also used for performing operations such as flipping and rotation by 90o , 180o , etc., of an individual block. Using the fast computational property of DCT for performing flipping as discussed in Eq. (3.27) in Chapter 3, these are easily performed. For the convenience of discussion, let us review the relationship here. A flipping matrix Φ8 is denoted as follows:   0 0 ... 0 1 0 0 . . . 1 0  Φ8 =    ... 1 0 ... 0 0 Let Ψ8 be the diagonal matrix given below.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

237

Image and Video Analysis



1 0 0 0 −1 0  Ψ8 =  0 0 1  0 0 0

... ... ... ... ...

0 0 0

0 0 0



     0 −1

In that case, C8 Φ8 = Ψ8 C8 . From this relationship, we obtain the following. Theorem 7.1 Let the rotated blocks of X by 90o , −90o , and 180o be denoted as X90 , X−90 , and X180 , respectively. Let XVM and XHM , respectively denote its vertical and horizontal mirrors. In that case, they are given by the following operations: X90 = Ψ8 XT , X−90 = XT Ψ8 , X180 = Ψ8 X, (7.1) XHM = XΨ8 , XVM = Ψ8 X. We observe that the above computations can be performed without any multiplication. Even the magnitudes of the coefficients remain same. It is only the sign of a coefficient that may vary after transformation. Hence, it is possible to perform simple editing in the entropy-coded stream. Moreover, by exchanging the code segments using the ECM, it is possible to perform rotation and flipping operations over the whole image. A typical example of document processing with a JPEG2000-compressed stream is also worth mentioning here. In [122], two regions of two different compressed images are merged by carrying out operations in entropy-coded streams. The technique exploits different synchronization markers of the code structure in the JPEG2000 stream, starting from tiles, precincts, and code blocks (see Section 1.4.2 of Chapter 1). JPEG2000 also defines quality layers for a precinct, which is divided into a set of packets, each containing an incremental contribution from each of its code blocks. Hence, a complete JPEG2000 code-stream is described as a concatenated list of packets, together with special marker segments mainly used for defining coding parameters. The ordering of these packets may vary depending on the needs of the application. In the technique presented in [122], structural elements (such as tiles, precincts, and codeblocks) are exchanged between two codestreams to merge a region of one image into another, without substantially affecting the image content within either region. In this approach, it is assumed that both the encodings are performed using the same parameters. A precinct with its quality layers can be modeled as a pyramid whose bottom to top layers define multiresolution representation of wavelet coefficients for a region. Hence, for inserting a region from a source image to the destination one, we need to identify these pyramids from their precinct structure.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

238 I-Frame

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

Compute horizontal variation and output blocks with higher variation

Merge adjacent blocks to form segments with morphological post-processing

Compute average vertical variation for each segment and filter out segments with low values.

Text Regions

Figure 7.1: Block diagram for computation of caption localization from an I-Frame. Then, the selected code structure is replaced from the source, resolution by resolution. This usually modifies the length of the codestream and hence we need to update information related to markers in it. However, in this technique, merging of regions is only possible along the boundaries of partitions in the images created during the encoding process.

7.1.2

Caption Localization in a Video

A few techniques have been put forward for localizing text in videos in the compressed domain. In [164], embedded captions are extracted from partially uncompressed MPEG video, by obtaining a low-resolution video from original MPEG sequences using either the DC components or the DC components plus two AC components of each block of I-frames (refer Eq. (4.14) of Chapter 4). By observing large interframe differences, text regions are detected as they indicate the appearance and disappearance of captions in video frames. However, the technique is limited by the fact that it is only capable of detecting captions that abruptly appeared or disappeared. In [49], another technique is proposed to detect text appearance events by counting the number of intracoded blocks in P or B-frames. This approach assumes that in the event of appearance and disappearance of captions, the corresponding blocks are usually intracoded. Due to its simplistic assumption, it is only applicable to the video segment which has a smooth shot transition between two I-frames. In our discussion, we consider a texture-based caption localization technique proposed by Zhong et al. [169], which has more general applicability in detecting captions compared to the other two techniques discussed before. The technique is applicable to both JPEG images and MPEG videos as it deals with only I-frames of a video. The technique proposed in [169] exploits the fact that there are DCT coefficients in the block that measure the directionality and periodicity of local image blocks. Using those coefficients, an 8 × 8 block is classified as text or nontext block. This preliminary selected set of candidate text blocks is further refined by performing postprocessing operations, such as morphological smoothing and cleaning, connected component analysis followed by filtering with more rigorous selection criteria. A block diagram of the technique is shown in Figure 7.1. It is based on the intuitive observation that characters in a text line are

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

Image and Video Analysis

239

responsible for a high response to the horizontal harmonics as they introduce rapid changes in intensity values. At the same time, a text region should also have a high response in vertical harmonics due to the occurrences of multiple text lines one after another in the vertical direction. These variations are measured by aggregating DCT coefficients associated with these harmonics. Consider that X(i, j), 0 ≤ i, j, ≤ 7, represent a DCT block in the luminance component. The horizontal variations and vertical variations are expressed as Eh and Ev respectively. Eh Ev

= =

v2 X

j=v1 h2 X i=h1

|X(0, j)|, (7.2) |X(i, 0)|.

In [169], values of v1 , v2 , h1 , and h2 are taken as 2, 6, 1, and 6, respectively. The thresholding for selecting the candidate text blocks in the first stage of computation (see Figure 7.1) is made adaptive by making it 1.45 times the average Eh of all the blocks in the frame. Morphological operations such as closing and opening are carried out over the decimated image (considering unit blocks as points in the space) with a structuring element of size 1 × 3 for smoothing and eliminating spurious blocks, respectively. Then, connected components of adjacent blocks are formed. Finally, the segments with high average value of Ev are accepted as text regions. On experimentation with 8 different videos consisting of 2360 I-frames, a recall rate of 99.17% with a false acceptance ratio of 1.87% was reported in [169]. The technique fails when the text font is large and characters are widely spaced, leading to low values of Eh and Ev in individual blocks.

7.1.3

Shot Detection

Shot detection is an important task required for analyzing videos. A shot is defined as the consecutive frames in a video that are captured with same camera view. A number of techniques are reported for detecting shots in the spatiotemporal domain of video. However, a few attempts are also made to perform this analysis in the compressed domain. For example, in [6], a technique for detecting cut is proposed by considering consecutive I-frames in the compressed stream. In this technique, for each frame a subset of DCT coefficients is selected as a representative vector and the normalized innerproduct between vectors of two consecutive frames provide a measure of scene change. In [163], a technique is developed for shot detection by obtaining a low-resolution video from the DC coefficients of the blocks. Though DC coefficients for I-frames are easily obtained, we need to carry out inverse motion compensation to obtain DC values from P and B frames. Then any of the existing spatiotemporal shot detection techniques could be applied to this low-resolution video. A similar technique is also reported in [130]. In this case,

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

240

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

cuts and gradual transitions are detected by comparing color histograms of consecutive frames of the low-resolution video. Zhang et al. [167] used both motion vectors (MVs) and AC coefficients to measure the scene change in the block DCT space. In this technique, potential shot transitions are detected by a pairwise comparison of DCT coefficients of corresponding blocks of I frames. In the next stage, on examining the MVs of selected areas, the change is verified and the exact location of the cut is computed. However, the metric for cut detection does not work well with static frames. In [85], direct binary edge maps are computed from the five lower-order AC coefficients1 in blocks with the measurement of their strength and orientation. Next, histograms of these measurements are compared between two consecutive frames for detecting shot transitions. In [77], shot detection is performed by taking into account macroblock coding modes and motion vectors in P and B frames. The task is accomplished in a two-pass scheme. In the first pass, potential shot boundaries are located in P frames with the help of rule-based modules. These are refined in the next pass using a neural network. The latter also becomes useful in distinguishing dissolves from object and camera motions, leading to further subdivision of a detected shot. For formation of rules, a specific sequence of picture types in a GOP is considered, namely, “IBBPBBPBBPBB”. In the first scan, temporal peaks in the number of intra-coded MBs in P frames are detected. They are good indicators of abrupt and gradual transitions. To find the exact location of the cuts, rules that check the number of backward and forward MBs in the context of two adjacent B frames are applied. For detecting the precise location of the black fade2 boundaries, other sets of ordered rules using the number of interpolated, backward, and intracoded MBs are used. Ends of fade-outs are determined from the number of interpolated and backward MBs within its 4 adjacent B frames. Similarly, beginnings of fade-ins are obtained by checking the number of backward, interpolated and intra MBs of up to 3 B and 1 P frames. In the second scan, a learning vector quantizer (LVQ) [76] is used to distinguish dissolves from object and camera movements and to precisely locate boundaries of the gradual transitions found by the rough scan.

1 (i, j)th

coefficient in the block such that i + j ≤ 2. a video fade, the sequence gradually fades to (or from) a single color, usually black or white. A black fade is gradual fading to (or from) a black frame. 2 In

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

241

Image and Video Analysis

Training Samples

DCT

Select Freq . Bands Z1

Compute Linear Discriminant Transform (W ) WZ 1

Test Samples

DCT

Select Freq . Bands Z2

NN classification

Object Class

WZ 2

Figure 7.2: Block diagram for recognition of faces and palmprints.

7.2

Object Recognition

There have also been a few efforts in identifying events and objects in the compressed domain. In particular, quite a few techniques have been reported for detection and recognition of human faces and actions. They find their applications in biometry and video surveillance. Some of them are discussed in this section. In [68], features from DCT frequency bands are selected using a separability measure for their applications in face and palmprint recognition with the help of a linear discriminant based classification. In this approach, the kth frequency band R(k) of the DCT block X is defined as follows: R(k) = {X(i, j)|max(i, j) = k} .

(7.3)

Through separability analysis, a set of frequency bands is recommended for the discriminant analysis. In the next stage, using an improved Fisherface method [15], linear discriminant functions are obtained, which further reduces the dimension of the feature space. Finally, using nearest-neighbor classification the recognition of the object (face or palmprint as the case may be) takes place. The block diagram of this approach is shown in Figure 7.2. With this system, a high recognition rate on different databases ranging from 97.5% to 98.13% is reported. In [150], the computation for detecting faces in I-frames of MPEG video is carried out in three stages. First, based on DC values of chrominance blocks, skin regions are identified. Due to 4 : 2 : 0 sampling of components, each chrominance block corresponds to a 16 × 16 macroblock in the luminance component. Hence, the candidate face blocks are obtained in units of macroblocks, which are merged to form segments for a possible face region. Before merging, morphological operations are carried out to cover gaps and eliminate spurious blocks in the processing. In the next stage, further pruning in the numbers of candidate regions

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

242

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

Y-Component

Cb & Cr Components

Face Macroblock Classification

Skin-tone Statistics

Bounding Rectangle Detection

Shape Constraint

Final Verification

Face regions

Energy Distribution

Figure 7.3: Block diagram for face detection. takes place by considering allowable aspect ratios of bounding rectangles for human faces, which is taken as a value within the interval between 1 and 1.7. This provides considerable tolerance in the allowed values. There are also other constraints imposed in accepting a region, such as areas of the bounding rectangles. The accepted set of regions is further tested by a binary template matching technique. The templates are formed by considering possible combinations of aspect ratios and sizes. In the final stage of this computation, candidate face regions are verified by examining the energy content in vertical and horizontal frequencies of the blocks. As the face region contains considerable details, it is expected that proportional amounts of these components should be quite high. The block diagram of this technique is shown in Figure7.3. The technique reported a detection accuracy ranging from 85% to 92% on different data sets. In [28], however, verification order for face detection is reversed. Here, first gradient energy components in horizontal, vertical, and diagonal directions are computed following the same approach of aggregating pertinent DCT coefficients. These energy components form feature vectors and are used in a classifier for detecting candidate face macroblocks. In this regard, two types of classifiers are used. One is rule based, where relative proportions of different energy components determine the face or nonface regions. The other classifier is used as a neural network trained by labeled samples. In the final stage, candidate face macroblocks are verified from the chrominance components, which should belong to skin colors. In [28] it is reported that the technique achieved an overall detection rate of 75% at a precision of 83% using the rule-based approach. Using the neural network, the corresponding values were improved to 85% and 89%. In [11], motion vectors of macroblocks for P and B frames are used to classify human actions such as walking, running, jumping, bending up, bending down, twisting right, and twisting left. The classifier used in this work is a hidden Markov model (HMM) classifier. Three different types of feature vec-

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

Image and Video Analysis

243

tors are formed from the distribution of motion vectors, which are normalized in each frame with respect to nearest P frames. The GOP of the MPEG video in this work is considered in the form of “IB1 B2 P B1 B2 . . . ” with a length of 12 frames. As macroblocks of B frames have both forward and backward motion vectors, one of these groups is considered for a frame. For example, for B1 frames, forward vectors are used, while for B2 , backward vectors are considered. Feature vectors are formed from these normalized motion vectors for a frame in the following way. 1. 1-D projection descriptor: In this case, only horizontal and vertical components of motion vectors are considered. The distribution of these components as a histogram over a set of finite intervals from the feature vectors. 2. 2-D polar descriptor: Motion vectors are represented in polar coordinates and distribution over the discrete cells in the polar coordinate space provide feature vectors. 3. 2-D Cartesian descriptor: Distribution of motion vectors in discrete cells of the cartesian coordinate space provides the third type of feature vector. In the training phase, k-means clustering over the set of feature vectors for a known action is carried out, and each cluster generates a symbol for the given action, and the cluster representative represents the corresponding symbol. A feature vector from a frame is classified into one of these symbols using the nearest neighbor classifier and the sequence of these symbols provides the observation sequence for the HMM classifier, which is trained to detect an action and is used as a classifier subsequently. Using this technique, a recognition accuracy of more than 90% has been achieved for the set of actions mentioned before.

7.3

Image Registration

Image registration is the process of computing a global transformation between two images such that one of them after transformation gets aligned with the other. In the compressed domain, very few attempts have been made in this problem. They are also limited to handling image translation only. In [83], such a technique for computing translation between two images is reported. The technique deals with only DC coefficients, which form low-resolution images for both of them and then use edge-based cross-correlation measure to detect the translation, if any, between two images. As the low-resolution image is reduced by 18 th in each dimension, the translation offsets are multiplied by 8

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

244

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

to provide the values in the original image space. To provide the robustness in the process, four edge detectors along four different directions are applied. The binary maps produced by each of them are used for detecting the translation parameters providing the maximum cross-correlation measure in the image space. Finally, the one with the maximum score (out of the four derived offsets) is chosen for image registration. A technique for computing registration between two images is presented in [64], which uses the sign only correlation (SOC) between two images in the DCT space. The concept of the SOC is extended from the phase-only correlation (POC), which is defined in the DFT domain. The POC has the advantage of estimating transformation parameters related to translation, rotation and scaling with subpixel accuracy. In [64], the relationship between the SOC and the POC has been established for using the former in estimating the translational displacement between two images in the DCT space. Let us discuss this useful relationship. Given a sequence x(n), consider its DFT as Xf (k) and its type-II DCT as Xc (k). We represent Xf (k), a complex number, with its magnitude and phase ′ term as Xf (k) = |Xf (k)|Xf (k). On the other hand Xc (k) being a real number, its phase term is represented by its sign (+/−) and in the same notation ′ ′ factorize Xc (k) as |Xc (k)|Xc (k). Note that the value of nonzero Xc (k) could be either 1 or −1. Definition 7.1 Given two sequences x(n) and y(n), their cross-spectrum Rf (K) in the DFT domain is defined as follows: ′

′

Rf (K) = Xf (k)(Yf (k))∗ , where (A)∗ denotes the complex conjugate of A.

(7.4)

The inverse transform of the cross-spectrum provides the phase only correlation (POC) between two sequences. Its definition is given below. Definition 7.2 The POC of two sequences x(n) and y(n) is defined as rf (n) =

N −1 k 1 X Rf (K)ej2π N n , N

(7.5)

k=0

where N is the length of the sequences.

The DCT sign-only correlation (SOC) is similarly defined from the crossspectrum of DCT phases (+1, −1, or 0). The inverse operation over this cross-spectrum is a type-I DCT inverse. The precise definition is given below. Definition 7.3 Given two sequences x(n) and y(n) of length N , its crossspectrum Rc (K) in the DCT domain is defined as follows. ′

′

Rc (K) = Xc (k)Yc (k).

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

(7.6)

245

Image and Video Analysis

Then the SOC between x(n) and y(n) is defined as rc (n) =

N X

α(k)Rc (K) cos(

k=0

where Rc (N ) = 0 and α(k) is α(k) is 1.

1 2

πkn ), N

(7.7)

for k = 0 and k = N . For other values of k,

It is shown in [64] that the DCT SOC is the same as the POC from the DFT of symmetric extensions of two sequences. The symmetric extension corresponds to the type-II DCT of the sequence, which means it is an ‘HSHS’ type of extension (see Section 2.2.3.2 of Chapter 2). Hence, the peak in rc (n) provides the necessary translational parameter for registering x(n) with respect to y(n). In some work [7, 8, 16], a similarity measure Sc based on the SOC is used for image matching and retrieval as defined below. Sc =

N −1 1 X Rc (k), K

(7.8)

k=0

where K is a constant. It can be shown that for K = N , Sc is the same as rc (0). Hence, the SOC can be used for finding the similarity between two images in the DCT domain.

7.4

Digital Watermarking

A digital watermark is a kind of digital signature, which is embedded in a multimedia object for attaching the ownership of the signatory. Watermarking techniques have become useful in enforcing copyright protection of a document, so that the embedded signature is detected or extracted later for the purpose of authentication of the source. A few techniques [22, 58, 89] are also reported in the compressed domain for watermarking compressed documents. We present here a technique [89] that embeds a watermarking bit in midfrequency DCT coefficients of a block. The middle of the frequency band is chosen as even a slight modification to low-frequency coefficients causes perceptible loss of fidelity of the image. On the other hand, due to compression and other operations, high-frequency components are liable to get eliminated. This destroys the watermarking signatures from the image. Let Xi be the ith 8 × 8 DCT block. Let us consider the serialization of the frequency components in such a way that selected bands of frequencies are represented consecutively in the sequence f (k) ∈ Xi , 0 ≤ k ≤ 63. Say the selected band occurs between k0 and k1 such that k0 < k1 . Let u(i) define

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

246

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

the mean values of this set of coefficients such that u(i) =

1 k1 −k0 +1

k1 X

f (k).

k=k0

Let us also represent the mean of u(i)s as u. The technique modulates f (i) in such a way that in the embedded stream, their mean becomes greater than modified u if the ith watermarking bit wi is 1. Otherwise, the modified u(i) will be less than u. It has been shown in [89] that this is accomplished with the following processing of the u(i)’s in the embedded stream. Let u(i) be modified to uh (i) as given below. uh (i) = u(i) + dh (i) where dh (i) =

+|Q(i)| − (u(i) − u) −|Q(i)| − (u(i) − u)

(7.9) if w(i) > 0 if w(i) < 0

(7.10)

In the above, Q(i) is flexibly chosen for the ith block and usually kept at a constant value for all the blocks. To bring the above changes in u(i), each f (k) of the ith block between k0 and k1 is changed in the same way. The technique is reported to be robust against various attacks for destroying watermarks.

7.5

Steganography

Steganography is the art of hiding data by embedding messages in innocuous looking objects, such as digital images. The embedding process modifies the original (cover) image and turns it into a stego image. However, to an outsider, the image appears as normal and natural as any other in the set. Only the concerned communicating ends share a secret stego key to decipher the message from the stego image. A steganographic process should ensure the statistical undetectability of the hidden data given the complete knowledge of the embedding mechanism and the source of cover objects but not the stego key [115]. Various techniques [9, 22, 118] have been put forward for performing steganography in the compressed domain. A few representative ones are briefly discussed here. The JSteg [9] is one of the initial implementations of the steganography in the JPEG domain, where the least significant bits of quantized DCT coefficients are used for embedding. However, it excludes values such as 0 and 1, which cause distortion in the image to a great extent. As the JSteg introduces characteristics artifacts into the histogram of DCT coefficients, it is easily detectable by histogram-based attacks [154]. To overcome this bottleneck, techniques preserving statistical properties of cover images are also advanced. For example, Provos [118] proposed an algorithm that first identifies the redundant DCT coefficients that have a minimal effect on the cover image, and then chooses bits in which it embeds the message.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

Image and Video Analysis

247

In [138], DCT coefficients in the cover image are partitioned into two sets. One partition is used for data embedding, and the other one is kept for statistical restoration. To this end, a statistical restoration method is proposed, so that histogram modification due to alterations in the embedded set is compensated by changing coefficients in the restoration set. One of the constraint of this operation is to keep the mean square error (MSE) at a minimum while modifying the histogram. To ensure this, all the bins of the target histogram are compensated in an increasing order by mapping the input data with values in the same order. Another technique for steganography in the DCT domain is through quantization index modulation (QIM) [22]. In QIM [22], the choice of quantizers varies depending on stego message bits.

7.6

Image and Video Indexing

Indexing images and videos is the task of attributing them to a reference key, and useful for their storage and retrieval operations in a database management system. This key reference could be in the form of a feature descriptor, textual annotation, or representative part of the data. In the transform domain, there are quite a few works reported for indexing images that exploit their representation in the alternative form, and use them in forming feature vectors. In the following, we discuss a few of them. Subsequently, we have also considered video indexing that primarily focuses on its segmentation into shots and detecting key frames in a shot.

7.6.1

Image Indexing

In [137], initially an image is represented by a feature vector of dimension 32 from its 4 × 4 block DCT representation. The fields of the vector are formed by the means and variances of DCT coefficients of each spatial frequency (16 in number) across the image. The variance and the mean absolute values of each of these coefficients are computed over the entire image. Further, using Fisher discriminant analysis (FDA), the dimensionality of the feature vector is reduced. The FDA provides a linear combination of original components such that on average the resulting fields are maximally separated among training classes. The feature vector after reduction of dimensionality is used for indexing. Reeves et al. [120] used a similar concept in obtaining a feature descriptor. However, they operated on the 8 × 8 block DCT space. In this case, the feature vector is formed using variances of the first eight AC coefficients. This approach is computationally less intensive than the former approach. In [133], an image is represented by a binary string of length 16 consisting of 0 and 1 only. The technique considers a random selection of 16 pairs of windows (multiples of 8 × 8 blocks in the JPEG standards) in a random

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

248

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

sequence and compares each pair with their feature descriptors. A similar pair appends 0 in the string, otherwise it appends 1. The feature descriptor is generated from the average of DCT coefficients of blocks belonging to a window. This provides 64 features for a window. If the corresponding feature values of the two are very close (within a threshold), the pair generates 0 in the key string; otherwise it is 1. While searching over a set of images, each target image is converted into the key binary string of length 16 following the same sequence of comparison of pairs of windows at the same locations of the query image. The Hamming distance between the two provides the measure of similarity. There are efforts in the DWT domain as well. In [21], a texture analysis scheme is presented through irregular tree decomposition, where similarity is computed from the moderate-resolution subband coefficients. In this scheme, the K most important subbands (based on their energy) are used to form a K-dimensional feature vector.

7.6.2

Video Indexing

As mentioned, video indexing mostly involves selection of the key frames in a shot. Some of the shot detection algorithms have already been discussed before. Here, we discuss a few representative techniques related to key frame extraction. 7.6.2.1

Key Frame Selection

Like shot detection, for extracting key frames also, different techniques use information related to texture coding modes (intra, inter, etc.), the motion vectors, and the significant changes in DC coefficients, etc., from the compressed video. In [10], a feature vector descriptor is used for representing a frame of a shot by taking into account its color and motion information. Prior to this, the video is converted into a low-resolution video by representing every block of its frames by their DC coefficients. The technique for obtaining such a video follows from [163]. There are several computational steps involved in the process of this conversion. First, the shot is segmented using color and motion information. Next, a fuzzy classification scheme is used to convert the frame with a feature vector, where each field of the vector denotes an accumulated sum of membership function to different color and motion classes (defined a priori). In the final stage of computation, key frames are extracted following two approaches. In one approach, the temporal trajectory of the feature vector in a multidimensional space is analyzed. The points of discontinuities of the curve (in this case, second-order discontinuities) provide the key frame locations. However, this generates too many key frames. Hence, in another approach, using a cross-correlation measure between a pair of feature vectors, an optimal set of a fixed number (known or assumed a priori) of key frames is

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

249

Image and Video Analysis MPEG Video Shot Detection

Sequence Analysis

Fuzzy Feature Vector Formation

Key Frame Extraction

Key Frames

Figure 7.4: Block diagram for selection of key frames. selected, which minimizes the average cross-correlation of all possible pairs in the set. The optimization process is further carried out through a logarithmic search or by a genetic algorithm (GA)-based technique. The block diagram of the extraction process is shown in Figure 7.4. 7.6.2.2

Key Video Object Plane Selection

In the MPEG-4 compression standard, representation of video is object-based. In this case, individual video objects (VOs) are encoded into separate bit streams (see Section 1.5.2 of Chapter 1). A temporal instance of a video object is called a video object plane (VOP). Similar to key frames of an MPEG-2 video, in MPEG-4 key VOPs are useful for visual summarization of the video object content in an object-based framework. Hence, instead of looking for key frames we would be interested in searching for the key video object plane. In [40], a technique for selecting the key video object plane using the shape information from an MPEG-4 compressed video is presented. Encoding of VOPs is quite similar to the coding of a sequence of frames in MPEG-2, as discussed in Chapter 1. In this case, each I-VOP is encoded independently following the principles of encoding of textures of I frames similar to those of MPEG-2. For P and B VOPs, motion compensation and predictive coding are used. A binary mask fitted into a bounding rectangle of the object describes the shape of a VOP. The mask is known as the binary alpha plane, which defines whether a pixel belongs to the object or not. These data are also transmitted along with the usual shape information in encoded macroblocks corresponding to the same area. In [40], the shape of the video object (VO) is represented by the shape-coding modes of I, P, and B video object planes, as it avoids decoding of the shape information in the MPEG-4 bit stream. There are three shape-coding modes possible for IVOPs, namely, 1) transparent, if the block is empty; 2) opaque, if it is full; and 3) intra, if the block lies at the boundary of the object. In fact, in the compressed stream, only intrashape coding information is retained as others could be derived by analyzing the shape of the boundary blocks. The intrashape coding may be lossy also. On the other hand, for P and B VOPs, there exist seven shape-coding modes according to the MPEG-4 standard. In addition to the transparent, opaque, and intra-coding modes, there are also four inter-shape coding modes involving the transmission of motion vectors and prediction information. It is only when the quality of prediction is not good, that the intrashape coding

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

250

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

mode is employed for them. Characterization of a block to one of three intra shape modes is possible only when the VOP is decoded and the topological relationship of the block with respect to the object is determined. However, to save computation, in [40] these modes are predicted based on a set of rules operating with information available from intrashape modes of the same location from temporally nearer frames. Finally, on assigning each block a value corresponding to its intrashape coding mode, a feature vector is formed to represent the VOP. In the beginning the first VOP of the stream is considered the key VOP. Subsequently, following the appearance of VOPs in the temporal order, a distance between the key VOP and the VOP newly appeared is measured using modified forms of Hamming and Hausdorff distance [52] functions. If the distance is significant (that is, greater than a threshold), the new VOP is replaced as the Key VOP. In this way, the sequence of key VOPs are computed.

7.7

Summary

In this concluding chapter, a brief treatment of different types of analysis of images and videos in the compressed domain is presented. Representative techniques of different video editing operations, object recognition, image registration, digital watermarking and steganography, and image and video indexing are discussed. This list is not all-inclusive. Analysis and processing of images and videos in the compressed domain are required for accomplishing many other tasks, with the objectives of saving computational time and storage, as well as improving quality of results. The present study only highlights some of the fundamental aspects and key concepts behind the development of such techniques.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

Bibliography

[1] S. Aghagolzadeh and O.K. Ersoy. Transform image enhancement. Opt. Eng., 31:614–626, Mar. 1992. [2] I. Ahmad, X. Wei, Y. Sun, and Y.Q. Zhang. Video transcoding: An overview of various techniques and research issues. IEEE Trans. Multimedia, 7(5):793–804, Oct. 2005. [3] N. Ahmed, N. Natarajan, and K.R. Rao. Discrete cosine transform. IEEE Trans. Comput., pages 90–92, Jan. 1974. [4] M. Antonini, M. Barlaud, P. Mathieu, and I. Daubechies. Image coding using wavelet transform. IEEE Trans. Image Process., 1(2):205–220, Apr. 1992. [5] Y. Arai, T. Agui, and M. Nakajima. A fast DCT-SQ scheme for images. Trans. IEICE, E71:1095–1097, Nov. 1988. [6] F. Arman, A. Hsu, and M.-Y. Chiu. Image processing on encoded video sequences. Multimedia Syst., 1:211–219, 1994. [7] F. Arnia, I. Iizuka, M. Fujiyoshi, and H. Kiya. Compressed domain action classification using HMM. IEICE Trans. Fundamentals, E89A(6):1585–1593, June, 2006. [8] F. Arnia, I. Iizuka, M. Fujiyoshi, and H. Kiya. Fast and robust identification methods for JPEG images with various compression ratios. In Proc. IEEE Int. Conf. Speech, Acoust. Signal Process., pages II–397–II–400, Toulouse, France, May, 2006. [9] I. Avcibas, M. Kharrazi, N.D. Memon, and B. Sankur. Image steganalysis with binary similarity measures. EURASIP J. Appl. Signal Process., 17:2749–2757, 2005. [10] Y.S. Avrithis, A.D. Doulamis, N.D. Doulamis, and S.D. Kollias. A stochastic framework for optimal key frame extraction from MPEG video databases. Comput. Vis. Image Understanding, 75(1/2):3–24, July/Aug. 1999. [11] R.V. Babu, B. Anantharaman, K.R. Ramakrishnan, and S.H. Srinivasan. Compressed domain action classification using HMM. Pattern Recognition Lett., 23:1203–1213, 2002. 251

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

252

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

[12] K. Barnard, V. Cardei, and B. Funt. A comparison of computational color constancy algorithms- part i: Methodology and experiments with synthesized data. IEEE Trans. Image Process., 11(9):972–984, Sept. 2002. [13] K. Barnard, V. Cardei, and B. Funt. A comparison of computational color constancy algorithms- part ii: Experiments with image data. IEEE Trans. Image Process., 11(9):985–996, Sept. 2002. [14] K. Barnard, L. Martin, B. Funt, and A. Coath. A data set for color research. Color Res. Appl., 27(3):148–152, 2000. [15] P. N. Belhumeur, J. P. Hespanha, and D. J. Kriegman. Eigenfaces vs. fisherface: Recognition using class specific linear projection. IEEE Trans. Pattern Analysis Machine Intelligence, 19(7):711–720, July, 1997. [16] J. Bracamonte, M. Ansorge, F. Pellandini, and P. A. Farine. Efficient compressed domain target image search and retrieval. In Proc. 4th Int. Conf. Image Video Retrieval, pages 154–163, Singapore, July 2022, 2005. [17] G. Buchsbaum. A spatial processor model for object colour perception. J. Franklin Inst., 310:1–26, 1980. [18] W.K. Cham. Development of integer cosine transforms by the principle of dyadic symmetry. IEE Proc., Part I, 136(4):276–282, Aug. 1989. [19] Y.L Chan, H.K. Cheung, and W.C. Siu. Compressed-domain techniques for error-resilient video transcoding using RPS. IEEE Trans. Image Process., 18(2):357–369, Feb. 2009. [20] S. F. Chang and D. G. Messerschmitt. Manipulation and compositing of MC-DCT compressed video. IEEE J. Sel. Areas Commun., 13(1):1–11, Jan. 1995. [21] T. Chang and C.C.J. Kuo. Texture analysis and classification with treestructured wavelet transform. IEEE Trans. Image Process., 2(4):429–441, Oct. 1993. [22] B. Chen and G.W. Wornell. Quantization index modulation: A class of provably good methods for digital watermarking and information embedding. IEEE Trans. Information Theory, 47(4):1423–1443, May, 2001. [23] M.-J. Chen, M.-C. Chu, and C.-W. Pan. Efficient motion-estimation algorithm for reduced frame-rate video transcoder. IEEE Trans. Circuits Syst. for Video Technol., 12(4):269–275, Apr. 2002. [24] W.-H. Chen, C.H. Smith, and S.C. Fralick. A fast algorithm for the discrete cosine transform. IEEE Trans. Commun., COM25(9):1004– 1009, Sept. 1977.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

Bibliography

253

[25] N.I. Cho and S.U. Lee. A fast 4 × 4 DCT algorithm for the recursive 2-D DCT. IEEE Trans. Signal Process., 40(9):2166–2173, Sept. 1992. [26] N.I. Cho, I.D. Yun, and S.U. Lee. On the regular structure for the fast 2-D DCT algorithm. IEEE Trans. Circuits Syst. II: Analog Digital Signal Process., 40(4):259–266, Apr. 1993. [27] C. Christopoulos, A. Skodras, and T. Ebrahimi. The JPEG2000 still image coding system: an overview. IEEE Trans. Consumer Electron., 46(4):1103–1127, Nov. 2000. [28] T.-S Chua, Y. Zhao, and M.S. Kankanhalli. Detection of human faces in a compressed domain for video stratification. Vis. Comput., 18:121–133, 2002. [29] CIE. Colorimetry. Central Bureau CIE, 15(2), 1986. [30] I.J. Cox, M.L. Miller, J.A. Bloom, J. Fridrich, and T. Kalker. Digital Watermarking and Steganography. Morgan Kaufmann, Burlington, MA, 2nd edition, 2008. [31] I. Daubechies. Ten Lectures on Wavelets., volume 61. CBMS-NSF Regional Conf. Series in Appl. Math. Society for Industrial and Appl. Mathematics, Philadelphia, PA, 2004. [32] I. Daubechies and W. Sweldens. Factoring wavelet transforms into lifting steps. J. Fourier Anal. Appl., 4(3):247–268, 1998. [33] R.L. de Queiroz. Processing JPEG-compressed images and documents. IEEE Trans. Image Process., 7(12):1661–1672, Dec. 1998. [34] S. Dewitte and J. Cornelis. Lossless integer wavelet transform. IEEE Signal Process. Lett., 4(6):158–160, 1997. [35] S. Dogan, A. Cellatoglu, M. Uyguroglu, A. H. Sadka, and A. M. Kondoz. Error-resilient video transcoding for robust internetwork communications using GPRS. IEEE Trans. Circuits Syst. Video Technol., 12(6):453–464, Jun. 2002. [36] R. Dugad and N. Ahuja. A fast scheme for image size change in the compressed domain. IEEE Trans. Circuits Syst. for Video Technol., 11(4):461–474, 2001. [37] P. Duhamel and C. Guillemot. Polynomial transform computation of the 2-D DCT. In Proc. IEEE Int. Conf. Acoustics, Speech and Signal Process., volume 3, pages 1515–1518, Albuquerque, New Mexico, Apr. 3–6, 1990. [38] P. Duhamel and H. H. Mida. New 2n DCT algorithms suitable for VLSI implementation. In Proc. IEEE Int. Conf. Acoustics, Speech, and Signal Process., volume 12, pages 1805–1808, Dallas, TX, Apr. 6–9, 1987.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

254

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

[39] M. Ebner, G. Tischler, and J. Albert. Integrating color constancy into jpeg2000. IEEE Trans. Image Process., 16(11):2697–2706, Nov. 2007. [40] B. Erol and F. Kossentini. Automatic key video object plane selection using the shape information in the MPEG-4 compressed domain. IEEE Trans. Multimedia, 2(2):129–138, June, 2000. [41] E. Feig and S. Winograd. Fast algorithms for the discrete cosine transform. IEEE Trans. Signal Process., 40(9):2174–2193, Sept. 1992. [42] G.D. Finlayson. Color in perspective. IEEE Trans. Pattern Anal. Machine Intelligence, 18(10):1034–1038, Oct. 1996. [43] G.D. Finlayson, S.D. Hordley, and P.M.Hubel. Color by correlation: a simple, unifying framework for color constancy. IEEE Trans. Pattern Anal. Machine Intelligence, 23(11):1209–1221, Nov. 2001. [44] D.A. Forsyth. A novel algorithm for color constancy. Int. J. Comput. Vis., 5(1):5–36, 1990. [45] M.W. Frazier. An introduction to wavelets through linear algebra. Springer-Verlag, New York, 1999. [46] K.T. Fung, Y.L. Chan, and W.C. Siu. New architecture for dynamic frame-skipping transcoder. IEEE Trans. Image Process., 11(8):886–900, Aug. 2002. [47] D. Le Gall. MPEG : A video compression standard for multimedia applications. Commun. ACM, 34(4):47–58, Apr. 1991. [48] D. Le Gall and A. Tabatabai. Subband coding of digital images using symmetric kernel filters and arithmetic coding techniques. In Proc. IEEE Int. Conf. Acoustics, Speech Signal Process., pages 761–764, New York, Apr. 3–6, 1988. [49] U. Gargi, S. Antani, and R. Kasturi. Indexing text events in digital video databases. In Proc. 14th Int. Conf. Pattern Recognition, pages 916–918, Brisbane, Australia, Aug. 17–20, 1998. [50] R. Gershon, A.D. Jepson, and J.K. Tsotsos. From [r,g,b] to surface reflectance: computing color constant descriptors in images. Perception, pages 755–758, 1988. [51] B. Girod, A.M. Aaron, S. Rane, and D. Rebollo-Monedero. Distributed video coding. Proc. IEEE, 93(1):71–83, Jan. 2005. [52] R.C. Gonzales and R. E. Woods. Digital Image Processing. AddisonWesley, Reading, MA, 1992. [53] R. C. Gonzalez and R. E. Woods. Digital Image Processing using MATLABr. Pearson Education, Indian Reprint 1st edition, 2004.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

Bibliography

255

[54] H.G. Grassmann. Theory of compound colors. Philos. Mag., 4(7):254– 264, 1854. [55] E.A. Guillemin. The Mathematics of Circuit Analysis. Oxford and IBH Publishing Co., (Indian Ed.), Calcutta, India, 1967. [56] M. R. Hashemi, L. Winger, and S. Panchanathan. Macroblock type selection for compressed domain downscaling of MPEG video. In Proc. IEEE Canadian Conf. Electrical and Computer Engineering, volume 4, pages 35–38, Kobe, Japan, Oct. 26–30, 1999. [57] M.R. Hashemi, L. Winger, and S. Panchanathan. Compressed domain motion vector resampling for downscaling of mpeg video. In Proc. IEEE Int. Conf. Image Process., volume 4, pages 276–279, Kobe, Japan, Oct. 26–30, 1999. [58] J.R. Hernndez, M. Amado, and F.P. Gonzlez. DCT-domain watermarking techniques for still images: Detector performance analysis and a new structure. IEEE Trans. Image Process., 9(1):55–68, Aug. 2000. [59] H. Hou. A fast recursive algorithm for computing the discrete cosine transform. IEEE Trans. Acoustics, Speech and Signal Process., 35(10):1455–1461, Oct. 1987. [60] Q. Hu and S. Panchanathan. Image/video spatial scalability in compressed domain. IEEE Trans. Ind. Electron., 45(Feb.):23–31, 1998. [61] R.W.G. Hunt. Measuring Colour. Ellis Horwood Ltd. Publ., Chichester, UK, 2nd edition, 1987. [62] Y.S. Park H.W. Park and S.K. Oh. L/M-image folding in block dct domain using symmetric convolution. IEEE Trans. Image Process., 12(9):1016–1034, Sept. 2003. [63] J.-N. Hwang and T.-D. Wu. Motion vector re-estimation and dynamic frame-skipping for video transcoding. In Conf. Rec. 32nd Asilomar Conf. Signals, System and Comput., volume 2, pages 1606–1610, Pacific Grove, CA, Nov. 2–5, 1998. [64] I. Ito and H. Kiya. DCT sign-only correlation with application to image matching and the relationship with phase-only correlation. In Proc. IEEE Int. Conf. Speech, Acoust. Signal Process., pages I–1237–I–1240, Honolulu, Hawai, Apr. 15–20, 2007. [65] A. Jacquin. Image coding based on a fractal theory of iterated contractive image transformations. IEEE Trans. Image Process., 1(1):18–30, 1992.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

256

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

[66] Seong Hwan Jang and Nikil Jayant. An adaptive non linear motion vector resampling algorithm for downscaling video transcoding. In Proc. IEEE Int. Conf. Multimedia and Expo, volume 2, pages 229–232, Baltimore, MD, July 6–9, 2003. [67] J. Jiang and G. Feng. The spatial relationships of dct coefficients between a block and its sub-blocks. IEEE Trans. Signal Process., 50(5):1160–1169, May, 2002. [68] X.-Y Jing and D. Zhang. A face and palmprint recognition approach based on discriminant DCT feature extraction. IEEE Trans. Syst. Man and Cybernatics Part B: Cybernatics, 34(6):2405–2415, Dec. 2004. [69] D. J. Jobson, Z. Rahman, and G. A. Woodell. Properties and performance of a center/surround retinex. IEEE Trans. Image Process., 6(3):451–462, Mar. 1997. [70] N. F. Johnson and S. Jajodia. Steganography: Seeing the unseen. IEEE Comput., (2):26–34, Feb. 1998. [71] D.B. Judd. Reduction of data on mixture of color stimuli. Bur. Standard J. Res., 4:515–548, 1930. [72] S.-H. Jung, S.K. Mitra, and D. Mukherjee. Subband dct: Definition, analysis and applications. IEEE Trans. Circuits Syst. for Video Technol., 6(3):273–286, June, 1996. [73] T. Kalyani, A. Bhartiya, V. Patil, R. Kumar, and J. Mukherjee. DCT domain transcoding of H.264/AVC video to MPEG-2 video. In Proc. 5th Indian Conf. Comput. Vis. Graphics Image Process., pages 696–707, Madurai, India, Dec. 14–16, 2006. LNCS-4338. [74] F. A. Kamangar and K. R. Rao. Fast algorithms for the 2-D discrete cosine transform. IEEE Trans. Comput., C-31(9):899–906, Sept. 1982. [75] M. Karczewicz and R. Kurceren. The SP- and SI-Frames design for H.264/AVC. IEEE Trans. Circuits Syst. for Video Technol., 13(7):637– 644, July, 2003. [76] T. Kohonen. The self-organizing map. Proc. IEEE, 78:1464–1480, 1990. [77] I. Koprinska and S. Carrato. Hybrid rule-based/neural approach for segmentation of MPEG compressed video. Multimedia Tools and Appl., 18:187–212, 2002. [78] M. Kovac and N. Ranganathan. JAGUAR: A fully pipeline VLSI architecture for JPEG image compression standard. Proc. IEEE, 83(2):247– 258, 1995.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

Bibliography

257

[79] R. Kresch and N. Merhav. Fast DCT domain filtering using the DCT and the DST. IEEE Trans. Image Process., 8:821–833, June 1999. [80] V. Kries. Handbuch der Physiologic des Menschen, volume 3. Braunschweig, Viewieg und Sohn, Germany, 1905. [81] E.H. Land. The retinex theory of color vision. Sci. Am., 3:108–129, 1977. [82] B. Lee. A new algorithm to compute the discrete cosine transform. IEEE Trans. Acoustics, Speech and Signal Process., 32(6):1243–1245, Dec. 1984. [83] M.-S. Lee, M. Shen, A. Yoneyama, and C.-C. Jay Kuo. DCT-domain image registration techniques for compressed video. In Proc. IEEE Int. Symp. Circuits Syst., volume 5, pages 4562–4565, Kobe, Japan, May 23–26, 2005. [84] S. Lee. An efficient content-based image enhancement in the compressed domain using retinex theory. IEEE Trans. Circuits Syst. for Video Technol., 17(2):199–213, Feb. 2007. [85] S.-W. Lee, Y.-M. Kim, and S.W.Choi. Fast scene change detection using direct feature extraction from MPEG compressed videos. IEEE Trans. Multimedia, 2(4):240–254, Dec. 2000. [86] Y. Liang, L.P. Chau, and Y.P. Tan. Arbitrary downsizing video transcoding using fast motion vector reestimation. IEEE Trans. Circuits Syst. for Video Technol., 9(11):352–355, Nov. 2002. [87] J.S. Lim. Two-Dimensional Signal and Image Processing. Prentice Hall, Englewood Cliffs, NJ, 1990. [88] C. Loeffler, A. Ligtenberg, and G. S. Moschytz. Practical fast 1-D DCT algorithms with 11 multiplications. In Proc. IEEE Int. Conf. Acoust. Speech, and Signal Process., volume 2, pages 988–991, Glasgow, Scotland, May 22–25, 1989. [89] C.-S. Lu. Block DCT-based robust watermarking using side information extracted by mean filtering. In Proc. IEEE Int. Conf. Pattern Recognition, volume 2, pages 1001–1004, Quebec, Canada, Aug. 11–15, 2002. [90] L. Lucchese, S.K. Mitra, and J. Mukherjee. A new algorithm based on saturation and desaturation in the xy chromaticity diagram for enhancement and re-rendition of color images. In Proc. IEEE Int. Conf. Image Process., pages 1077–1080, Thessaloniki, Greece, Oct. 7–10, 2001. [91] P.C. Mahalanobis. On the generalised distance in statistics. Proc. Nat. Inst. Sci. India, 12:49–55, 1936.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

258

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

[92] S. Mallat. A theory for multiresultion signal decomposition: the wavelet representation. IEEE Trans Pattern Anal. Machine Intelligence, 11(7):674–693, 1989. [93] S. Mallat. A Wavelet Tour of Signal Processing. Academic Press, Indian reprint, 2nd edition, 2006. [94] S. A. Martucci. Image resizing in the discrete cosine transform domain. In Proc. IEEE Int. Conf. Image processing, volume 2, pages 224–227, Washington, DC, Oct. 23–26, 1995. [95] S.A. Martucci. Symmetric convolution and the discrete sine and cosine transforms. IEEE Trans. Signal Process., 42(5):1038–1051, May, 1994. [96] P. Marziliano, F. Dufaux, S. Winkler, and T. Ebrahimi. Perceptual blur and ringing metrics: application to JPEG2000. Signal Process.: Image Commun., 19:163–172, 2004. [97] J.C. Maxwell. Theory of the perception of colors. Trans. R. Scottish Soc. Arts., 4:394–400, 1856. [98] J.C. Maxwell. The diagrams of colors. Trans. R. Soc. Edinburgh, 21:275– 298, 1857. [99] N. Merhav and V. Bhaskaran. Fast algorithms for dct-domain image down-sampling and for inverse motion compensation. IEEE Trans. Circuits Syst. for Video Technol., 7(6):468–476, 1997. [100] S. K. Mitra. Digital Signal Processing. Mcgraw Hill, New York, NY, 3rd revised edition, 2005. [101] S.K. Mitra and T.H. Yu. Transform amplitude sharpening: A new method of image enhancement. Comput. Vis. Graphics Image Process., 40:205–218, 1987. [102] S. Moiron, S. Faria, A. Navarro, V. Silva, and P. Assunc. Video transcoding from H.264/AVC to MPEG-2 with reduced computational complexity. Signal Process.: Image Commun., 24:637–650, 2009. [103] J. Mukherjee and S.K. Mitra. Arbitrary resizing of images in the dct space. IEE Proc. Vision, Image and Signal Process., 152(2):155–164, 2005. [104] J. Mukherjee and S.K. Mitra. Image filtering in the compressed domain. In Proc. 5th Indian Conf. Comput. Vis. Graphics Image Process., pages 194–205, Madurai, India, Dec. 14–16, 2006. LNCS-4338. [105] J. Mukherjee and S.K. Mitra. Enhancement of color images by scaling the dct coefficients. IEEE Trans. Image Process., 17(10):1783–1794, 2008.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

Bibliography

259

[106] J. Mukherjee and S.K. Mitra. Image resizing in the compressed domain using subband dct. IEEE Trans. Circuits Syst. for Video Technol., 12(7):620–627, July, 2002. [107] J. Mukhopadhyay. Isolating neighbor’s contribution towards image filtering in the block DCT space. In Proc. IEEE Int. Conf. Image Process., pages 2765–2768, Hong Kong, Sept. 25–30, 2010. [108] J. Mukhopadhyay and S.K. Mitra. Resizing of images in the dct space by arbitrary factors. In Proc. IEEE Int. Conf. Image Process., pages 2801–2804, Singapore, Oct. 24–27, 2004. [109] J. Mukhopadhyay and S.K. Mitra. Color constancy in the compressed domain. In Proc. IEEE Int. Conf. Image Process., pages 705–708, Cairo, Egypt, Nov. 7–11, 2009. [110] M.J. Narasimha. Linear convolution using skew-cyclic convolutions. IEEE Signal Process. Lett., 14(3):173–176, Mar. 2007. [111] A. Neri, G. Russo, and P. Talone. Inter-block filtering and downsampling in dct domain. Signal Process.: Image Commun., 6(Aug.):303–317, 1994. [112] V. Patil, R. Kumar, and J. Mukherjee. A fast arbitrary factor video resizing algorithm. IEEE Trans. Circuits Syst. for Video Technol., 16(9):1164–1171, Sept. 2006. [113] S.C. Pei and C.M. Cheng. Dependent scalar quantization of color images. IEEE Trans. On Circuits Syst. for Video Technol., 5(2):124–139, Apr. 1995. [114] S.C. Pei and Y.C.Zeng. Virtual restoration of ancient chinese paintings using color contrast enhancement and lacuna texture synthesis. IEEE Trans. Image Process., 13(3):416–429, 2004. [115] T. Pevny and J. Fridrich. Determining the stego algorithm for JPEG images. IEE Proc. Inf. Secur., 153(3):77–86, Sept. 2006. [116] S. Porwal and J. Mukherjee. A fast DCT domain based video downscaling system. In Proc. IEEE Int. Conf. Acoustics, Speech, Signal Process., pages 885–888, Toulouse, France, May 15–19, 2006. [117] S. Porwal and J. Mukherjee. An integrated approach for downscaling MPEG video. In Proc. 5th Indian Conf. Comput. Vis. Graphics Image Process., volume LNCS-4338, pages 686–695, Madurai, India, Dec. 14– 16, 2006. [118] N. Provos. Defending against statistical steganalysis. In Proc. 10th USENIX Security Symp., volume 10, pages 323–335, Washington, DC, Aug. 13–17, 2001.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

260

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

[119] M. Rabbani and R. Joshi. An overview of the JPEG 2000 still image compression standard. Signal Process.: Image Commun., 17(1):3–48, Jan. 2002. [120] R. Reeves, K. Kubik, and W. Osberger. Texture characterization of compressed aerial images using DCT coefficients. In Proc. SPIE: Storage and Retrieval for Image and Video Databases, volume 3022, pages 398– 407, Newport Beach, CA, Feb. 1997. [121] G. Reyes, A. R. Reibman, S. F. Chuag, and J. C. I. Chuang. Error resilient transcoding for video over wireless channels. IEEE J. Sel. Areas Commun., 18(6):1063–1074, Jun. 2000. [122] R. Rosenbaum and D. Taubman. Merging images in JPEG2000-domain. In Proc. Visualization, Imaging and Image Process., volume 1, pages 249–252, Benalmadena, Spain, Sept. 8–10, 2003. [123] S.-F.Chang and D.G. Messerschmitt. Manipulation and composition of mc-dct compressed video. IEEE J. Sel. Areas Commun., 13(1):1–11, 1995. [124] C.L. Salazar and T.D. Tran. On resizing images in the DCT domain. In Proc. IEEE Int. Conf. Image Process., volume 4, pages 2797–2800, Singapore, Oct. 24–27, 2004. [125] C.L. Salazar and T.D. Tran. A complexity scalable universal dct domain image resizing algorithm. IEEE Trans. Circuits Syst. for Video Technol., 17(4):495–499, 2007. [126] S.J. Sangwine and Eds. R.E.N. Horne. The Colour Image Processing Handbook. Chapman and Hall, London, 1998. [127] T. Shanableh and M. Ghanbari. Heterogeneous video transcoding to lower spatial-temporal resolutions and different encoding formats. IEEE Trans. Multimedia, 2(2):101–110, Jun. 2000. [128] J. Shapiro. Embedded image coding using zero trees of wavelet coefficients. IEEE Trans. Signal Process., 41(12):3445–3462, Dec. 1993. [129] B. Shen, I.K. Sethi, and V. Bhaskaran. Adaptive motion vector resampling for compressed video downscaling. IEEE Trans. Circuits Syst. for Video Technol., 9(6):929–936, Sept. 1999. [130] K. Shen and E. Delp. A fast algorithm for video parsing using MPEG compressed sequences. In Proc. IEEE Int. Conf. Image Process., volume 2, pages 252–255, Washington, DC, Oct. 23–26, 1995. [131] Y. Q. Shi and H. Sun. Image and Video Compression for Multimedia Engineering: Fundamentals, Algorithms and Standards. CRC Press, Taylor and Francis Group, Boca Raton, FL, 2008.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

Bibliography

261

[132] G.S. Shin and M.G. Kang. Transformed domain enhanced resizing for a discrete-cosine-transform-based code. Opt. Engg., pages 3204–3214, Nov. 2003. [133] M. Shneier and M.A. Mottaleb. Exploiting the JPEG compression scheme for image retrieval. IEEE Trans. Pattern Analysis Machine Intelligence, 18(8):849–853, Aug. 1996. [134] H. Shu and L.-P. Chau. An efficient arbitrary downsizing algorithm for video transcoding. IEEE Trans. Circuits Syst. for Video Technol., 14(6):887–891, June, 2004. [135] T. Sikora. MPEG : Digital video coding standard. IEEE Signal Process. Mag., 14(9):82–100, Sept. 1997. [136] B.C. Smith and L. Rowe. Algorithms for manipulating compressed images. IEEE Comput. Graph. Applicat. Mag., 13(Sept.):34–42, 1993. [137] J.R. Smith and S.F. Chang. Transform features for texture classification and discrimination in large image databases. In Proc. IEEE Int. Conf. Image Process., pages 407–411, Austin, TX, Nov. 13–16, 1994. [138] K. Solanki, K. Sullivan, U. Madho, B.S. Manjunath, and S. Chandrasekaran. Statistical restoration for robust and secure steganography. In Proc. IEEE Int. Conf. Image Process., volume 2, pages 1118–1121, Sept. 11–14, 2005. [139] S. Susstrunk and S. Winkler. Color image quality on the internet. In Proc. IS&T / SPIE Electronic Imaging 2004: Internet Imaging V, volume 5304, pages 118–131, San Jose, CA, Jan. 19, 2004. [140] R. Swann and N. Kingsbury. Transcoding of MPEG-II for enhanced resilience to transmission errors. In Proc. IEEE Int. Conf. Image Process., volume 2, pages 813–816, 1996. [141] J. Tang, E. Peli, and S. Acton. Image enhancement using a contrast measure in the compressed domain. IEEE Signal Processing Lett., 10(10):289–292, Oct. 2003. [142] D. Taubman. High performance scalable image compression with EBCOT. IEEE Trans. Image Process., 9(7):1158–1170, 2000. [143] P.E. Trahanias and A.N. Venetsanopoulos. Color image enhancement through 3-d histogram equalization. In Proc. 11th IAPR Int. Conf. Pattern Recognition, volume III, pages 545–548, The Hague, Netherlands, Aug. 20–Sept. 3, 1992. [144] A Vetro, C. Christopoulos, and H. Sun. Video transcoding architectures and techniques: an overview. IEEE Signal Process. Mag., 20(3):18–29, Mar. 2003.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

262

Image and Video Processing in the Compressed Domain

[145] A. Vetro, J. Xin, and H. Sun. Error resilience video transcoding for wireless communications. IEEE Wireless Commun., 12(4):14–21, Aug. 2005. [146] M. Vetterli. Fast 2-D discrete cosine transform. In Proc. IEEE Int. Conf. Acoustics, Speech and Signal Process., volume 10, pages 1538– 1541, Tampa, Finland, Mar. 26–29, 1985. [147] K. Viswanath. Image Transcoding in Transform Domain. PhD thesis, Dept. of Computer Science and Engineering, Indian Institute of Technology, Kharagpur, Feb. 2009. [148] K. Viswanath, J. Mukherjee, P. K. Biswas, and R. N. Pal. Wavelet to DCT transcoding in transform domain. Signal Image and Video Process., Springer, (4):129–144, 2010. [149] G. K. Wallace. The JPEG still picture compression standard. Commun. ACM, 34(4):30–44, 1991. [150] H. Wang and S.-F Chang. A highly efficient system for automatic face region detection in MPEG video. IEEE Trans. on Circuits Syst. for Video Technol., 7(4):615–628, Aug. 1997. [151] H. Wang, L.P. Kondi, A. Luthara, and S. Ci. 4G Wireless Video Communications. Wiley, Chichester, UK, 2000. [152] Z. Wang, A.C. Bovik, H.R. Sheikh, and E.P. Simoncelli. Image quality assessment: from error visibility to structural similarity. IEEE Trans. Image Process., 13(4):600–612, Mar. 2004. [153] Z. Wang, H.R. Sheikh, and A.C. Bovik. No-reference perceptual quality assessment of jpeg compressed images. In Proc. IEEE Int. Conf. Image Process., volume I, pages 477–480, Rochester, NY, Sept. 22–25, 2002. [154] A. Westfeld and A. Pfitzmann. Attacks on steganographic systems. In Proc. Third Int. Workshop on Information Hiding, volume LNCS-1768, pages 61–76, Dresden, Germany, Sept. 29–Oct. 1, 1999. Springer-Verlag. [155] T. Wiegand, G. J. Sullivan, G.Bjntegaard, and A. Luthra. Overview of the H.264/AVC video coding standard. IEEE Trans. On Circuits Syst. for Video Technol., 13(7):560–576, July, 2003. [156] S. Wolf, R. Ginosar, and Y. Zeevi. Spatio-chromatic image enhancement based on a model of humal visual information system. J. Visual Commun. and Image Representation, 9(1):25–37, Mar. 1998. [157] H.R. Wu and Z. Man. Comments on “fast algorithms and implementation of 2-D discrete cosine transform”. IEEE Trans. Circuits Syst. for Video Technol., 8(2):128–129, Apr. 1998.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

Bibliography

263

[158] H.R. Wu and F.J. Paoloni. A two-dimensional fast cosine transform algorithm based on Hou’s approach. IEEE Trans. Signal Process., 39(2):544– 546, Feb. 1991. [159] G. Wyszecki and W.S. Stiles. Color Science: Concepts and Methods, Quantitative Data and Formulae. New York: Wiley, 2nd edition, 1982. [160] J. Xin, M.T. Sun, B.S. Choi, and K.W. Chun. An HDTV-to-SDTV spatial transcoder. IEEE Signal Process. Lett., 12(11):998–1008, Nov. 2002. [161] J. Xin, A. Vetro, H. Sun, and Y. Su. Efficient MPEG-2 to H.264/AVC transcoding of Intra-coded video. EURASIP J. Adv. in Signal Process., doi:10.1155/2007/75310(ID 75310):12 (no.), 2007. [162] C.H. Yeh and C.J. Kuo. Polynomial motion vector resampling algorithm. In Proc. IEEE Int. Conf. Multimedia and Expo, pages 1144–1147, Tokyo, Japan, Aug. 22–25, 2001. [163] B.L. Yeo and B. Liu. Rapid scene analysis on compressed video. IEEE Trans. Circuits Syst. for Video Technol., 5(6):533–544, 1995. [164] B.L. Yeo and B. Liu. Visual content highlighting via automatic extraction of embedded captions on mpeg compressed video. In Proc. SPIE Digital Video Compression: Algorithms and Technologies, pages 142–149, San Jose, CA, Feb. 5–10, 1995. [165] C. Yim. An efficient method for DCT-domain separable symmetric 2-D linear filtering. IEEE Trans. Circuits Syst. for Video Technol., 14(4):517–521, Apr. 2004. [166] J. Youn, M.-T. Sun, and C.-W. Lin. Motion vector refinement for highperformance transcoding. IEEE Trans. Multimedia, 1(1):30–40, Mar. 1999. [167] H.J. Zhang, C.Y. Low, and S.W. Smoliar. Video parsing and browsing using compressed data. Multimedia Tools Appl., 1:89–111, 1995. [168] Q. Zhang, P.A. Mlsna, and J.J. Rodrigues. A recursive technique for 3-d histogram enhancement of color images. In Proc. IEEE Southwest Symp. Image Anal. Interpretation, pages 218–223, San Antonio, TX, Apr. 8–9, 1996. [169] Y. Zhong, H. Zhang, and A.K. Jain. Automatic caption localization in compressed video. IEEE Trans. Pattern Anal. Machine Intelligence, 22(4):385–392, Apr. 2000. [170] Z.Wang and A.C. Bovik. A universal image quality index. IEEE Signal Process. Lett., 9(3):81–84, Mar. 2002.

© 2011 by Taylor and Francis Group, LLC

(a) (b) Figure 1.28: Color image enhancement in the block DCT space: (a) Original, and (b) Enhanced image.

Original Image

(a)

Saturation in Nomralized CbCr

(b)

Figure 4.4: Maximum saturation in nCbCr: (a) image22, and (b) maximally saturated image.

Saturation (nCbCr)−Desaturation

(a)

nCbCr plot: After Saturation

0.8 0.6 0.4

nCr

0.2 0

O

−0.2 −0.4 −0.6 −0.6

−0.4

−0.2

0 nCb

0.2

0.4

0.6

0.8

(b)

Figure 4.6: (a) image22: Desaturation from the maximally saturated image,and (b) corresponding chromaticity plot in the nCbCr space.

Saturation in Nomralized CbCr

(a)

Saturation (nCbCr)−Desaturation

(b)

Figure 4.7: image22: (a) Maxsat in DCT, and (b) SatDesat in DCT.

(a) (b) (c) Figure 4.8: Example of color correction using COR-DCT: (a) original image, (b) diagonal correction, and (c) chromatic shift.

(a) (b) Figure 4.11: Original images: (a) image7, and (b) image20.

(AR) (MCE)

(MCEDRC) (CES) Figure 4.12: Color enhancement of the images.

(continued)

(AR) (MCE)

(MCEDRC) (CES) Figure 4.12: (continued) Color enhancement of the images.

(a) (b) Figure 4.13: Color enhancement of `image20’ obtained with more than one iteration: (a) 2, and (b) 3.

50

WBDT−all

45

PSNR (dB)

Guaranteed PSNR 40

35

30 Equivalent rate 25

0

0.5

45

rate (bpp)

1.5

2

2.5

(a)

JPEG2000 ST WBDT−all DAT

40 Equivalent PSNR (dB)

1

At 40 dB Guaranteed PSNR

35

30 At 30 dB Guaranteed PSNR 25

20

0

0.5

1 1.5 Equivalent rate (bpp)

(b)

(c)

2

2.5

Figure 6.2: JPEG2000 to JPEG transcoding for Lena image using the WBDT technique: (a) rate distortion for transcoded image with respect to the JPEG2000 decoded image (for 0.55 bpp encoded Lena image), (b)equivalent rate of the transcoder versus JPEG2000 compression rate, and (c)equivalent PSNR versus equivalent rate. (From [147] with permission from the author.)

40

35

PSNR dB

30 WBDT−all J2K−LL DAT WBDT−LL ST

25

20

15

10

0

0.1

0.2

0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 JPEG2000 compression (bpp)

0.7

0.8

(a)

35

PSNR dB

30

25

WBDT−all J2K−LL DAT ST WBDT−LL

20

15

10

0

0.1

0.2

0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 JPEG2000 compression (bpp)

0.7

0.8

(b)

Figure 6.3: Maximum PSNR values versus compression ratio:(a) Lena, (b) Peppers, (c) Girl, and (d) Baboon. (With permission from [147].)

(continued)

40

35

PSNR dB

30 WBDT−all J2K−LL DAT WBDT−LL ST

25

20

15

10

0

0.1

0.2

0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 JPEG2000 compression (bpp)

0.7

0.8

(c)

40

J2K−LL WBDT−all DAT WBDT−LL ST

35 30

PSNR dB

25 20 15 10 5 0

0

0.1

0.2

0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 JPEG2000 compression (bpp)

0.7

0.8

0.9

(d)

Figure 6.3: (continued) Maximum PSNR values versus compression ratio:(a) Lena, (b) Peppers, (c) Girl, and (d) Baboon. (With permission from [147].)